<<

Chemistry guide First assessment 2016

Chemistry guide First assessment 2016 Diploma Programme Chemistry guide

Published February 2014

Published on behalf of the International Baccalaureate Organization, a not-for-profit educational foundation of 15 Route des Morillons, 1218 Le Grand-Saconnex, Geneva, Switzerland by the

International Baccalaureate Organization (UK) Ltd Peterson House, Malthouse Avenue, Cardiff Gate Cardiff, Wales CF23 8GL United Kingdom Website: www.ibo.org

© International Baccalaureate Organization 2014

The International Baccalaureate Organization (known as the IB) offers four high-quality and challenging educational programmes for a worldwide community of schools, aiming to create a better, more peaceful world. This publication is one of a range of materials produced to support these programmes.

The IB may use a variety of sources in its work and checks information to verify accuracy and authenticity, particularly when using community-based knowledge sources such as Wikipedia. The IB respects the principles of intellectual property and makes strenuous efforts to identify and obtain permission before publication from rights holders of all copyright material used. The IB is grateful for permissions received for material used in this publication and will be pleased to correct any errors or omissions at the earliest opportunity.

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, without the prior written permission of the IB, or as expressly permitted by law or by the IB’s own rules and policy. See http://www.ibo.org/copyright.

IB merchandise and publications can be purchased through the IB store at http://store.ibo.org. General ordering queries should be directed to the Sales and Marketing Department in Cardiff.

Email: [email protected]

International Baccalaureate, Baccalauréat International and Bachillerato Internacional are registered trademarks of the International Baccalaureate Organization.

4070

IB mission statement The International Baccalaureate aims to develop inquiring, knowledgeable and caring young people who help to create a better and more peaceful world through intercultural understanding and respect.

To this end the organization works with schools, governments and international organizations to develop challenging programmes of international education and rigorous assessment.

These programmes encourage students across the world to become active, compassionate and lifelong learners who understand that other people, with their differences, can also be right.

© International Baccalaureate Organization 2014

Contents

Introduction 1 Purpose of this document 1 The Diploma Programme 2 Nature of science 6 Nature of chemistry 13 Aims 18 Assessment objectives 19

Syllabus 20 Syllabus outline 20 Approaches to the teaching of chemistry 22 Syllabus content 27

Assessment 167 Assessment in the Diploma Programme 167 Assessment outline—SL 169 Assessment outline—HL 170 External assessment 171 Internal assessment 173 The group 4 project 185

Appendices 190 Glossary of command terms 190 Bibliography 193

viii Chemistry guide

Introduction

Purpose of this document

This publication is intended to guide the planning, teaching and assessment of the subject in schools. Subject teachers are the primary audience, although it is expected that teachers will use the guide to inform students and parents about the subject.

This guide can be found on the subject page of the online curriculum centre (OCC) at http://occ.ibo.org, a password-protected IB website designed to support IB teachers. It can also be purchased from the IB store at http://store.ibo.org.

Additional resources Additional publications such as teacher support materials, subject reports, internal assessment guidance and grade descriptors can also be found on the OCC. Past examination papers as well as markschemes can be purchased from the IB store.

Teachers are encouraged to check the OCC for additional resources created or used by other teachers. Teachers can provide details of useful resources, for example: websites, books, videos, journals or teaching ideas.

Acknowledgment The IB wishes to thank the educators and associated schools for generously contributing time and resources to the production of this guide.

First assessment 2016

Chemistry guide 1 Introduction

The Diploma Programme

The Diploma Programme is a rigorous pre-university course of study designed for students in the 16 to 19 age range. It is a broad-based two-year course that aims to encourage students to be knowledgeable and inquiring, but also caring and compassionate. There is a strong emphasis on encouraging students to develop intercultural understanding, open-mindedness, and the attitudes necessary for them to respect and evaluate a range of points of view.

The Diploma Programme model The course is presented as six academic areas enclosing a central core (see figure 1). It encourages the concurrent study of a broad range of academic areas. Students study two modern languages (or a modern language and a classical language), a humanities or social science subject, a science, mathematics and one of the creative arts. It is this comprehensive range of subjects that makes the Diploma Programme a demanding course of study designed to prepare students effectively for university entrance. In each of the academic areas students have flexibility in making their choices, which means they can choose subjects that particularly interest them and that they may wish to study further at university.

Figure 1 Diploma Programme model

2 Chemistry guide The Diploma Programme

Choosing the right combination Students are required to choose one subject from each of the six academic areas, although they can, instead of an arts subject, choose two subjects from another area. Normally, three subjects (and not more than four) are taken at higher level (HL), and the others are taken at standard level (SL). The IB recommends 240 teaching hours for HL subjects and 150 hours for SL. Subjects at HL are studied in greater depth and breadth than at SL.

At both levels, many skills are developed, especially those of critical thinking and analysis. At the end of the course, students’ abilities are measured by means of external assessment. Many subjects contain some element of coursework assessed by teachers.

The core of the Diploma Programme model All Diploma Programme students participate in the three course elements that make up the core of the model. Theory of knowledge (TOK) is a course that is fundamentally about critical thinking and inquiry into the process of knowing rather than about learning a specific body of knowledge. The TOK course examines the nature of knowledge and how we know what we claim to know. It does this by encouraging students to analyse knowledge claims and explore questions about the construction of knowledge. The task of TOK is to emphasize connections between areas of shared knowledge and link them to personal knowledge in such a way that an individual becomes more aware of his or her own perspectives and how they might differ from others.

Creativity, action, service (CAS) is at the heart of the Diploma Programme. The emphasis in CAS is on helping students to develop their own identities, in accordance with the ethical principles embodied in the IB mission statement and the IB learner profile. It involves students in a range of activities alongside their academic studies throughout the Diploma Programme. The three strands of CAS are Creativity (arts and other experiences that involve creative thinking), Action (physical exertion contributing to a healthy lifestyle) and Service (an unpaid and voluntary exchange that has a learning benefit for the student). Possibly, more than any other component in the Diploma Programme, CAS contributes to the IB’s mission to create a better and more peaceful world through intercultural understanding and respect.

The extended essay, including the world studies extended essay, offers the opportunity for IB students to investigate a topic of special interest, in the form of a 4,000-word piece of independent research. The area of research undertaken is chosen from one of the students’ Diploma Programme subjects, or in the case of the interdisciplinary world studies essay, two subjects, and acquaints them with the independent research and writing skills expected at university. This leads to a major piece of formally presented, structured writing, in which ideas and findings are communicated in a reasoned and coherent manner, appropriate to the subject or subjects chosen. It is intended to promote high-level research and writing skills, intellectual discovery and creativity. As an authentic learning experience it provides students with an opportunity to engage in personal research on a topic of choice, under the guidance of a supervisor.

Chemistry guide 3 The Diploma Programme

Approaches to teaching and approaches to learning Approaches to teaching and learning across the Diploma Programme refer to deliberate strategies, skills and attitudes which permeate the teaching and learning environment. These approaches and tools, intrinsically linked with the learner profile attributes, enhance student learning and assist student preparation for the Diploma Programme assessment and beyond. The aims of approaches to teaching and learning in the Diploma Programme are to:

• empower teachers as teachers of learners as well as teachers of content • empower teachers to create clearer strategies for facilitating learning experiences in which students are more meaningfully engaged in structured inquiry and greater critical and creative thinking • promote both the aims of individual subjects (making them more than course aspirations) and linking previously isolated knowledge (concurrency of learning) • encourage students to develop an explicit variety of skills that will equip them to continue to be actively engaged in learning after they leave school, and to help them not only obtain university admission through better grades but also prepare for success during tertiary education and beyond • enhance further the coherence and relevance of the students’ Diploma Programme experience • allow schools to identify the distinctive nature of an IB Diploma Programme education, with its blend of idealism and practicality. The five approaches to learning (developing thinking skills, social skills, communication skills, self- management skills and research skills) along with the six approaches to teaching (teaching that is inquiry- based, conceptually focused, contextualized, collaborative, differentiated and informed by assessment) encompass the key values and principles that underpin IB pedagogy.

The IB mission statement and the IB learner profile The Diploma Programme aims to develop in students the knowledge, skills and attitudes they will need to fulfill the aims of the IB, as expressed in the organization’s mission statement and the learner profile. Teaching and learning in the Diploma Programme represent the reality in daily practice of the organization’s educational philosophy.

Academic honesty Academic honesty in the Diploma Programme is a set of values and behaviours informed by the attributes of the learner profile. In teaching, learning and assessment, academic honesty serves to promote personal integrity, engender respect for the integrity of others and their work, and ensure that all students have an equal opportunity to demonstrate the knowledge and skills they acquire during their studies.

All coursework—including work submitted for assessment—is to be authentic, based on the student’s individual and original ideas with the ideas and work of others fully acknowledged. Assessment tasks that require teachers to provide guidance to students or that require students to work collaboratively must be completed in full compliance with the detailed guidelines provided by the IB for the relevant subjects.

For further information on academic honesty in the IB and the Diploma Programme, please consult the IB publications Academic honesty (2011), The Diploma Programme: From principles into practice (2009) and General regulations: Diploma Programme (2011). Specific information regarding academic honesty as it pertains to external and internal assessment components of this Diploma Programme subject can be found in this guide.

4 Chemistry guide The Diploma Programme

Acknowledging the ideas or work of another person Coordinators and teachers are reminded that candidates must acknowledge all sources used in work submitted for assessment. The following is intended as a clarification of this requirement.

Diploma Programme candidates submit work for assessment in a variety of media that may include audio- visual material, text, graphs, images and/or data published in print or electronic sources. If a candidate uses the work or ideas of another person the candidate must acknowledge the source using a standard style of referencing in a consistent manner. A candidate’s failure to acknowledge a source will be investigated by the IB as a potential breach of regulations that may result in a penalty imposed by the IB final award committee.

The IB does not prescribe which style(s) of referencing or in-text citation should be used by candidates; this is left to the discretion of appropriate faculty/staff in the candidate’s school. The wide range of subjects, three response languages and the diversity of referencing styles make it impractical and restrictive to insist on particular styles. In practice, certain styles may prove most commonly used, but schools are free to choose a style that is appropriate for the subject concerned and the language in which candidates’ work is written. Regardless of the reference style adopted by the school for a given subject, it is expected that the minimum information given includes: name of author, date of publication, title of source, and page numbers as applicable.

Candidates are expected to use a standard style and use it consistently so that credit is given to all sources used, including sources that have been paraphrased or summarized. When writing text candidates must clearly distinguish between their words and those of others by the use of quotation marks (or other method, such as indentation) followed by an appropriate citation that denotes an entry in the bibliography. If an electronic source is cited, the date of access must be indicated. Candidates are not expected to show faultless expertise in referencing, but are expected to demonstrate that all sources have been acknowledged. Candidates must be advised that audio-visual material, text, graphs, images and/or data published in print or in electronic sources that is not their own must also attribute the source. Again, an appropriate style of referencing/citation must be used.

Learning diversity and learning support requirements Schools must ensure that equal access arrangements and reasonable adjustments are provided to candidates with learning support requirements that are in line with the IB documents Candidates with assessment access requirements and Learning diversity in the International Baccalaureate programmes: Special educational needs within the IB programmes.

Chemistry guide 5 Introduction

Nature of science

The Nature of science (NOS) is an overarching theme in the biology, chemistry and physics courses. This section, titled Nature of science, is in the biology, chemistry and physics guides to support teachers in their understanding of what is meant by the nature of science. The “Nature of science” section of the guide provides a comprehensive account of the nature of science in the 21st century. It will not be possible to cover in this document all the themes in detail in the three science courses, either for teaching or assessment.

It has a paragraph structure (1.1, 1.2, etc) to link the significant points made to the syllabus (landscape pages) references on the NOS. The NOS parts in the subject-specific sections of the guide are examples of a particular understanding. The NOS statement(s) above every sub-topic outline how one or more of the NOS themes can be exemplified through the understandings, applications and skills in that sub-topic. These are not a repeat of the NOS statements found below but an elaboration of them in a specific context. See the section on “Format of the syllabus”.

Technology

Although this section is about the nature of science, the interpretation of the word technology is important, and the role of technology emerging from and contributing to science needs to be clarified. In today’s world, the words science and technology are often used interchangeably, however, historically this is not the case. Technology emerged before science, and materials were used to produce useful and decorative artefacts long before there was an understanding of why materials had different properties that could be used for different purposes. In the modern world the reverse is the case: an understanding of the underlying science is the basis for technological developments. These new technologies in their turn drive developments in science.

Despite their mutual dependence they are based on different values: science on evidence, rationality and the quest for deeper understanding; technology on the practical, the appropriate and the useful with an increasingly important emphasis on sustainability.

1. What is science and what is the scientific endeavour? 1.1. The underlying assumption of science is that the universe has an independent, external reality accessible to human senses and amenable to human reason. 1.2. Pure science aims to come to a common understanding of this external universe; applied science and engineering develop technologies that result in new processes and products. However, the boundaries between these fields are fuzzy. 1.3. Scientists use a wide variety of methodologies which, taken together, make up the process of science. There is no single “scientific method”. Scientists have used, and do use, different methods at different times to build up their knowledge and ideas but they have a common understanding about what makes them all scientifically valid. 1.4. This is an exciting and challenging adventure involving much creativity and imagination as well as exacting and detailed thinking and application. Scientists also have to be ready for unplanned, surprising, accidental discoveries. The history of science shows this is a very common occurrence.

6 Chemistry guide Nature of science

1.5. Many scientific discoveries have involved flashes of intuition and many have come from speculation or simple curiosity about particular phenomena. 1.6. Scientists have a common terminology and a common reasoning process, which involves using deductive and inductive logic through analogies and generalizations. They share mathematics, the language of science, as a powerful tool. Indeed, some scientific explanations only exist in mathematical form. 1.7. Scientists must adopt a skeptical attitude to claims. This does not mean that they disbelieve everything, but rather that they suspend judgment until they have a good reason to believe a claim to be true or false. Such reasons are based on evidence and argument. 1.8. The importance of evidence is a fundamental common understanding. Evidence can be obtained by observation or experiment. It can be gathered by human senses, primarily sight, but much modern science is carried out using instrumentation and sensors that can gather information remotely and automatically in areas that are too small, or too far away, or otherwise beyond human sense perception. Improved instrumentation and new technology have often been the drivers for new discoveries. Observations followed by analysis and deduction led to the Big Bang theory of the origin of the universe and to the theory of evolution by natural selection. In these cases, no controlled experiments were possible. Disciplines such as geology and astronomy rely strongly on collecting data in the field, but all disciplines use observation to collect evidence to some extent. Experimentation in a controlled environment, generally in laboratories, is the other way of obtaining evidence in the form of data, and there are many conventions and understandings as to how this is to be achieved. 1.9. This evidence is used to develop theories, generalize from data to form laws and propose hypotheses. These theories and hypotheses are used to make predictions that can be tested. In this way theories can be supported or opposed and can be modified or replaced by new theories. 1.10. Models, some simple, some very complex, based on theoretical understanding, are developed to explain processes that may not be observable. Computer-based mathematical models are used to make testable predictions, which can be especially useful when experimentation is not possible. Models tested against experiments or data from observations may prove inadequate, in which case they may be modified or replaced by new models. 1.11. The outcomes of experiments, the insights provided by modelling and observations of the natural world may be used as further evidence for a claim. 1.12. The growth in computing power has made modelling much more powerful. Models, usually mathematical, are now used to derive new understandings when no experiments are possible (and sometimes when they are). This dynamic modelling of complex situations involving large amounts of data, a large number of variables and complex and lengthy calculations is only possible as a result of increased computing power. Modelling of the Earth’s climate, for example, is used to predict or make a range of projections of future climatic conditions. A range of different models have been developed in this field and results from different models have been compared to see which models are most accurate. Models can sometimes be tested by using data from the past and used to see if they can predict the present situation. If a model passes this test, we gain confidence in its accuracy. 1.13. Both the ideas and the processes of science can only occur in a human context. Science is carried out by a community of people from a wide variety of backgrounds and traditions, and this has clearly influenced the way science has proceeded at different times. It is important to understand, however, that to do science is to be involved in a community of inquiry with certain common principles, methodologies, understandings and processes.

Chemistry guide 7 Nature of science

2. The understanding of science 2.1. Theories, laws and hypotheses are concepts used by scientists. Though these concepts are connected, there is no progression from one to the other. These words have a special meaning in science and it is important to distinguish these from their everyday use. 2.2. Theories are themselves integrated, comprehensive models of how the universe, or parts of it, work. A theory can incorporate facts and laws and tested hypotheses. Predictions can be made from the theories and these can be tested in experiments or by careful observations. Examples are the germ theory of disease or atomic theory. 2.3. Theories generally accommodate the assumptions and premises of other theories, creating a consistent understanding across a range of phenomena and disciplines. Occasionally, however, a new theory will radically change how essential concepts are understood or framed, impacting other theories and causing what is sometimes called a “paradigm shift” in science. One of the most famous paradigm shifts in science occurred when our idea of time changed from an absolute frame of reference to an observer-dependent frame of reference within Einstein’s theory of relativity. Darwin’s theory of evolution by natural selection also changed our understanding of life on Earth. 2.4. Laws are descriptive, normative statements derived from observations of regular patterns of behaviour. They are generally mathematical in form and can be used to calculate outcomes and to make predictions. Like theories and hypotheses, laws cannot be proven. Scientific laws may have exceptions and may be modified or rejected based on new evidence. Laws do not necessarily explain a phenomenon. For example, Newton’s law of universal gravitation tells us that the force between two masses is inversely proportional to the square of the distance between them, and allows us to calculate the force between masses at any distance apart, but it does not explain why masses attract each other. Also, note that the term law has been used in different ways in science, and whether a particular idea is called a law may be partly a result of the discipline and time period at which it was developed. 2.5. Scientists sometimes form hypotheses—explanatory statements about the world that could be true or false, and which often suggest a causal relationship or a correlation between factors. Hypotheses can be tested by both experiments and observations of the natural world and can be supported or opposed. 2.6. To be scientific, an idea (for example, a theory or hypothesis) must focus on the natural world and natural explanations and must be testable. Scientists strive to develop hypotheses and theories that are compatible with accepted principles and that simplify and unify existing ideas. 2.7. The principle of Occam’s razor is used as a guide to developing a theory. The theory should be as simple as possible while maximizing explanatory power. 2.8. The ideas of correlation and cause are very important in science. A correlation is a statistical link or association between one variable and another. A correlation can be positive or negative and a correlation coefficient can be calculated that will have a value between +1, 0 and -1. A strong correlation (positive or negative) between one factor and another suggests some sort of causal relationship between the two factors but more evidence is usually required before scientists accept the idea of a causal relationship. To establish a causal relationship, ie one factor causing another, scientists need to have a plausible scientific mechanism linking the factors. This strengthens the case that one causes the other, eg smoking and lung cancer. This mechanism can be tested in experiments. 2.9. The ideal situation is to investigate the relationship between one factor and another while controlling all other factors in an experimental setting; however, this is often impossible and scientists, especially in biology and medicine, use sampling, cohort studies and case control studies to strengthen their understanding of causation when experiments (such as double blind tests and clinical trials) are not possible. Epidemiology in the field of medicine involves the statistical analysis of data to discover possible correlations when little established scientific knowledge is available or the circumstances are too difficult to control entirely. Here, as in other fields, mathematical analysis of probability also plays a role.

8 Chemistry guide Nature of science

3. The objectivity of science 3.1. Data is the lifeblood of scientists and may be qualitative or quantitative. It can be obtained purely from observations or from specifically designed experiments, remotely using electronic sensors or by direct measurement. The best data for making accurate and precise descriptions and predictions is often quantitative and amenable to mathematical analysis. Scientists analyse data and look for patterns, trends and discrepancies, attempting to discover relationships and establish causal links. This is not always possible, so identifying and classifying observations and artefacts (eg types of galaxies or fossils) is still an important aspect of scientific work. 3.2. Taking repeated measurements and large numbers of readings can improve reliability in data collection. Data can be presented in a variety of formats such as linear and logarithmic graphs that can be analysed for, say, direct or inverse proportion or for power relationships. 3.3. Scientists need to be aware of random errors and systematic errors, and use techniques such as error bars and lines of best fit on graphs to portray the data as realistically and honestly as possible. There is a need to consider whether outlying data points should be discarded or not. 3.4. Scientists need to understand the difference between errors and uncertainties, accuracy and precision, and need to understand and use the mathematical ideas of average, mean, mode, median, etc. Statistical methods such as standard deviation and chi-squared tests are often used. It is important to be able to assess how accurate a result is. A key part of the training and skill of scientists is in being able to decide which technique is appropriate in different circumstances. 3.5. It is also very important for scientists to be aware of the cognitive biases that may impact experimental design and interpretation. The confirmation bias, for example, is a well-documented cognitive bias that urges us to find reasons to reject data that is unexpected or does not conform to our expectations or desires, and to perhaps too readily accept data that agrees with these expectations or desires. The processes and methodologies of science are largely designed to account for these biases. However, care must always be taken to avoid succumbing to them. 3.6. Although scientists cannot ever be certain that a result or finding is correct, we know that some scientific results are very close to certainty. Scientists often speak of “levels of confidence” when discussing outcomes. The discovery of the existence of a Higgs boson is such an example of a “level of confidence”. This particle may never be directly observable, but to establish its “existence” particle physicists had to pass the self-imposed definition of what can be regarded as a discovery—the 5-sigma “level of certainty”—or about a 0.00003% chance that the effect is not real based on experimental evidence. 3.7. In recent decades, the growth in computing power, sensor technology and networks has allowed scientists to collect large amounts of data. Streams of data are downloaded continuously from many sources such as remote sensing satellites and space probes and large amounts of data are generated in gene sequencing machines. Experiments in CERN’s Large Hadron Collider regularly produce 23 petabytes of data per second, which is equivalent to 13.3 years of high definition TV content per second. 3.8. Research involves analysing large amounts of this data, stored in databases, looking for patterns and unique events. This has to be done using software which is generally written by the scientists involved. The data and the software may not be published with the scientific results but would be made generally available to other researchers.

Chemistry guide 9 Nature of science

4. The human face of science 4.1. Science is highly collaborative and the scientific community is composed of people working in science, engineering and technology. It is common to work in teams from many disciplines so that different areas of expertise and specializations can contribute to a common goal that is beyond one scientific field. It is also the case that how a problem is framed in the paradigm of one discipline might limit possible solutions, so framing problems using a variety of perspectives, in which new solutions are possible, can be extremely useful. 4.2. Teamwork of this sort takes place with the common understanding that science should be open- minded and independent of religion, culture, politics, nationality, age and gender. Science involves the free global interchange of information and ideas. Of course, individual scientists are human and may have biases and prejudices, but the institutions, practices and methodologies of science help keep the scientific endeavour as a whole unbiased. 4.3. As well as collaborating on the exchange of results, scientists work on a daily basis in collaborative groups on a small and large scale within and between disciplines, laboratories, organizations and countries, facilitated even more by virtual communication. Examples of large-scale collaboration include: –– The Manhattan project, the aim of which was to build and test an atomic bomb. It eventually employed more than 130,000 people and resulted in the creation of multiple production and research sites that operated in secret, culminating in the dropping of two atomic bombs on Hiroshima and Nagasaki. –– The Human Genome Project (HGP), which was an international scientific research project set up to map the human genome. The $3-billion project beginning in 1990 produced a draft of the genome in 2000. The sequence of the DNA is stored in databases available to anyone on the internet. –– The IPCC (Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change), organized under the auspices of The United Nations, is officially composed of about 2,500 scientists. They produce reports summarizing the work of many more scientists from all around the world. –– CERN, the European Organization for Nuclear Research, an international organization set up in 1954, is the world’s largest particle physics laboratory. The laboratory, situated in Geneva, employs about 2,400 people and shares results with 10,000 scientists and engineers covering over 100 nationalities from 600 or more universities and research facilities. All the above examples are controversial to some degree and have aroused emotions amongst scientists and the public. 4.4. Scientists spend a considerable amount of time reading the published results of other scientists. They publish their own results in scientific journals after a process called peer review. This is when the work of a scientist or, more usually, a team of scientists is anonymously and independently reviewed by several scientists working in the same field who decide if the research methodologies are sound and if the work represents a new contribution to knowledge in that field. They also attend conferences to make presentations and display posters of their work. Publication of peer-reviewed journals on the internet has increased the efficiency with which the scientific literature can be searched and accessed. There are a large number of national and international organizations for scientists working in specialized areas within subjects. 4.5. Scientists often work in areas, or produce findings, that have significant ethical and political implications. These areas include cloning, genetic engineering of food and organisms, stem cell and reproductive technologies, nuclear power, weapons development (nuclear, chemical and biological), transplantation of tissue and organs and in areas that involve testing on animals (see IB animal experimentation policy). There are also questions involving intellectual property rights and

10 Chemistry guide Nature of science

the free exchange of information that may impact significantly on a society. Science is undertaken in universities, commercial companies, government organizations, defence agencies and international organizations. Questions of patents and intellectual property rights arise when work is done in a protected environment. 4.6. The integrity and honest representation of data is paramount in science—results should not be fixed or manipulated or doctored. To help ensure academic honesty and guard against plagiarism, all sources are quoted and appropriate acknowledgment made of help or support. Peer review and the scrutiny and skepticism of the scientific community also help achieve these goals. 4.7. All science has to be funded and the source of the funding is crucial in decisions regarding the type of research to be conducted. Funding from governments and charitable foundations is sometimes for pure research with no obvious direct benefit to anyone whereas funding from private companies is often for applied research to produce a particular product or technology. Political and economic factors often determine the nature and extent of the funding. Scientists often have to spend time applying for research grants and have to make a case for what they want to research. 4.8. Science has been used to solve many problems and improve man’s lot, but it has also been used in morally questionable ways and in ways that inadvertently caused problems. Advances in sanitation, clean water supplies and hygiene led to significant decreases in death rates but without compensating decreases in birth rates this led to huge population increases with all the problems of resources, energy and food supplies that entails. Ethical discussions, risk-benefit analyses, risk assessment and the precautionary principle are all parts of the scientific way of addressing the common good.

5. Scientific literacy and the public understanding of science 5.1. An understanding of the nature of science is vital when society needs to make decisions involving scientific findings and issues. How does the public judge? It may not be possible to make judgments based on the public’s direct understanding of a science, but important questions can be asked about whether scientific processes were followed and scientists have a role in answering such questions. 5.2. As experts in their particular fields, scientists are well placed to explain to the public their issues and findings. Outside their specializations, they may be no more qualified than ordinary citizens to advise others on scientific issues, although their understanding of the processes of science can help them to make personal decisions and to educate the public as to whether claims are scientifically credible. 5.3. As well as comprising knowledge of how scientists work and think scientific literacy involves being aware of faulty reasoning. There are many cognitive biases/fallacies of reasoning to which people are susceptible (including scientists) and these need to be corrected whenever possible. Examples of these are the confirmation bias, hasty generalizations, post hoc ergo propter hoc (false cause), the straw man fallacy, redefinition (moving the goal posts), the appeal to tradition, false authority and the accumulation of anecdotes being regarded as evidence. 5.4. When such biases and fallacies are not properly managed or corrected, or when the processes and checks and balances of science are ignored or misapplied, the result is pseudoscience. Pseudoscience is the term applied to those beliefs and practices which claim to be scientific but do not meet or follow the standards of proper scientific methodologies, ie they lack supporting evidence or a theoretical framework, are not always testable and hence falsifiable, are expressed in a non-rigorous or unclear manner and often fail to be supported by scientific testing. 5.5. Another key issue is the use of appropriate terminology. Words that scientists agree on as being scientific terms will often have a different meaning in everyday life and scientific discourse with the public needs to take this into account. For example, a theory in everyday use means a hunch or

Chemistry guide 11 Nature of science

speculation, but in science an accepted theory is a scientific idea that has produced predictions that have been thoroughly tested in many different ways. An aerosol is just a spray can to the general public, but in science it is a suspension of solid or liquid particles in a gas. 5.6. Whatever the field of science—whether it is in pure research, applied research or in engineering new technology—there is boundless scope for creative and imaginative thinking. Science has achieved a great deal but there are many, many unanswered questions to challenge future scientists. The flow chart below is part of an interactive flow chart showing the scientific process of inquiry in practice. The interactive version can be found at “How science works: The flowchart”. Understanding Science. University of California Museum of Paleontology. 1 February 2013 .

How science works

EXPLORATION AND DISCOVERY

Making Asking New technology observations questions Personal motivation Practical problem Serendipity Curiosity Surprising observation Sharing data and ideas

Finding Exploring the inspiration literature

Gathering data

Expected Actual Hypotheses results/observations results/observations

Interpreting data

Supportive, contradictory, surprising or inconclusive data may...

...inspire ...support a revised hypothesis. assumptions. Develop Address Feedback and Replication technology societal issues peer review ...inspire ...oppose a revised/new hypothesis. hypothesis. Discussion with Publication Build Inform colleagues knowledge policy

TESTING Coming up Satisfy Solve everyday Theory with new curiosity problems building IDEAS questions/ideas

BENEFITS AND COMMUNITY OUTCOMES ANALYSIS AND FEEDBACK

Figure 2 www.understandingscience.org © 2008 The University of California MuseumPathways of Paleontology, to scientific Berkeley, discovery and the Regents of the University of California

12 Chemistry guide Introduction

Nature of chemistry

Chemistry is an experimental science that combines academic study with the acquisition of practical and investigational skills. It is often called the central science, as chemical principles underpin both the physical environment in which we live and all biological systems. Apart from being a subject worthy of study in its own right, chemistry is a prerequisite for many other courses in higher education, such as medicine, biological science and environmental science, and serves as useful preparation for employment.

Earth, water, air and fire are often said to be the four classical elements. They have connections with Hinduism and Buddhism. The Greek philosopher Plato was the first to call these entities elements. The study of chemistry has changed dramatically from its origins in the early days of alchemists, who had as their quest the transmutation of common metals into gold. Although today alchemists are not regarded as being true scientists, modern chemistry has the study of alchemy as its roots. Alchemists were among the first to develop strict experimentation processes and laboratory techniques. Robert Boyle, often credited with being the father of modern chemistry, began experimenting as an alchemist.

Despite the exciting and extraordinary development of ideas throughout the history of chemistry, certain things have remained unchanged. Observations remain essential at the very core of chemistry, and this sometimes requires decisions about what to look for. The scientific processes carried out by the most eminent scientists in the past are the same ones followed by working chemists today and, crucially, are also accessible to students in schools. The body of scientific knowledge has grown in size and complexity, and the tools and skills of theoretical and experimental chemistry have become so specialized, that it is difficult (if not impossible) to be highly proficient in both areas. While students should be aware of this, they should also know that the free and rapid interplay of theoretical ideas and experimental results in the public scientific literature maintains the crucial link between these fields.

The Diploma Programme chemistry course includes the essential principles of the subject but also, through selection of an option, allows teachers some flexibility to tailor the course to meet the needs of their students. The course is available at both standard level (SL) and higher level (HL), and therefore accommodates students who wish to study chemistry as their major subject in higher education and those who do not.

At the school level both theory and experiments should be undertaken by all students. They should complement one another naturally, as they do in the wider scientific community. The Diploma Programme chemistry course allows students to develop traditional practical skills and techniques and to increase facility in the use of mathematics, which is the language of science. It also allows students to develop interpersonal skills, and digital technology skills, which are essential in 21st century scientific endeavour and are important life-enhancing, transferable skills in their own right.

Teaching approach There are a variety of approaches to the teaching of chemistry. By its very nature, chemistry lends itself to an experimental approach, and it is expected that this will be reflected throughout the course.

The order in which the syllabus is arranged is not the order in which it should be taught, and it is up to individual teachers to decide on an arrangement that suits their circumstances. Sections of the option material may be taught within the core or the additional higher level (AHL) material if desired, or the option material can be taught as a separate unit.

Chemistry guide 13 Nature of chemistry

Science and the international dimension Science itself is an international endeavour—the exchange of information and ideas across national boundaries has been essential to the progress of science. This exchange is not a new phenomenon but it has accelerated in recent times with the development of information and communication technologies. Indeed, the idea that science is a Western invention is a myth—many of the foundations of modern-day science were laid many centuries before by Arabic, Indian and Chinese civilizations, among others. Teachers are encouraged to emphasize this contribution in their teaching of various topics, perhaps through the use of timeline websites. The scientific method in its widest sense, with its emphasis on peer review, open-mindedness and freedom of thought, transcends politics, religion, gender and nationality. Where appropriate within certain topics, the syllabus details sections in the group 4 guides contain links illustrating the international aspects of science.

On an organizational level, many international bodies now exist to promote science. United Nations bodies such as UNESCO, UNEP and WMO, where science plays a prominent part, are well known, but in addition there are hundreds of international bodies representing every branch of science. The facilities for large- scale research in, for example, particle physics and the Human Genome Project are expensive, and only joint ventures involving funding from many countries allow this to take place. The data from such research is shared by scientists worldwide. Group 4 teachers and students are encouraged to access the extensive websites and databases of these international scientific organizations to enhance their appreciation of the international dimension.

Increasingly there is a recognition that many scientific problems are international in nature and this has led to a global approach to research in many areas. The reports of the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change are a prime example of this. On a practical level, the group 4 project (which all science students must undertake) mirrors the work of real scientists by encouraging collaboration between schools across the regions.

The power of scientific knowledge to transform societies is unparalleled. It has the potential to produce great universal benefits, or to reinforce inequalities and cause harm to people and the environment. In line with the IB mission statement, group 4 students need to be aware of the moral responsibility of scientists to ensure that scientific knowledge and data are available to all countries on an equitable basis and that they have the scientific capacity to use this for developing sustainable societies.

Students’ attention should be drawn to sections of the syllabus with links to international-mindedness. Examples of issues relating to international-mindedness are given within sub-topics in the syllabus content. Teachers could also use resources found on the Global Engage website (http://globalengage.ibo.org).

Distinction between SL and HL Group 4 students at standard level (SL) and higher level (HL) undertake a common core syllabus, a common internal assessment (IA) scheme and have some overlapping elements in the option studied. They are presented with a syllabus that encourages the development of certain skills, attributes and attitudes, as described in the “Assessment objectives” section of this guide.

While the skills and activities of group 4 science subjects are common to students at both SL and HL, students at HL are required to study some topics in greater depth, in the additional higher level (AHL) material and in the common options. The distinction between SL and HL is one of breadth and depth.

14 Chemistry guide Nature of chemistry

Prior learning Past experience shows that students will be able to study a group 4 science subject at SL successfully with no background in, or previous knowledge of, science. Their approach to learning, characterized by the IB learner profile attributes, will be significant here.

However, for most students considering the study of a group 4 subject at HL, while there is no intention to restrict access to group 4 subjects, some previous exposure to formal science education would be necessary. Specific topic details are not specified but students who have undertaken the IB Middle Years Programme (MYP) or studied an equivalent national science qualification or a school-based science course would be well prepared for an HL subject.

Links to the Middle Years Programme Students who have undertaken the MYP science, design and mathematics courses will be well prepared for group 4 subjects. The alignment between MYP science and Diploma Programme group 4 courses allows for a smooth transition for students between programmes. The concurrent planning of the new group 4 courses and MYP: Next chapter (both launched in 2014) has helped develop a closer alignment.

Scientific inquiry is central to teaching and learning science in the MYP. It enables students to develop a way of thinking and a set of skills and processes that, while allowing them to acquire and use knowledge, equip them with the capabilities to tackle, with confidence, the internal assessment component of group 4 subjects. The vision of MYP sciences is to contribute to the development of students as 21st century learners. A holistic sciences programme allows students to develop and utilize a mixture of cognitive abilities, social skills, personal motivation, conceptual knowledge and problem-solving competencies within an inquiry- based learning environment (Rhoton 2010). Inquiry aims to support students’ understanding by providing them with opportunities to independently and collaboratively investigate relevant issues through both research and experimentation. This forms a firm base of scientific understanding with deep conceptual roots for students entering group 4 courses.

In the MYP, teachers make decisions about student achievement using their professional judgment, guided by criteria that are public, precise and known in advance, ensuring that assessment is transparent. The IB describes this approach as “criterion-related”—a philosophy of assessment that is neither “norm-referenced” (where students must be compared to each other and to an expected distribution of achievement) nor “criterion-referenced” (where students must master all strands of specific criteria at lower achievement levels before they can be considered to have achieved the next level). It is important to emphasize that the single most important aim of MYP assessment (consistent with the PYP and DP) is to support curricular goals and encourage appropriate student learning. Assessments are based upon evaluating course aims and objectives and, therefore, effective teaching to the course requirements also ensures effective teaching for formal assessment requirements. Students need to understand what the assessment expectations, standards and practices are and these should all be introduced early and naturally in teaching, as well as in class and homework activities. Experience with criterion-related assessment greatly assists students entering group 4 courses with understanding internal assessment requirements.

MYP science is a concept-driven curriculum, aimed at helping the learner construct meaning through improved critical thinking and the transfer of knowledge. At the top level are key concepts which are broad, organizing, powerful ideas that have relevance within the science course but also transcend it, having relevance in other subject groups. These key concepts facilitate both disciplinary and interdisciplinary learning as well as making connections with other subjects. While the key concepts provide breadth, the related concepts in MYP science add depth to the programme. The related concept can be considered to be the big idea of the unit which brings focus and depth and leads students towards the conceptual understanding.

Chemistry guide 15 Nature of chemistry

Across the MYP, there are 16 key concepts, with the three highlighted below as the focus for MYP science.

The key concepts across the MYP curriculum

Aesthetics Change Communication Communities

Connections Creativity Culture Development

Form Global interactions Identity Logic

Time, place and Perspective Relationships Systems space

MYP students may in addition undertake an optional onscreen concept-based assessment as further preparation for Diploma Programme science courses.

Science and theory of knowledge The theory of knowledge (TOK) course (first assessment 2015) engages students in reflection on the nature of knowledge and on how we know what we claim to know. The course identifies eight ways of knowing: reason, emotion, language, sense perception, intuition, imagination, faith and memory. Students explore these means of producing knowledge within the context of various areas of knowledge: the natural sciences, the social sciences, the arts, ethics, history, mathematics, religious knowledge systems and indigenous knowledge systems. The course also requires students to make comparisons between the different areas of knowledge, reflecting on how knowledge is arrived at in the various disciplines, what the disciplines have in common, and the differences between them.

TOK lessons can support students in their study of science, just as the study of science can support students in their TOK course. TOK provides a space for students to engage in stimulating wider discussions about questions such as what it means for a discipline to be a science, or whether there should be ethical constraints on the pursuit of scientific knowledge. It also provides an opportunity for students to reflect on the methodologies of science, and how these compare to the methodologies of other areas of knowledge. It is now widely accepted that there is no one scientific method, in the strict Popperian sense. Instead, the sciences utilize a variety of approaches in order to produce explanations for the behaviour of the natural world. The different scientific disciplines share a common focus on utilizing inductive and deductive reasoning, on the importance of evidence, and so on. Students are encouraged to compare and contrast these methods with the methods found in, for example, the arts or in history.

In this way there are rich opportunities for students to make links between their science and TOK courses. One way in which science teachers can help students to make these links to TOK is by drawing students’ attention to knowledge questions which arise from their subject content. Knowledge questions are open- ended questions about knowledge, and include questions such as:

• How do we distinguish science from pseudoscience? • When performing experiments, what is the relationship between a scientist’s expectation and their perception? • How does scientific knowledge progress? • What is the role of imagination and intuition in the sciences? • What are the similarities and differences in methods in the natural sciences and the human sciences?

16 Chemistry guide Nature of chemistry

Examples of relevant knowledge questions are provided throughout this guide within the sub-topics in the syllabus content. Teachers can also find suggestions of interesting knowledge questions for discussion in the “Areas of knowledge” and “Knowledge frameworks” sections of the TOK guide. Students should be encouraged to raise and discuss such knowledge questions in both their science and TOK classes.

Chemistry guide 17 Introduction

Aims

Group 4 aims Through studying biology, chemistry or physics, students should become aware of how scientists work and communicate with each other. While the scientific method may take on a wide variety of forms, it is the emphasis on a practical approach through experimental work that characterizes these subjects.

The aims enable students, through the overarching theme of the Nature of science, to:

1. appreciate scientific study and creativity within a global context through stimulating and challenging opportunities 2. acquire a body of knowledge, methods and techniques that characterize science and technology 3. apply and use a body of knowledge, methods and techniques that characterize science and technology 4. develop an ability to analyse, evaluate and synthesize scientific information 5. develop a critical awareness of the need for, and the value of, effective collaboration and communication during scientific activities 6. develop experimental and investigative scientific skills including the use of current technologies 7. develop and apply 21st century communication skills in the study of science 8. become critically aware, as global citizens, of the ethical implications of using science and technology 9. develop an appreciation of the possibilities and limitations of science and technology 10. develop an understanding of the relationships between scientific disciplines and their influence on other areas of knowledge.

18 Chemistry guide Introduction

Assessment objectives

The assessment objectives for biology, chemistry and physics reflect those parts of the aims that will be formally assessed either internally or externally. These assessments will centre upon the nature of science. It is the intention of these courses that students are able to fufill the following assessment objectives:

1. Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of: a. facts, concepts, and terminology b. methodologies and techniques c. communicating scientific information. 2. Apply: a. facts, concepts, and terminology b. methodologies and techniques c. methods of communicating scientific information. 3. Formulate, analyse and evaluate: a. hypotheses, research questions and predictions b. methodologies and techniques c. primary and secondary data d. scientific explanations. 4. Demonstrate the appropriate research, experimental, and personal skills necessary to carry out insightful and ethical investigations.

Chemistry guide 19 Syllabus

Syllabus outline

Syllabus component Recommended teaching hours

SL HL

Core 95 1. Stoichiometric relationships 13.5 2. Atomic structure 6 3. Periodicity 6 4. Chemical bonding and structure 13.5 5. Energetics/thermochemistry 9 6. 7 7. Equilibrium 4.5 8. and bases 6.5 9. Redox processes 8 10. Organic chemistry 11 11. Measurement and data processing 10

Additional higher level (AHL) 60 12. Atomic structure 2 13. The periodic table—the transition metals 4 14. Chemical bonding and structure 7 15. Energetics/thermochemistry 7 16. Chemical kinetics 6 17. Equilibrium 4 18. Acids and bases 10 19. Redox processes 6 20. Organic chemistry 12 21. Measurement and analysis 2

Option 15 25 A. Materials 15 25 B. Biochemistry 15 25 C. Energy 15 25 D. Medicinal chemistry 15 25

20 Chemistry guide Syllabus outline

Syllabus component Recommended teaching hours

SL HL

Practical scheme of work 40 60 Practical activities 20 40 Individual investigation (internal assessment—IA) 10 10 Group 4 project 10 10

Total teaching hours 150 240

The recommended teaching time is 240 hours to complete HL courses and 150 hours to complete SL courses as stated in the document General regulations: Diploma Programme (2011) (page 4, Article 8.2).

Chemistry guide 21 Syllabus

Approaches to the teaching of chemistry

Format of the syllabus The format of the syllabus section of the group 4 guides is the same for each subject physics, chemistry and biology. This new structure gives prominence and focus to the teaching and learning aspects.

Topics or options Topics are numbered and options are indicated by a letter. For example, “Topic 6: Chemical kinetics”, or “Option D: Medicinal chemistry”.

Sub-topics Sub-topics are numbered as follows, “6.1 Collision theory and rates of reaction”. Further information and guidance about possible teaching times are contained in the teacher support materials.

Each sub-topic begins with an essential idea. The essential idea is an enduring interpretation that is considered part of the public understanding of science. This is followed by a section on the “Nature of science”. This gives specific examples in context illustrating some aspects of the nature of science. These are linked directly to specific references in the “Nature of Science” section of the guide to support teachers in their understanding of the general theme to be addressed.

Under the overarching Nature of Science theme there are two columns. The first column lists “Understandings”, which are the main general ideas to be taught. There follows an “Applications and skills” section that outlines the specific applications and skills to be developed from the understandings. A “Guidance” section gives information about the limits and constraints and the depth of treatment required for teachers and examiners. The contents of the “Nature of Science” section above the two columns and contents of the first column are all legitimate items for assessment. In addition, some assessment of international-mindedness in science, from the content of the second column, will take place as in the previous course.

The second column gives suggestions to teachers about relevant references to international-mindedness. It also gives examples of TOK knowledge questions (see Theory of knowledge guide published 2013) that can be used to focus students’ thoughts on the preparation of the TOK prescribed essay. The “Links” section may link the sub-topic to other parts of the subject syllabus, to other Diploma Programme subject guides or to real-world applications. Finally, the “Aims” section refers to how specific group 4 aims are being addressed in the sub-topic.

22 Chemistry guide Approaches to the teaching of chemistry

Format of the guide Topic 1: </p><p>Essential idea: This lists the essential idea for each sub-topic.</p><p>1.1 Sub-topic </p><p>Nature of Science: Relates the sub-topic to the overarching theme of Nature of Science. </p><p>Understandings: International-mindedness: • This section will provide specifics of the • Ideas that teachers can easily integrate into content requirements for each sub-topic. the delivery of their lessons. Applications and skills: Theory of knowledge: • The content of this section gives details • Examples of TOK knowledge questions. of how students are to apply the Utilization: (including syllabus and cross- understandings. For example, these curricular links) applications could involve demonstrating mathematical calculations or practical skills. • Links to other topics within the Chemistry guide, to a variety of real-world applications Guidance: and to other Diploma Programme courses. • This section will provide specifics and give Aims: constraints to the requirements for the understandings and applications and skills. • Links to the group 4 subject aims. • This section will also include links to specific sections in the data booklet.</p><p>Group 4 experimental skills</p><p>I hear and I forget. I see and I remember. I do and I understand. (Confucius) Integral to the experience of students in any of the group 4 courses is their experience in the classroom, laboratory, or in the field. Practical activities allow students to interact directly with natural phenomena and secondary data sources. These experiences provide the students with the opportunity to design investigations, collect data, develop manipulative skills, analyse results, collaborate with peers and evaluate and communicate their findings. Experiments can be used to introduce a topic, investigate a phenomenon or allow students to consider and examine questions and curiosities. </p><p>By providing students with the opportunity for hands-on experimentation, they are carrying out some of the same processes that scientists undertake. Experimentation allows students to experience the nature of scientific thought and investigation. All scientific theories and laws begin with observations.</p><p>It is important that students are involved in an inquiry-based practical programme that allows for the development of scientific inquiry. It is not enough for students just to be able to follow directions and to simply replicate a given experimental procedure; they must be provided with the opportunities for genuine inquiry. Developing scientific inquiry skills will give students the ability to construct an explanation based on reliable evidence and logical reasoning. Once developed, these higher order thinking skills will enable students to be lifelong learners and scientifically literate. </p><p>Chemistry guide 23 Approaches to the teaching of chemistry </p><p>A school’s practical scheme of work should allow students to experience the full breadth and depth of the course including the option. This practical scheme of work must also prepare students to undertake the individual investigation that is required for the internal assessment. The development of students’ manipulative skills should involve them being able to follow instructions accurately and demonstrate the safe, competent and methodical use of a range of techniques and equipment. </p><p>The “Applications and skills” section of the syllabus lists specific lab skills, techniques and experiments that students must experience at some point during their study of their group 4 course. Other recommended lab skills, techniques and experiments are listed in the “Aims” section of the subject-specific syllabus pages. Aim 6 of the group 4 subjects directly relates to the development of experimental and investigative skills. </p><p>Mathematical requirements All Diploma Programme chemistry students should be able to:</p><p>• perform the basic arithmetic functions: addition, subtraction, multiplication and division • carry out calculations involving means, decimals, fractions, percentages, ratios, approximations and reciprocals • use standard notation (for example, 3.6 × 106) • use direct and inverse proportion • solve simple algebraic equations • plot graphs (with suitable scales and axes) including two variables that show linear and non-linear relationships • interpret graphs, including the significance of gradients, changes in gradients, intercepts and areas • interpret data presented in various forms (for example, bar charts, histograms and pie charts).</p><p>Data booklet The data booklet must be viewed as an integral part of the chemistry programme. It should be used throughout the delivery of the course and not just reserved for use during the external assessments. The data booklet contains useful equations, constants, data, structural formulas and tables of information. In the “Syllabus content” section of the subject guide, explicit links provide direct references to information in the data booklet which will allow students to become familiar with its use and contents. It is suggested that the data booklet be used for all in-class study and school-based assessments. </p><p>For both SL and HL external assessments, the data booklet cannot be used for paper 1, but candidates are provided with a copy of the periodic table given in section 6 of that booklet. Clean copies of the data booklet must be made available to both SL and HL candidates for papers 2 and 3. </p><p>Use of information communication technology The use of information communication technology (ICT) is encouraged throughout all aspects of the course in relation to both the practical programme and day-to-day classroom activities. Teachers should make use of the ICT pages of the teacher support materials. </p><p>24 Chemistry guide Approaches to the teaching of chemistry </p><p>Planning your course The syllabus as provided in the subject guide is not intended to be a teaching order. Instead it provides detail of what must be covered by the end of the course. A school should develop a scheme of work that best works for its students. For example, the scheme of work could be developed to match available resources, to take into account student prior learning and experience, or in conjunction with other local requirements. </p><p>HL teachers may choose to teach the core and AHL topics at the same time or teach them in a spiral fashion, by teaching the core topics in year one of the course and revisiting the core topics through the delivery of the AHL topics in year two of the course. The option topic could be taught as a stand-alone topic or could be integrated into the teaching of the core and/or AHL topics. </p><p>However the course is planned, adequate time must be provided for examination revision. Time must also be given for students to reflect on their learning experience and their growth as learners.</p><p>The IB learner profile The chemistry course contributes to the development of attributes of the IB learner profile. By following the course, students will have engaged with the attributes of the IB learner profile. For example, the requirements of the internal assessment provide opportunities for students to develop every aspect of the profile. For each attribute of the learner profile, a number of references from the Group 4 courses are given below.</p><p>Learner profile Biology, chemistry and physics attribute</p><p>Inquirers Aims 2 and 6 Practical work and internal assessment</p><p>Knowledgeable Aims 1 and 10, international-mindedness links Practical work and internal assessment</p><p>Thinkers Aims 3 and 4, Theory of knowledge links Practical work and internal assessment</p><p>Communicators Aims 5 and 7, external assessment Practical work and internal assessment</p><p>Principled Aims 8 and 9 Practical work and internal assessment. Ethical behaviour/practice (Ethical practice poster, IB animal experimentation policy), academic honesty</p><p>Open-minded Aims 8 and 9, International-mindedness links Practical work and internal assessment, the group 4 project </p><p>Caring Aims 8 and 9 Practical work and internal assessment, the group 4 project, ethical behaviour/ practice (Ethical practice poster, IB animal experimentation policy)</p><p>Chemistry guide 25 Approaches to the teaching of chemistry </p><p>Learner profile Biology, chemistry and physics attribute</p><p>Risk-takers Aims 1 and 6 Practical work and internal assessment, the group 4 project</p><p>Balanced Aims 8 and 10 Practical work and internal assessment, the group 4 project and fieldwork</p><p>Reflective Aims 5 and 9 Practical work and internal assessment, the group 4 project </p><p>26 Chemistry guide Syllabus</p><p>Syllabus content</p><p>Recommended teaching hours Core 95 hours Topic 1: Stoichiometric relationships 13.5</p><p>1.1 Introduction to the particulate nature of matter and chemical change</p><p>1.2 The mole concept </p><p>1.3 Reacting masses and volumes </p><p>Topic 2: Atomic structure 6</p><p>2.1 The nuclear <a href="/tags/Atom/" rel="tag">atom</a> </p><p>2.2 Electron configuration </p><p>Topic 3: Periodicity 6</p><p>3.1 Periodic table</p><p>3.2 Periodic trends </p><p>Topic 4: Chemical bonding and structure 13.5</p><p>4.1 Ionic bonding and structure</p><p>4.2 Covalent bonding</p><p>4.3 Covalent structures</p><p>4.4 Intermolecular forces</p><p>4.5 Metallic bonding</p><p>Topic 5: Energetics/thermochemistry 9</p><p>5.1 Measuring energy changes </p><p>5.2 Hess’s Law </p><p>5.3 Bond enthalpies</p><p>Topic 6: Chemical kinetics 7</p><p>6.1 Collision theory and rates of reaction</p><p>Topic 7: Equilibrium 4.5</p><p>7.1 Equilibrium </p><p>Chemistry guide 27 Syllabus content </p><p>Recommended teaching hours</p><p>Topic 8: Acids and bases 6.5</p><p>8.1 Theories of acids and bases</p><p>8.2 Properties of acids and bases </p><p>8.3 The pH scale</p><p>8.4 Strong and weak acids and bases </p><p>8.5 <a href="/tags/Acid/" rel="tag">Acid</a> deposition</p><p>Topic 9: Redox processes 8</p><p>9.1 Oxidation and reduction </p><p>9.2 Electrochemical cells </p><p>Topic 10: Organic chemistry 11</p><p>10.1 Fundamentals of organic chemistry </p><p>10.2 <a href="/tags/Functional_group/" rel="tag">Functional group</a> chemistry </p><p>Topic 11: Measurement and data processing 10</p><p>11.1 Uncertainties and errors in measurement and results </p><p>11.2 Graphical techniques </p><p>11.3 Spectroscopic identification of organic compounds Additional higher level (AHL) 60 hours Topic 12: Atomic structure 2</p><p>12.1 Electrons in <a href="/tags/Atom/" rel="tag">atoms</a></p><p>Topic 13: The periodic table—the transition metals 4</p><p>13.1 First-row d-block elements</p><p>13.2 Coloured complexes</p><p>Topic 14: Chemical bonding and structure 7</p><p>14.1 Covalent bonding and electron domain and molecular geometries</p><p>14.2 Hybridization </p><p>Topic 15: Energetics/thermochemistry 7</p><p>15.1 Energy cycles</p><p>15.2 Entropy and spontaneity </p><p>28 Chemistry guide Syllabus content </p><p>Recommended teaching hours</p><p>Topic 16: Chemical kinetics 6</p><p>16.1 Rate expression and reaction mechanism </p><p>16.2 Activation energy </p><p>Topic 17: Equilibrium 4</p><p>17.1 The equilibrium law</p><p>Topic 18: Acids and bases 10</p><p>18.1 <a href="/tags/Lewis_acids_and_bases/" rel="tag">Lewis acids and bases</a> </p><p>18.2 Calculations involving acids and bases </p><p>18.3 pH curves </p><p>Topic 19: Redox processes 6</p><p>19.1 Electrochemical cells </p><p>Topic 20: Organic chemistry 12</p><p>20.1 Types of organic reactions </p><p>20.2 Synthetic routes </p><p>20.3 Stereoisomerism </p><p>Topic 21: Measurement and analysis 2</p><p>21.1 Spectroscopic identification of organic compounds </p><p>Options 15 hours (SL)/25 hours (HL) A: Materials Core topics A.1 Materials science introduction</p><p>A.2 Metals and inductively coupled plasma (ICP) spectroscopy</p><p>A.3 Catalysts</p><p>A.4 Liquid crystals</p><p>A.5 Polymers</p><p>A.6 Nanotechnology</p><p>A.7 Environmental impact—plastics </p><p>Chemistry guide 29 Syllabus content </p><p>Additional higher level topics A.8 Superconducting metals and X-ray crystallography (HL only)</p><p>A.9 Condensation polymers (HL only)</p><p>A.10 Environmental impact—heavy metals (HL only)</p><p>B: Biochemistry Core topics B.1 Introduction to biochemistry</p><p>B.2 Proteins and enzymes</p><p>B.3 Lipids</p><p>B.4 Carbohydrates</p><p>B.5 Vitamins</p><p>B.6 Biochemistry and the environment</p><p>Additional higher level topics B.7 Proteins and enzymes (HL only)</p><p>B.8 Nucleic acids (HL only)</p><p>B.9 Biological pigments (HL only)</p><p>B.10 Stereochemistry in biomolecules (HL only)</p><p>C: Energy Core topics C.1 Energy sources</p><p>C.2 Fossil fuels</p><p>C.3 Nuclear fusion and fission</p><p>C.4 Solar energy</p><p>C.5 Environmental impact—global warming</p><p>Additional higher level topics C.6 Electrochemistry, rechargeable batteries and fuel cells (HL only)</p><p>C.7 Nuclear fusion and nuclear fission (HL only)</p><p>C.8 Photovoltaic and dye-sensitized solar cells (HL only)</p><p>D: Medicinal chemistry Core topics D.1 Pharmaceutical products and drug action</p><p>D.2 Aspirin and penicillin</p><p>D.3 Opiates</p><p>D.4 pH regulation of the stomach</p><p>30 Chemistry guide Syllabus content </p><p>D.5 Anti-viral medications</p><p>D.6 Environmental impact of some medications</p><p>Additional higher level topics D.7 Taxol—a chiral auxiliary case study (HL only)</p><p>D.8 Nuclear medicine (HL only)</p><p>D.9 Drug detection and analysis (HL only)</p><p>Chemistry guide 31 Topic 1: Stoichiometric relationships 13.5 hours 13.5 hemistry. How does How use the of hemistry. ithout need fortranslation. ithoutneed . ? . mindedness: - drying of foods - universalpursuit the languages hinder knowledge? of help and Chemical symbols and equationsand Chemicalsymbols effective international, are enabling communicationscientists amongst w is world the Union IUPAC(International of Chemistry) Applied and Pure in nomenclature developing standardized for authority organic both and inorganic compounds. of Chemicalequations “language” the c are phlogiston the of Lavoisier’swhich of oxygen, overturned discovery theory scientific shift. combustiondoes is , How paradigm a of example an knowledgeprogress Refrigerationchanges the to it related how and is state of . economy Atom Freeze Theoryof knowledge: U tilization: International • • • • • • •</p><p>— definitemultipleand (3.1) proportions. reliability ous or heterogeneous. heterogeneous. ousor e combine in fixed ratios to form compounds, which in combine form fixed ratios to melting, freezing, — melting, vaporization (evaporation tate f s f elements the state symbols (s), (l), (g) and (aq) in equations. (aq) and (g) (l), state(s), the symbols condensation, sublimation and depositionand condensation,sublimation covered. be — should , Physicalchemical in combine. ways which the on depend properties atoms and different science: and boilingand ) Atoms of Atoms different comp one than and/or oundcontain not Mixtures element are that more soand properties. chemicallyindividual their retain together bonded homogen either are Mixtures Deductionchemicalof reactants when specified. productsand equations are Application of Explanationchangestemperature and in properties physical observable of changesduring state. of of include Balancingreactions. of types variety a should equations of of Names changes the o have different properties from their component their elements. different have from properties Topic 1: Stoichiometric relationships Stoichiometric 1: Topic Core 1.1 Introduction to the change tonature of the matter and particulate chemical Introduction 1.1 Natureof with replicates quantitativemeasurements Making ensure to Understandings: • • • • • • • • Applications and skills: Applications Guidance: : idea Essential</p><p>32 Chemistry guide Topic 1: Stoichiometric relationships has curricular links: curricular - The negative environmental negative The impacts of air and refrigeration : a major contributor to ozone to contributor depletion. major a im8 A significant. conditioningare systems refrigerantsuse as CFCs The of been Syllabuscross and Topic— deduction4.1 formulaeof of ionic compounds compound or Topiccycle — enthalpy 5.1 reaction; state standard element an of Topic— kinetic6.1 theory Topic— neutralization8.2 reactions Topic— combustion10.2 reactions A.4 — liquidOption crystals Aims: • equired. isr not latentheat ” “ The term term The symbolsand Names of in booklet sectiondata the are elements in 5. 1.1 Introduction to the change tonature of the matter and particulate chemical Introduction 1.1 • •</p><p>Chemistry guide 33 Topic 1: Stoichiometric relationships - tion,which to aims e units.e e ine food, the and medical, pharmaceutical curricular links: curricular - mindedness: - th century. 19 th (2.3) inearly the ” manufacturingindustries. ray crystallography. ray The SI system (Système International d’Unités) refers to the metric system of system International metric (Système SI system d’Unités) The the to refers based seven on measurement, bas ofInternational Bureau The according Weights its to (BIPM Measures and initials) French is izastandards organ international an world. in the uniformity ensureapplication the around SI of units of magnitude Avogadro’s The isscale the of constant everyday beyond our experience experience.limit our everyday does How intuition? our fundamental Stoichiometricchemical to processes calculations inare for industry, researchand exampl the by for molar techniquevolume The solids crystalline X determined of is Syllabuscross and Theoryof knowledge: Utilization: International • • • • • Topicparticles scale — the 2.1 component their and atoms of Topics structure ionicmolecular of— lattice 4.5 structure compounds, and 4.3 4.1, metallicand ofcompounds lattice covalent changes entropy and enthalpy Topics— standard 15.2 and 5.1 mole defined per ratios Topicof — mole 19.1 in electrolysis products equivalent mass equivalent “ ). r , of , M n formulaunits. and C and are expressed are and C 12 a compound from its from empirical compound a . 1 - and relative formula/molecular mass ( mass formula/molecular relative and ) r A the percentage composition by mass and the empirical the and compositionmass by percentage the ) has units the ) mol g : M The mole makes it possible to correlate the number of particles with the mass that can of that mass measured.be number The makes particles with the mole the correlate to it possible science he concept of the mole developed from the the from developed relatedmole concept— t he concept the of of as relative atomic mass ( mass asatomic relative substance. The mole is a fixed number of particles and refers to the amount, is of mole fixeda The number amount, the to particles refers and Massescomparedscale a ofon are to atoms relative ( Molar mass empirical formulaofsimplest the molecularformulaand The give compound a actual the and ratio ofinnumber present moleculea respectively. atoms <a href="/tags/Ion/" rel="tag">ions</a>, Calculationmasses atoms, of molecules molar the of Soluof relationships the involving number tionproblems of the between particles,of inin mass the and moles grams. substance amount the of Interconversion formula. formulaof Determination of molecular the Obtainingusingformulasand from for data experimental empirical deriving reactionschanges. mass involving formula and molar molar formulaand mass. Applications and skills: Applications 1.2 The mole concept concept The 1.2 mole Natureof Concepts Understandings: • • • • • • • • • : idea Essential</p><p>34 Chemistry guide Topic 1: Stoichiometric relationships mass of mass of burning hydrates, percent loggers can usedbe measure changes to mass reactions. during Data : Experiments : could include : Aim6 or calculating magnesium number. Avogadro’s Aim7 Aims: • • isSI unit. derived a isin booklet given data the in ) ) 1 - A N or L constant( ction 2 and will be given for paper 1 questions.1 paper for ction given be will and 2 The value of ’s value The Avogadro the used generally unit (g The mass of mol molar se 1.2 The mole concept concept The 1.2 mole Guidance: • •</p><p>Chemistry guide 35 Topic 1: Stoichiometric relationships sso effective t, as it is very close asto it very is t, , but many other units other remain many but , 2 - in monitoring the efficiency of efficiency the inmonitoring , although litre is a commonly used unit. although , litrecommonly a is 3 Torr, bar and poundsand per bar Torr, inchsquare (psi). , the Pascal m N the (Pa), curricular links: links: curricular - Pa) is Pa) widely now used as convenienta uni 5 mindedness: - calculations of molar enthalpy changes enthalpy calculationsmolar of — <a href="/tags/Ion/" rel="tag">ion</a>: hypothesis. (1.8) hypothesis. industrialprocesses. The SI unit isThe of pressure masses the chemicalto Assigninghas elements allowed numbers the of Whyinto develop physical a to chemistry is science. mathematic inworld? describing natural the ideal The of smalldeducedgasa number from equation can assumptions be Whatofrole intuitionofisbehaviour. perception, reason, ideal the and imaginationin of development the scientific models? changes during volume Gas chemicalfor reactionsthe responsible are inflationbasis the explosive inare and other vehicles bagsair of many of reactions,of (trinitrotoluene). as such decomposition the TNT concept The ofis vital yield percentage 1 atm. The SI unit The for is volume atm. 1 m in common usage in (atm), different incommon countries. Theseinclude atmosphere Hg) of (mm millimetres mercury The bar (10 bar The Theoryof knowledge: Syllabuscrossand International • • • • • Topic5.1 Utilizat Topicforces — intermolecular 4.4 Avogadro's initial — Avogadro's the relationship the : Mole ratios in Mole chemical cangasand mass equations usedbe volume. calculate to by reacting ratios science Reactants can be either limiting or excess.Reactants or can limiting either be theoretical the yield canexperimental from differentbe yield.The of ratio mole Avogadro’slaw reactingdeterminedbe enables gases the to volumes of from gases. the lar ofand mo volume The gas constanttemperature ideal an is specified at a pressure. concentration of of the molar The by solutiona issolute amount determined of solution. volume the and knownAconcentration.solution standard is of one excessand reacting to quantities,limiting Solutionrelating problems of yields. percentage and reactants,theoretical, experimental Calculationvolumes of reacting Avogadro’sof law. using gases Solutionanalysisand problems of involving graphs of pressure fortemperature, volume and between fixeda idealan of mass gas. ideal the to Solutiongas relating equation. problems of ideallow at from Explanationofbehaviour gases deviation real the of Applications and sk ills: Applications 1.3 Reacting and masses Reacting 1.3 volumes Natureof careful Making forobtainingand scientific theories evidence observations Understandings: • • • • • • • • • • • : idea Essential</p><p>36 Chemistry guide Topic 1: Stoichiometric relationships of gasthe constant, R . value This unit is convenient for communicating very forvery Thiscommunicating unit convenient is s ray crystallographyray - e titrations titrations e bas — Ideal gas law - Experimentaldesign could limitinginclude excess reactants. and redox titrationredox : loggers temperature, Data : can usedbe measure to pressureand unit per parts The is : used small million,in commonly measuring ppm, — Aim6 precipitation Experimentscould by of determination include gravimetric an insolublesalt. Aim7 changes determinethe to in or volume reactions Aim8 fluids.levelspollutants inof low concentrations, but is not a formalSIa lowunit. isconcentrations, not but Physics topic 3.2 topic Physics Aims: Topic9.1 Topic— equilibrium17.1 calculations Topic— acid 18.2 • • • TopicA.8and 21.1 — X are are R ) concentrationa of and partsand million per (ppm). 3 - , , dm mol 3 - and the value of the gas constant ( of value the and gas the constant , 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 solution by reference to a standard solution. solutionreference standard a to by temperature and highand pressure. temperature iningObta usingand ofmolar mass values calculate experimental to gasa the ideal the from gas equation. concentration, amountof Solution molar involving and problems solute of of solution. volume method ofcalculate Useof the titration to experimental the volume booklet data forValuesofmolar the in in given gas the ideal an are section2. ideal The gas equation, Unitsinclude:dm g concentration of to concentration is molar denote use ofThe required. to squarebrackets given in booklet given data the in sections 2. and 1 Guidance: 1.3 Reacting and masses Reacting 1.3 volumes • • • • • • •</p><p>Chemistry guide 37 Topic 2: Atomic structure 6 hours dimensional images - I believe I it is all that dating. dating. nuclear medicine for diagnostics, treatment and for nucleardiagnostics, medicine treatment tion, explanation world? natural controland the of tion, in geological and arch aeologicaland ingeological mindedness: - f tracer concentration in the body, and canand usedbe detect to body, cancers. fin concentration the tracer ” clocks chemical things are made of atoms.” Are of thingsmodels the atoms.” made are theoriesand which scientists useful primarily they ofaccurateare create descriptions or world, natural the interpretationsfor predic Isotope enrichment uses physical properties to separate isotopes of uranium, uses Isotopeenrichment isotopes separate uranium, to of properties physical weaponry and countries in many is and of as energy part employed nuclear programmes. and “If destroyed be allto RichardFeynman: were scientific of knowledge sentenceone only next the to , generation passed on Whichwill subatomic No particles candirectly observed. (or be be) of ways use the knowingindirectof use we do interpret to evidence, gained through technology? Radioisotopesin used are scanners three give PETemission (positron tomography) research, as tracers in biochemical and pharmaceuticaland asand research, asresearch, intracers biochemical “ o Theoryof knowledge: Utilization: International • • • • • development of Rutherford. was that offirst nuclear the by proposed model atom the development the berof protons, </p><p> to deduce to num the 𝑋𝑋 𝑍𝑍 𝐴𝐴 integer relative atomic relative masses abundanceand integer of electronsoccupy space the nucleus. the outside : The mass of an atom is positively The concentrated nucleus.charged atom an inof minute, mass its the subatomic particle theory of matter represents a paradigm shift of subatomic lateparticle paradigm a representsscience 1800s. matter (2.3) occurredtheory in that — the in the : improvements inimprovements — alphainstrumentation particles used in were science neutrons and electrons in atoms and ions.and electronsand neutrons in atoms isotopes from given data, including data, given isotopesfrom spectra. mass Atoms contain a positively charged densecontain Atoms nucleus positivelya charged of composed and protons (nucleons). neutrons charged Negatively the of mass atomic spectrometerrelative is determine mass to an The used its from isotopic element composition. notation Use of symbol nuclear the Calculationsnon - involving massesRelative chargesand subatomicknown,b e of particles should the of mass actualin booklet. given data the sectionthe of 4 values are The electroncan negligible. considered be learned. be Specificnot need examples isotopes of is required. not of operation The spectrometer mass the Topic 2: Atomic structure Atomic 2: Topic Applications and skills: Applications 2.1 The nuclear atom The 2.1 nuclear Natureof Evidenceand (1.8) shifts Paradigm Understandings: • • • • • • • • Guidance: Core Essential i dea Essential</p><p>38 Chemistry guide Topic 2: Atomic structure ng effectsng on experiment can undertaken. be experiment — NMRD.9 and D.8 s option curricular links: curricular - Radionuclideshealth to iondangers their to due izicarry : Simulations: of Rutherford’s foil gold : — nuclearC.7 and fissionC.3 Aim7 Aim8 cells. Syllabuscross and Topicsand 21.1 11.3, Options — nuclearD.8 medicineOption Aims: • • 2.1 The nuclear atom The 2.1 nuclear </p><p>Chemistry guide 39 Topic 2: Atomic structure t to the the to t , with involvements from from with , involvements dely used analyse to dely in astronomy hasthatprove to been this is aim ... for Nuclear Research its (CERN) is by run (20 states (20 in 2013) evement tates Organization ember s ember mindedness: - (1.9) European m European The European European The countries. other many scientistsfrom world’s the ope rates It largest particle detectors physicsused particle to including and researchcentre, accelerators fundamental the study constituents of matter. Heisenberg’sstatesis limi there Principle that theoretical a Uncertainty theand precisionknowmomentum the position can we with which a of knowledge? What forlimits the particle.human implicationsof the this of are aim of “One picture exact the scienceshasphysicalan of the give to been achi One world. material Absorptionwi emissionand are spectra light from stars. sensitive is means of very a the Atomicabsorption spectroscopy determining presenceofconcentrationand elements. metallic Jacob Bronowski. Whatclaimfor unattainable.”of — Jacob implications the this Bronowski. are aspirations the forand in sciencesin natural general? knowledge of particular International • • • • • Utilization: Utilization: Theoryof knowledge: the use of electricity and magnetism in Thomson’s use — the magnetism and cathodeof rays.(1.8) electricity and canand hold a , n . 2 ectron. levels of successively higher energies. higher successively of levels ion : The electron The can deduceditsbe configuration from number. atom an atomic of : science levels contain a fixed number of is orbitals, there levels regionsfixed where space contain of number a ore detaileddescribes ore model atom ofdivision of the energy main the the Emission spectra are produced when photons are emitted from atoms as emittedatoms photons when produced from Emissionare are spectra level.energy lower a excitedto return electrons lineThe evidence emissionprovides ofspectrum for hydrogen existence the levels, ofenergies.higher which at in energy converge electrons discrete shell levelenergy or main The number, integer an given is m A flevelinto s, sub and d p, - Sub - el high a probabilityfinding of an state for Eachelectronic given a energy orbital has configuration defined a and chemicaland can oppositehold electrons environment two spin. of colour, between Descriptionwavelength, frequency relationship the and of across electromagnetic the en ergy spectrum. lineDistinctiona and continuousa spectrum spectrum. between maximum number of maximum 2 n electrons, Applications and skills: Applications 2.2 Electron configurat Electron 2.2 Natureof in scientific Developments in apparatus researchfollow improvements Theoriesbeing superseded current — quantum mechanics of most models the is atom. the among — lineUsetheories spectra explainphenomena to natural explained model Bohr (2.2) the of by atom. the Understandings: • • • • • • • • Essential i dea Essential</p><p>40 Chemistry guide Topic 2: Atomic structure scharge tubes of scharge different . Boltzmann distribution as a probability density function Boltzmanndistribution as probability a curricular links: curricular – - — periodicity3.2 — emissionspectra : Emission: using spectra observed be di could Fireworks Aim6 gases and a spectroscope. Flame testsgases spectra. couldstudy spectroscope. a and Flame usedbe to Syllabuscross and stellar characteristics — stellar PhysicsD.2 optionand 7.1 topic Aims: • • Topicsand 3.1 Topic— deduction4.1 formulaeof of ionic compounds Topic— Maxwell 6.1 36 . atomic atomic z electron and p and y , p , x line emission are spectrum ) and condensed and condensed ) and the p the and 4 3p 2 3s 6 2p 2 box diagrams, boxdiagrams, suchas given one the - 2s in 2 - atomic orbital atomic ) should ) covered. be 4 3p 2 ons of Cr and Cu as Cu and exceptions onscovered. be Cr of should ion orbitals. not required. not Description of the emission spectrum of the hydrogen atom, includingatom, of hydrogen the Description the spectrum emission the of transitions relationshipslinesfirst, the energy the and to secondbetween a nd levels. energy third Recognitionsan shape the of of Applicationexclusion Pauli the and rule Aufbau the principle,of Hund’s ionsand for = atoms Z to up principleconfigurations electron write to in given data the are booklet spectrum Details in electromagnetic the of section 3. of names different The the in series hydrogen the Full1s electron configurations (eg electron configurati The configurations3s [Ne] (eg Guidance: 2.2 Electron configurat Electron 2.2 • • • • • • • Orbital diagrams should ofenergy relative and character diagrams the usedbe Orbital represent to arrow to refer orbitals.diagrams Orbital below.</p><p>Chemistry guide 41 Topic 3: Periodicity 6 hours the periodic table is a a periodic is the table applies to their own disciplines. own applies their to data to explain the organization of explain to data elements. the organization the curricular links: curricular - mindedness: - Beable ana lyse to Apply the organization the Apply : general of table understand periodic to the : elements. of Be: ablephysical recognize to common images samples or The development of and development The scientists years periodic the involved table took many different from foundations the upon countries other’s building and work each of ideas. of Whatdeductiveand reason ing inthe play development inductive the did role Whatinperiodic deductiveand reasoning have inductive table? does role sciencein general? scientificuse structure the periodic the Other subjectstable also understand to of it reactivity and as elements Aim3 intrends properties. Aim4 Aim6 allowed for the prediction of properties of elements that had not yet been yet not had that of allowed elements forof properties prediction the , Theoryof knowledge: Utilization: — scientistsfunctionsubjects ; based organize and structure on International • • • • • • Syllabuscross and Topic— electron2.2 configuration Aims: s Moseley id lanthan o metalsmetalloids.and ciated withfour the ciatedsub - transition metals, metals, transition</p><p>. known ) is levelenergyis that ) electrons. outer the occupied by n : s should be The arrangement electronof The configuration. in elements periodic the tablepredictto helps their id s, p, d, and f.— s, and d, p, science The periodic table is arranged intoperiodic four The table blocks is asso arranged periodsand (horizontal periodic The columns) table (vertical groups of consists rows). ( number period The levelnumber ofthe and number The principal the energy of valence the electronscanperiodic the deduceditsbe infrom table. a tom an position on periodic The positions table non - showsmetals, of the element’s the Deductionposition from of configuration atom an of electron the icperiod the on versa. table, vice and terms alkali The noble halogens, gases, metals, 18, numbering group scheme by to 1 group asgroup The recommended from IUPAC,should used.be levels and actinand o : idea Essential Applications and skills: Applications 3.1 Periodic table Periodic 3.1 Natureof testingand making theoriesevidence forpredictions Obtain by scientific based them on later and from of example models key Early Mendeleev, periodicthis. the of table discovered.(1.9) Understandings: • • • • • • • • Guidance: Topic 3: Periodicity 3: Topic Core</p><p>42 Chemistry guide Topic 3: Periodicity taking” global global - be connectedbe stability to properties. This properties. gives trations. Whatof impact deposition? isacid global the curricular links: curricular : : - 8 tion has led to the production of many products causeproduction that of ledthe tionto many has iza mindedness: - and Experiment with chemical trends directly in the laboratory or the through with chemical Experiment directly trends in laboratory the databases. Periodicstudied computer can withtrends use the be of down groups. down : use ofions The : metal asinvestigated. be transition could catalysts : problems when released when into environment. the problems Industrial of predictive power The Mendeleev’s“risk the illustrates Perio dicTable Period in icThe science. isHow Tableclassification of example excellent an help pursuit the hinder and doesof classification categorization and knowledge? 1 Aims Aim6 usedemons of teacher Aim6 Aim7 nature of science. Whatscientific between of demarcation nature isscience. the and claims? pseudoscientific Theoryof knowledge: Utilization: Syllabuscross and International • • • • • • • anomalies in first ionization energy values can firstTopicionization— anomalies2.2 in energy inelectron configuration Topic— productionrain 8.5 of acid Aims: O, 2 alkali metals with with metals alkali metallic behaviour ofmetallic behaviour an ur with water. with water. ur f the treatment oftreatment the of reactions the new substances based on the expected reactivity of elements. (3.1) expected the on substances elements. of new reactivity based metallic behaviour are due to the to due are metallic above. trends behaviour ize synthes the position of an element in the periodic table allows scientists to make accurate predictions ofmake chemicaland physical scientistsits to position — the tablein periodic allows the element an of , and the oxides the and of, sul and nitrogen Elementsshow in trends chemical physical their periods across properties and and 10 : O n metallicn non - and 4 overed. MgO,P element based in itso n periodic the element position table. Vertical and horizontal trends in the periodic table exist for atomic radius, atomic ionic for Verticalin trends periodic exist the horizontal and table electron radius,electronegativity. affinityand ionization energy, i Trends amphoteric basicacidic to Oxidesfrom change through period. a across metallic the Predictionnon - and explanationand of differencesand Discussioninsimilarities in elements of properties the the of with reference group, halogensand same the 1) (group alkali to (group metals 17). foConstructionexplainreactions equations of r Na changes of pH to the examples of required. Only are groupsacross trends general down and periods discontinuities the ionization energy For increaseshould period a in across the c be trends shouldGroup include water, alkali water, ions. halogensand with metals halogens with halide Essential i dea Essential Guidance: 3.2 Periodic trends trends Periodic 3.2 of science: Nature Looking for patterns to scientistsability the Understandings: • • • • • • • • Applications and skills: Applications</p><p>Chemistry guide 43 Topic 4: Chemical bonding and structure . How c power cpower 13.5 hours 13.5 . . ray crystallography in crystallography structural ray determinations - industrial processes curricular links: curricular - — electrostatics Use naming conventionsUsenaming ionic name to compounds. : Students: and could based compounds type bond their on investigate simulation Computer : couldcrystal lattice structures usedbe observe to . General rules in chemistry (like the <a href="/tags/Octet_rule/" rel="tag">octet rule</a>) often have exceptions.rules(like in often General octet chemistry the rule) have many exceptionsexist to foruseful? be to cease to rule a have Whatexistence the Whatis for differencehave the ions? of evidence you do direct between indirectand evidence? electri Ionicin electrolytesand liquids efficientsolvents used are sources green and Aim3 Aim6 obtain chloride solarsodium or properties evaporation. by Aim7 Theoryof knowledge: • • • • • • Utilization: Syllabuscross and Topic— periodic3.2 trends TopicA.8 — useOption and 21.1 of X Physics topic 5.1 topic Physics Aims: ,</p><p>+ 4 NH lattice structures by ionic latticestructuresby bonds . - molten ionic compounds conduct electricity but solid but ionic conduct compounds solubility molten The ionicnot. electricity do compounds ionic points melting and of 3 4 metals gaining metals electrons. and POand - 2 consist of ions held together in consistheld ions of together 4 SO , - 2 3 CO , - 3 : Ionic compounds HCO , : - 3 science NO , - uctures. Positive ions (cations) form by by losing form metals Positiveelectrons. (cations) ions valence non - ions by Negative form (anions) the gained of by isnumber electronor The electrons determined lost configurationatom. the of ionic The charged isbond attraction oppositely between electrostatic to due ions. normalconditions, Under usually ionic are compounds solids with lattice str of Deductionionican name formulaand ofits from component compound the ions. ions,including polyatomic electrical Explanation(volatility, of compounds ionic properties physical the of of structure. their terms conductivityin solubility) and ions: of Studentswithnames the familiar shouldthese polyatomic be OH Essential i dea Essential Applications and skills: Applications Guidance: 4.1 Ionic bonding and bonding structure Ionic 4.1 Natureof — Usetheories explainphenomena to natural undscan compo usedbe explain to observations. (2.2) Understandings: • • • • • • • • Topic 4: Chemical bonding and structure Chemical 4: Topic Core</p><p>44 Chemistry guide Topic 4: Chemical bonding and structure (2.5) . . metals and metals and metals curricular links: curricular - — cookingwith moleculespolar Use naming conventions Usebonded naming covalently compounds. name to : Microwaves Aim3 Utilization: Utilization: • • Syllabuscross and Topic— organic10.1 molecules Aims: . . s metals have different have compounds than metals properties contain that non - electrostatic attraction between a shared pair pair shared a electrostaticattraction between compounds containing — compounds non - : Covalent compounds Covalent by sharing form the of electrons. : cience s A covalent bond is formed by A formed the covalent isbond shared Single,three and two covalent one, bonds double involve triple and pairsof respectively. electrons Bondincreases lengthstrength bond of decreases number shared and a s the electronsincreases. the from results Bondpolarity difference in electronegativities bonded the of atoms. values. electronegativity from of Deductionnature of covalenta bond polar the can Bondpola shownbe with either rity partial charges, vector dipoles or in booklet given data the Electronegativityvalues are in section 8. of electrons and the positively charged nuclei.charged ofpositively the and electrons Essential i dea Essential Applications and skills: Applications 4.2. Covalent bonding Covalent 4.2. Natureof forLookingdiscrepanciesand trends explain— Lewis to whichUsetheoriesintroducedused explainphenomena class to ideaa shareelectrons. natural the unequal of compounds of Pauling electronegativity sharingof (2.2) electrons. Understandings: • • • • • • • Guidance:</p><p>Chemistry guide 45 Topic 4: Chemical bonding and structure Whatuse we do in of validity assessingthe criteria a D structure of function to structure molecules structure D relating and - curricular l inks: curricular theory? - : Computer simulations Computer : could structures. VSEPR usedbe model to Does the need for <a href="/tags/Resonance_(chemistry)/" rel="tag">resonance</a> structures decrease the value or validity ofDoes structuresvalidity for need the decrease or resonance value the Lewis dot) (electron scientific theory? Aim7 Utilization: Syllabuscross and Theoryof knowledge: • • Option A.7 — biodegradabilityOption of plastics Biologytopic — 3 2.3 Aims: according pairs in covalently a structures. structure of structure ions molecules showing and all giantcovalecovalent/network nt (electron dot) (electron . 3 refersof tendency gainthe to to valencea shell atoms a with : and O and Lewis structuresshow dot) (electron electron the in useddomains valence the predict shellto are and shape. molecular - 2 : 3 octet” rule science ,CO 6 ecular geometry for domains. speciesfour ecularand geometry three electron with two, H 6 bonded species.bonded Lewisstructures show dot) (electron all valence the electrons “ The totalof electrons. 8 stable atoms, form like compounds Some might withBe B,incompleteand octetselectrons. of one than foris Resonancepossible there when more structuresposition occur doublea inbond molecule. a the by Shapesrepulsion speciesof determined of are electron siliconand <a href="/tags/Carbon/" rel="tag">Carbon</a> form Deductionof Lewis electron forvalenceelectronspairs four to up eachon atom. the to useand ofThe predictgeometry theory electron the VSEPR domain mol presenceand Predictiongeometry molecular of from anglesbond of non - bondingpairs electrons. of and polarity bond from molecularPredictiongeometry. polarity molecular of limited not to are Deduction examplesinclude o f but structures, resonance C to VSEPR theory. VSEPR to theory. Essential i dea Essential 4.3 Covalent structures Covalent 4.3 Natureof Scientistsas ofmodels development — the representations explain world to real the of use model the shape (1.10) properties. of (VSEPR) observable molecular Understandings: • • • • • • • • • • • Applications and skills: Applications</p><p>46 Chemistry guide Topic 4: Chemical bonding and structure negative charge negative buckminsterfullerene) 60 be covered. covered. be shouldusedbe in “ of place structure can structure shownbe dot) as dots, (electron ovalent bonds ovalent should electrondomain ” “ should covered. be 2 . crosses, a dash or any combination. crosses,any or dash a and SiOand Explanation of the properties of giant covalent compounds in terms of Explanationof covalentin compounds their terms giant properties the of structures. term The Electronpairs in Lewis a C graphene, graphite, Allotropes(diamond, carbon of c Coordinate ” centre Guidance: 4.3 Covalent structures Covalent 4.3 • • • • •</p><p>Chemistry guide 47 Topic 4: Chemical bonding and structure d ize How does How speciala fats - be attractive forces attractive be particles their between could be used to show intermolecular forces couldshowintermolecular usedbe to /trans - cis forces and hydrogen bonding can usedforcesbe explainhydrogen to and special p and hinder thehinder and p of growth knowledge? curricular links: curricular - . Computer simulations Computer : dispersion ) melting points — melting of ( 3 interactions The nature of the hydrogen bond of nature is hydrogen The the topic the discussion the and much of IUPAC the definitionfrom should current gives usedbe six criteria as which bonding.evidence offor occurrence the hydrogen hel vocabulary Aim7 Theoryof knowledge: • • — London Utilization: Syllabuscross and using plasticizers A.5 — using Option A.7 — controllingOption biodegradability B. Option Biology— understanding2.6 and forces 2.4 topics2.3, of2.2, intermolecular work to withmolecules in body the Aims: - dipole forces < < forces dipole forces is an inclusive is inclusive an ” induced London and dispersion ) ( forces, dipole - van der der Waalsvan instantaneous “ induced dipole induced refers to dispersion ) ( ” forces dipole dipole, - polar entities. The term entities.polar term The dipole – dispersion ) ( : forces. The physical The of properties different from substances forcesmolecular ofmolecules. their types between result London : “ dipole forcesbonds. dipole hydrogen < science dispersion ) and hydrogen bonding . hydrogen and dipole - whichterm, includes ( Intermolecular forces London Intermolecular include strengths relative of interactions The London these are force substances,based in present Deductionon intermolecular of of types the formula. chemicaland structure their Explanationof ounds covalent(volatility, comp properties physical the of of in solubility) and and structure electricaltheir terms conductivity forces. intermolecular term The induced dipole forces that exist between any atoms or groups or inducedatoms forcesany existdipole that between of and atoms shouldfornon - usedbe Essential i dea Essential Applications and skills Applications 4.4 Intermolecular forces forces Intermolecular 4.4 Natureof testingand making theoriesevidence forpredictions Obtain by scientific based them on must interactions.molecular explainexample, To liquidsolidcovalentstates. can For compounds there exist this, in the and greater those than which could sign that (2.2) gravity. are to attributed be ificantly Understandings: • • • • • Guidance: </p><p>48 Chemistry guide Topic 4: Chemical bonding and structure directional esources. and the means to extract them, varies extract to them, means the and , sof could examples usedbe metallic view to curricular links: curricular - mindedness: - : Globalof: extraction impact of value their and metals precious simulation Computer : The availability The of resources metal in different factorgreatly isand countries,national in a determining wealth. As for technologiescarefuldifferentand change metals demands the develop, strategiessupplymanage r the to needed of finite are these Aim1 processeslocations. and Aim7 bonding. Utilization: Syllabuscross and International • • • Option A.6 — useOption of nanotechnology in metals Biologytopic — water 2.2 Aims: d electrons.d ize directionalbonding. blockelements. alloys in terms of in non - terms alloys and p - and - of delocalized electrons. of(2.2) delocalized : Metalliclatticea withbonds delocal involve cations of : sea ” a “ science A metallic bond is the electrostatic attraction between a lattice of positive ions positive lattice a of Abetween metallic electrostatic the is bond attraction delocalizedand electrons. of strength depends ionsThe the of charge the on metallica the and bond radiusof ion. metal the haveand enhanced metal one than Alloyscontain properties. usually more metals. Explanationmalleabilityand in conductivity electrical of Explanationinpoints melting metals. of trends of Explanationof properties the of should Trends limitedbe s to Examplescovered. ofbe should alloys various Essential i de Essential Guidance: Applications and skills: Applications 4.5 Metallic bonding Metallic 4.5 bonding Natureof properties — the Usecovalenttheories of ionicand explainphenomena to from natural non - formation ofsubstances isdifferent this and are metals the to due bondswith a Understandings: • • • • • • • •</p><p>Chemistry guide 49 Topic 5: Energetics/thermochemistry 9 hours inmost countries. The state the energy content of energy the food. curricular links: curricular - mindedness: mindedness: - Experiments could include calculating enthalpy changes from given Experimentsgiven : could from changes includeenthalpy calculating Use: of ana lyse databases to changes. temperature Use : of record loggers data to scientificcommunication. The SI unit of temperature is which Celsius the but SI unit Kelvinscale the The (°C), of (K), temperature used scaling, incremental hassame the commonly is forexception all scale continues use(°F) USA to the Fahrenheit which is the non - and experimental discrepancies Whatcriteriause we do in between judging Whichof ys theoreticalassessing knowing values? wa use we do when theoreticallimitations experimental assumptions? and content Determiningfuels.energy and food substances ofin important Aim6 content food,of (energy data experimental the of enthalpy or ice of melting change inenthalpy of reactions aqueous solution). simple Aim7 Aim7 Utilization: Utilization: International • • • • • • Syllabuscrossand concept Topicmole — the 1.2 Aims: Theoryof knowledge: Topicchanges — conservation1.1 mass, of of , , . H° 1 - ∆</p><p> given by given shouldcovered. be ) ° f H ∆ and formation ( formation and ) ° c H ∆ of the average kinetic ofof average the energy particles. the for chemical reactions is indicated in forkJ reactions chemical indicated mol is ) . H 𝑇𝑇 change when the temperature of substance changetemperature the pure a when is measurable energy transfersenergy surroundings.and — measurable systems between (3.1) ∆ ∆ ( 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 𝑞𝑞</p><p>: The enthalpy changes from chemical reactions can be calculated from their effectenthalpy their of The changes surroundings.chemical their from from canreactions calculatedbe temperature the on : idea science values are usually expressed under standard conditions, standard usually valuesunder are expressed H includingstates. standard Heat is a form of energy. of form is Heat energy. a is measure a Temperature is in conserved chemical energy Total reactions. the and transfer system of Chemicalreactions the between involve heat that exothermic. or asdescribedsurroundings endothermic are change enthalpy The ∆ Calculationheat the of the experimentand for covered be of enthalpy Aan calorimetry reaction should results evaluated. changesEnthalpy combustion of ( Considerreactions solution combustionand inreactions. aqueous changedusing Essential Applications and skills: Applications 5.1 Measuring energy changes changes Measuring 5.1 energy of Nature Fundamentalprinciple is principleof (2.6) fundamental a — conservation energy science.of careful Making observations Understandings: • • • • • • • • • • Guidance: Topic 5: Energetics/thermochemistry 5: Topic Core</p><p>50 Chemistry guide Topic 5: Energetics/thermochemistry f standard is commonly given as the temperature of commonlyas isgiven temperature the interest. 298 K 298 state,but Standard state refers to the normal, most pure stable pure state normal, most of state Standard refers substancea the to kPa100 at is Temperature of. measured part a not definition the o is in specific booklet data the water The of provided in capacity heat section 2. density the Studentscan specificand assume aqueous of capacities heat ofshould but solutions ofequal t hose to are aware water, be limitation. this in capacity heat the and lossescalorimeter ofHeat the environment the to is use the but calorimeter of not should experiments bomb a considered, be required. 5.1 Measuring energy changes changes Measuring 5.1 energy • • • •</p><p>Chemistry guide 51 Topic 5: Energetics/thermochemistry spossible. not formed from the same the from initial formed reactants energy - data loggers to record temperature changes. temperature record loggers data to curricular links: curricular - conservation of — conservation mass mindedness: mindedness: - : Discuss: accepted sourcevalues useand idea of this critique to the Experiments : could labs. include Law Hess's Use : of Recycling of materials is often an effective means of Recyclingeffectivean means is reducing materials of the often terms in of energy impact environmental inproduction, efficiency varies but its incountries. different ofn application the Hess’sisEnergy. of Conservatio example an the of Law Whatprinciples limitations challengesto the applying of general are and instances? specific free Hess’sinofGibbs and study the significance nutrition, drugs, has Law where direct synthesis energy i constituent from elements Aim4 experiments. Aim6 Aim7 Utilization: Utilization: Syllabuscross and International • • • • • • Theoryof knowledge: 2.3 topic Physics Aims: that is the sum of sum the multiple is that . � reactants ° f data. data. ° H f ∆ H � Σ ations energy can neither be created nor destroyed (the first destroyed can (the nor created be ations neither law energy thermodynamics). of </p><p>− � Law is Law s aw to calculatechanges. enthalpy to aw products ° f H reactions using ∆ reactionsusing ∆ � 𝐻𝐻 Σ ∆ : = In chemical In transform ea : based on the conservation of energy and atomic theory, scientists can test the hypothesis that if the same products — basedscientists conservationatomic and the on are of same hypothesis the theory, energy canif that the test science reaction</p><p>𝐻𝐻 ∆ reactions with known enthalpy changes. reactionswith known enthalpy The enthalpy changeseries enthalpy for is The insteps out of carried reaction a is a that of equalsum chang the to enthalpy the esfor steps. individual the L Hess’s of Application Calculation of change Determinationof of reactionenthalpy a the can data formation in ofEnthalpy foundbe section 12. in booklet data the Anapplication Hess' of Essential i d Essential Guidance: 5.2 Hess's LawHess's 5.2 Natureof Hypotheses change should energy the then of regardless of same the be steps. number the (2.4) Understandings: • • • • • • Applications and skills: Applications</p><p>52 Chemistry guide Topic 5: Energetics/thermochemistry ΔH values.ΔH variety of regions variety and curricular links: curricular - on and itsand on causes. xperiments could xperiments of butane. enthalpy be or combustion propane of mindedness: - Moral, ethical, economicconsequences environmental and Moral, social, of Data loggers can be used to record temperature changes. loggers Data can temperature usedbe record to : E : : : ozone depleti ozone Stratospheric ozone depletion Stratosphericregionspolar ozone isconcernof in particular a the the causesa that itfrom comes planet,although pollution the sources, Energy such high fossilof as fuels,combustion require Aim6 Aim7 Aim8 sources. International action and cooperation have helped to ameliorate the the helped ameliorate cooperationto and sources.have International action depletion ozone problem. ic— covalent4.3 structures International • • • • • Syllabuscrossand Utilization: Utilization: Aims: Top the model of Sincebonds and broken model basedformed. the bonds a model, on are these explanations alculations involving breakingenergy. requires values are given valuesare in booklet sectiondata the 11. in — measuredchangesenergy can explainedbe based on : Energy is absorbedEnergy broken bonds when are formed. isand are released bonds when forming releases energy and bond - and formingreleases energy enthalpies may be inaccuratebe enthalpiestakebecause not do into account they may science ond - B is enthalpy bond break to needed the of Average mol one energy inbond a a similar compounds. gaseousover molecule averaged changes Calculationvalues kn and enthalpy bond from own enthalpy the of measured values.of comparison these experimentally to whether profiles Sketchingpotentialinenergy determining evaluationand of stable more products reactantsifand are or or reaction the exothermic is endothermic. oxygen to to relative inDiscussion in importance ozone its strength bond the of atmosphere. the Bondenthalp y enthalpiesbond valid for only Average c are gases and bond forces. intermolecular : idea ssential E Applications and skills: Applications Guidance: 5.3 Bond enthalpies Bond 5.3 Natureof theories and Models with empirical dependsagreement data appropriate. sophistication the on theories of re obtained (2.2) data whe and can usedbe model the modify to Understandings: • • • • • • •</p><p>Chemistry guide 53 Topic 6: Chemical kinetics . . 7 hours reaction. iety of iety regions sources,and internationalso l Celsius scale is based on the properties of properties Celsiusscalewater isl the on based curricular links: curricular - mindedness: - whereas the artificia the whereas Depletion of stratospheric ozone has been caused largely by the catalytic the by has causedbeen Depletion stratosphericof largely ozone actionTheseis concern and CFCs of in regions. polar particular a the var a chemicalsfrom released are the depletion actionameliorate to needed been ozone cooperationand have problem. givesmeasure natural ofa Kelvin energy scaleThe kinetic the temperature of ofgas Are physical properties such as temperature invented discovered? physicalor Are as such properties temperature Theoryof knowledge: Utilization: Utilization: Syllabuscross and International • • what might be thermodynamically Topicmight stable?— what 5.3 meantby kinetically vs stable Topic— fireworks 13.1 ions and A.3uses — everyday Option of catalysts B.2 — enzymes Option Biologytopic — metabolism 8.1 — althoughwe can level, we cannottheorize directly see taking reactions molecular the at place hemicalreaction, without ed indirectly by monitoring monitoring by indirectly ed ) is the minimum energy that colliding that energy is ) molecules minimum the inneed a E , a catalyst increases the rate of a c of increasesrate the catalysta a , a E : The greater the probability that molecules will collide with sufficient energy and properand orientation, greater The of rate the moleculeshigher probability the the that sufficientcollidewill energy with Occam’s razor is used theory a as Occam’srazor guidea developing to science ndings: order to have to successful order leadingcollisions reaction.a to Species react as a result of collisions of sufficient energy and proper proper and Species sufficientresulta collisions of energy as react of orientation. of rate The reaction changeis inof asconcentration expressed the particular a unit time. per reactant/product followConcentrationchanges can inbe reaction a colour.and changesin volume mass, ( Activationenergy decreasing By in terms of Descriptionof movement the kinetic the of particles whose theory kinetic in is Kelvin. average temperature to proportional energy experiments. rate from data numerical and graphical of Analysis itself being permanently chemically itselfchanged. permanently being : idea Essential 6.1 Collision and reactionrates theory of Collision 6.1 Natureof principle The of is Collision(2.7) models. ofatomic example good a based current theory the on this principle. Understa • • • • • • • Applications and skills: Applications kinetics Chemical 6: Topic Core</p><p>54 Chemistry guide Topic 6: Chemical kinetics ts play in the fieldtsin play the chemistry. green of Whatof ofrate climate some controversies the are over : : 8 Whythesedo exist? and Usecollisions simulationsmolecular how affected are show to by catalys that role The : Investigate the rate of catalyst.a rate Investigatethe : reactiona with withoutand Experiments : could changing by stigating includerates concentration inve : : Aims1 change? Aim6 Aim6 oftemperature. or reactant a Aim7 changepressureand of such properties temperature, macroscopic as concentration. Aim8 Aims: • • • • • graphs of changesof in graphs the interpretation of interpretation the n energy distribution curves to account to distributionenergy n for Boltzman curves – the probabilitythese, the offactors including collisions the successful and affecting effectcatalyst. a of or concentration,massvolume time. against Explanation of the effects of temperature, pressure/concentration particleand Explanation temperature, of effects the of of sizerate on reaction. ConstructionMaxwell of Investigationevaluationand of of experimentally results. the reaction of rates profiles Sketchingcatalysts.energy with without and explanatioand of n tangents of from volume Calculationconcentration, of graphs rates reaction of should time covered. be vs mass or Students should be familiar with Guidance: 6.1 Collision and reactionrates theory of Collision 6.1 • • • • • •</p><p>Chemistry guide 55 Topic 7: Equilibrium and owever, it owever, 4.5 hours eg in mind. (5.5) inmind. ars. structures(topic 4.3) d global foodglobald production. H (electron dot) dot) (electron d vocabulary: a closeda is vocabulary: d system in one which no ize . izeas it arth has revolution mindedness: - matter is exchanged simply matter with surroundings. the vocabulary Does our knowledge; communicatedoes know? our it or shapecan we what rge impact on weaponry in w world both alsoweaponry on impact la a had rge The Haber process Haber chemical has The describedbeen important as most the reactionon E Scientistsscales;investigate different and at world macroscopic the the Which the knowingfrom microscopic.macroscopicallow of us to ways move to microscopic? the uses speciala Chemistry coincided Haber of career The Fritz of world upheavals with two po litical the WorldWarinsupervised releaseHe w ars. the chlorineof I battlefield the on production the on worked and of social context explosives. does How the of Should findingsscience? and scien scientifictistsbe methods the of affect work discoveries? their of responsible app lications heldmorally for the of in range a brackets chemistry contexts: Square used in are concentrations Lewis (topic 1.3), complexes(topic 14.1) Theoryof knowledge: Utilization: International • • • • • ) c K um is the Q ) can be ) c K ) from an equationan fora from ) c K tems in a statea of in equilibrium. tems the term dynamic equilibrium is used in other contexts, definition other dynamic equilibrium necessarilywith isnot chemistry but the in used term — the relative amount of products amount relative and reaction . isotopic labelling and its use in defining equilibrium. (1.8) its— isotopicand labelling use inequilibrium. defining </p><p> equilibriumconcentrations. position The the of measuresthe ) Q : action are equal. The position actionposition equal. re The are reverse forwardand the of rates equilibrium the when state of reacha reactionsThesereactions reversible. Many are will cience : idea s reactionquotient ( equilibriumexpression non - with temperature. and equilibrium changes with in changes concentration, pressure, homogeneous reaction. homogeneous actiontemperature. re forsame the at same the determined for particulara chemical determined constant. A state of equilibrium is reached in a closed system when in is closeda ofsystem rates the Astate reached equilibrium of the reactions reverse forwardand equal. are equilibrium law ( The equilibriumdescribes the constant how ofconstant magnitude indicates equilibrium the The of at extent the reaction a equilibrium dependent. isand temperature The equilibrithe Aposition catalyst or has effectno equilibrium the of on characteristics The chemical of sys physical and constant Deductionexpression ( of equilibrium the Determinationconstants of equilibrium different relationship ( the between reactantsreactiona during present particulaa at r point in time. of equilibrium can be controlled by changing ofcan by conditions. the controlled be equilibrium Essential Essential Applications and skills: Applications 7.1 Equilibrium Equilibrium 7.1 Natureof Obtainingevidence for scientific theories language across Common different disciplines Understandings: • • • • • • • • Topic 7: Equilibrium 7: Topic Core</p><p>56 Chemistry guide Topic 7: Equilibrium and bases and Acan case usedbe Haber of to study Fritz rinciple can be investigated qualitatively by looking can by investigatedbe at qualitatively rinciple telier’s p telier’s curricular links: curricular - â Ch Le conceptAnimations the simulationsand of illustrate can usedbe to ethical, Raiseawareness moral, economicand of implications the of : : : pressure, concentration and temperature changes equilibrium different temperature on concentrationpressure, and systems. Aim6 Aim7 dynamicequilibrium. Aim8 usingscience technology. and society. of role the debate in scientists Syllabuscross and of Topicbehaviour — the 8.4 weak acids • • • Aims: covered. covered. values for reactions that are multiples inverses for of are that or reactions values c K elier’s principle to predict the qualitative effects principlequalitative the of elier’s predict to plicationât Ch Le of changes of temperature, pressure changesposition temperature, of concentrationand the of on of constant. equilibriumvalue the on and equilibrium the Ap should Physicalchemicalbe systems and Relationship between Specificindustrial process required. not detailsany of are one another should another one covered.be idance: u G 7.1 Equilibrium Equilibrium 7.1 • • • •</p><p>Chemistry guide 57 Topic 8: Acids and bases the the 6.5 hours Lavoisierhas calledbeen excess hydrochloricacid excessin the ize is derived from the Arabic forthe isfrom word derived forming in Greek, and reflectsand formingin Greek, alkali meansacid - base theory has by developed been scientists from theory base curricular links: curricular - metal oxides metal responsible forare acid precipitation belief that the element oxygen was responsible for a compound’sa was oxygen responsible belieffor element the that mindedness: - means sour in Latin, whilein sour Latin, means : Each theory has itslimitations. and Each : theory strengths the father of modern chemistry but he washe but father chemistry the inofmistaken oxygen about this modern context. Acidus the theories.are AcidexplainedHow be can different and base using beha viour explanations from explanations subjects different insuch chemistry in as other history? Aim9 calcinedashes. Oxygene mistaken acidic Acid – properties. around the world, and its vocabulary has been influenced by their languages. their has itsand influencedworld, been the by vocabulary around amino acids ptionB.2 — amino as species acting amphiprotic Utilization: Utilization: Syllabuscross and International • • • the acid/base character of Topicacid/baseoxides — the 3.2 character Topic— non - 8.5 O — antacidsD.4 Option bases are which neutral stomach Aims: Theoryof knowledge: base For example, example, For Lowry base is Lowry a . – 2 Lowry acids Lowry bases.and O proton in aqueous solution in aqueous proton as 3 a H 2 /C 2 transfer of a proton from an acidan from transferbase.a to proton of a O donor and a Brønsteda and donor – 4 – Brønsted + H 2 Lowry acid baseand reaction.in Lowry chemical a by a single proton is called a conjugate acid singlea - calledconjugate a by is proton (aq). rather C than + – O required here. required 3 HCN altering the theory that oxygen was the element which gave a compound its oxygen that compound whicha – baseacidic foracid was theoriesalteringelement gave the allowed theory other develop. the to properties — HCN – Brønsted COO 3 : the conjugate acid base conjugate conjugate reaction.in chemical or a the Lowry acid is Lowry proton/H a Many reactions Many the involve acceptor. + (aq) and (aq) H + cience s COOH/CH 3 – Brønsted pair. CH A Amphiproticspecies ascan both act Aspeciesof pair differing Deductionof the Deductionof is Lewisnot theory location clearlyThe transferredindicated. should proton the of be Studentsknowof representation shouldthe H both differenceamphoteric The amphiproticand terms the shouldbetween be covered. proton/H : idea Essential Guidance: 8.1 Theories of acids and bases acids Theories of 8.1 Natureof Falsificationtheories of (2.5) false. sensation the from Theoriesbeing of theory proven superseded taste,sour a derived of this but early — one (1.9) acidity been had decisions "litmus test". Publicferred(5.5) as to — outsideor chemistry, of re "acid science of arena the of sometimes test" understanding are Understandings: • • • • • • • • • Applications and skills: Applications bases and Acids 8: Topic Core</p><p>58 Chemistry guide Topic 8: Acids and bases changesof indicators or everyday life removers rust from everyday base theories. (1.9) base – curricular links: curricular - acid basetitrations – The evidence The couldstudent’s properties a on for these based be : enthalpy change — enthalpy 5.1 of neutralization reactions A number of acids Anumber used in are bases and our Aim6 to oven cleaners, from foods to toothpastes, from treatments cleaners, from foods toothpastes,oven to to from for stingsbee to of wasp stings. treatment experiences. experimental Utilization: • • Syllabuscrossand of Topicacid/baseoxides — the 3.2 character Topic Aims: Topic— acid 1.3 and carbonates.and tion reactions. iza basewith different titrations hydrogen carbonates hydrogen tionof acidan empiricalon evidence such depends as production the of ingases reactions colour the with metals, observable properties of acids of properties led — observable modification the to have of bases and iza : The character The carbonatesshould covered. be cience : idea s indicators. Most acids withcharacteristic reactive Most observable chemical have reactions oxides, hydroxides,metal metals, metal produced are Saltinwater and neutral exothermic Balancingchemicalfor equations reaction the acids. of different baseIdentificationmake to needed of salts. and acid the Candidatesof should experience - have acid soluble Baseshydroxides,carbonates not such ammonia, and are which as hydrogen booklet data indicators colour in inchangesThe given the are different of section22. Essential Essential the release of heat in reactions with metal oxides release the inwith of metal reactions hydroxides.and heat Guidance: 8.2 Properties of acids and of Properties 8.2 bases Natureof Obtainingevidence for theories Understandings: • • • • • • • Applications and skills: Applications</p><p>Chemistry guide 59 Topic 8: Acids and bases language? study of — study logs ” scientific “ base titration could be monitored with indicatoran could a pH baseor monitored be titration curricular links: curricular - alkaline solutions. / alkaline Studentsshould ablebe concept usepH to the apply and of in range a Anacid – : : basic concentrations into a very simple number. (2.7) simple number. very a concentrationsinto + Chemistry use makes universalChemistry oflanguage of of as means the a mathematics Why have to one just communication.isimportant it Aim3 theoreticaland experimental contexts. Aim6 probe. Utilization: Syllabuscrossand MathematicsSLMathematicsand (topic(topic HL 1. 2) 1.2) Aims: Theoryof knowledge: • • • at 298 K.298 at 14 − eter and eter universalindicator. m 10</p><p>. isrequired. not ] = pH − ] w − 𝐾𝐾</p><p> fold change in the hydrogen ion hydrogen foldchange in the OH [ OH may be applied.be may [ values. + ] . + and</p><p> pH H ] − [ pOH + H = 10 [ , = 𝑤𝑤 ] 𝐾𝐾 pH + instead of instead H H [ + O 3 and . ] ] ) + aq 𝐻𝐻 ( [ : + H The pH scale pH The distinguish and is scaleacid,used between to artificial an neutral [ he temperature dependence temperature he of — thescale pH scale to widea isrange acidity of relative attempt the an over H log cience − s = values distinguish between acidic,valuesdistinguish alkalineand neutral solutions. between concentration pH Achange 10 - a of unit pH one represents pH ionic The constant, product involving Solvingproblems Studentswithuse the familiar ofshould be a Studentson assessed be not will Studentsconcernedwith shouldacids strong only bases be in sub and this - topic. Knowingt EquationsH involving : idea Essential Applications and skills: Applications 8.3 The pH scale The 8.3 pH Natureof razor Occam’s Understandings: • • • • • • • • • • Guidance:</p><p>60 Chemistry guide Topic 8: Acids and bases . (aq), (aq), 4 SO 2 (aq). 3 (aq), NH ,NaOH ) (aq 3 curricular links: curricular - ,HNO ) : Students: experience should experimental workingofhave qualitatively Students : of strength could loggers and investigate to acid use the data (aq HCl The strength of an acid can be determined by use the of determined ofbe strength conductivityand The pH can acidan technologies,do ways what In probes. senses, extend change our which or reinforceof view our world? the Aim6 weakwithand strong both acids include: Examples bases. and to H Aim7 bases. Utilization: Utilization: Syllabuscross and Theoryof knowledge: • • • mistry Topic— solution1.3 che mistry Topic— weak7.1 reversible acids basisand involve reactions Aims: data for a particular type of reaction supports the idea that weak for reaction— data acidsof supports inparticular a idea the type that exist acid. for solutions hydrogen hydrogen techniques has allowed the relative strength of different acids of strength (1.8) techniquesrelative the quantified. be to bases allowed and different has weak conjugate a patterns and anomalies in relative strengths of acidslevel. (3.1) molecular the at instrengths can relative of bases and explained be anomaliesand — patterns on the concentration of the solution. The strength of acids or bases depends on the extent dissociateacidswhich to solution. depends the they bases the on in concentration the of on strength or aqueou s solution The of : and metal carbonates electrical their and metal and conductivities The pH depends pH The : andskills: concentrations. esusedbe ofas may models further evidence for or experiments claima cience s carbonates ofequal . weak. and acidsStrong ionization in differ extent the bases and of acids Strong conductivities equal of bases and concentrations higher have than weakacids bases. and hasand base.weak Aa donor acid strong conjugate proton good a is acceptor Ahasand base strong is proton good a Distinctionof weakand strong acids between of rates the in bases and terms oxides, hydroxides,metal metal reactions their metal with metals, terms ionization The dissociationinterchangeably. and can usedbe Seebases.and forsection inbooklet data the listweak a of acids 21 sential i dea sential Es Applications Guidance: 8.4 Strong and weakand bases Strong 8.4 and acids Natureof instrumentation use — the Improved of analytical advanced forLookingdiscrepanciesand trends outcom The equilibrium.(1.9) Understandings: • • • • • • •</p><p>Chemistry guide 61 Topic 8: Acids and bases These . Scientific terms have a precisea have Scientific . terms — urbanstress sustainable the and city; acidrain ” laden terminology? ladenterminology? impact of incountries acid different impact helpwill rain t he environmental change — environmental ut not all rain is “ rain all not ut curricular links: curricular dioxide is produced by the combustion the fuelsby produced fossilof high dioxide is with - mindedness: - ption G: Urban Environments Urban ption G: The effects differenton The be could construction materials rain acid of of discussion A ur impurities ur f : : Other : nsof mea reducing production pooling,car oxide — bususe, etc. oxides acid to leading in, which ra is damaging environment. our : raise awareness of the environmental impact of this secondary pollutant of and impact raisethis awareness environmental the of secondary political the implications. The polluter country and polluted country are often Acid pollutedand are same. polluterthe not country country The primary the pollutant from depositionaffects farthat regionssecondary a is source.Solving problem international requires this cooperation. b acidic is rain All Aim6 investigated. quantitatively Aim8 Aim8 coulddiscussed.be definition. Does scientific vocabulary simply communicate simply definition.scientificknowledge vocabulary our inDoes a can it or have valueway neutral - graphy O — Globalinteractions base properties. Acid deposition is a topic that can be discussed from different discussedfrom is can that basebe topic a depositionAcid properties. Theoryof knowledge: International • • • • • Environmental systems societiesand Environmental — acid5.8 topic deposition Geo HL Utilization: Utilization: Syllabuscrossand Aims the acid/base character of Topicoxides acid/basethe — the 3.2 character activity B.2change — pH Option enzyme and — sulfurC.2 Option sul of levels . 3 to to by their acid their by – d and HNOand ize 2 ofAcid 5.6. and nitrogen to to nitrogen and ,HNO 4 sulfur dissolve in water in dissolve SO 2 , H , 3 and hasand a pH combustionof methods oxides - 2 SO 2 sulfur metals can metals characterbe . 3 tion production has led greater to of and sulfur nitrogen SO 2 iza and nitrogen and the effects the and nitrogen and of deposition acid useCO of dissolved combustionpostand andH 4 SO 2 below 5.6. 5.6. below , H , 2 pH oxides emissions. oxides oxides of non - and — oxides metals : Increased industrial ,HNO 3 : roblems cience i dea s should covered. be Rainis acidic naturally beca when formed Acidor nitrogen deposition is Sourcesoxides the sulfur of of describeBalancingcombustion the of that equations the offormation oxides their H subsequent the and - pre the between on Distincti reducing sulfur Deductionfor equationsmetals with ofacidreactive deposition deposition acid carbonates.and depositionhas a formHNO Essential Essential problems can throughreduced be problems collaboration organizations. intergovernmental and with national Applications and skills: Applications 8.5 Acid deposition deposition 8.5 Acid Natureof p and Risks impact allows perspectives.usenvironmental the reduce to Chemistry and understand to activities.of (4.8) human Understandings: • • • • • •</p><p>62 Chemistry guide Topic 9: Redox processes r test. r 8 hours d by the United the by d try. bleach, the browning of foodof bleach, to exposed browning the Whatlostinbeen this has gained and process? human right, yet it is estimated that over one billion one right, it is yet human over that estimated lyse breatha reactionbasis the of is Aredox . are useful when explaining redox reactions. Are artificialexplaining when Are useful are reactions. redox a useful or valid way ofway clarifying usefula knowledge? valid or mindedness: - ng agents such as chlorine or ozone to kill to ozone or suchchlorine microbial pathogens. agentsng as izi Nations as a fundamental Nationsas a uses ly supplies common peoplewater of lack provision. Disinfection this oxid etc. air, Access to a supply of clean drinkinghas Accessrecogn izebeen water supplya clean to of has developed systematica language Chemistry has that resulted in older obsolete. becoming names Oxidation states conversion s hydrogen by Aerobicfuel solar cells,cells, respiration, bleaching batteries, peroxidehouseholdof in melanin hair, influence the under which Driving inisresults problem global a alcohol of seriousaccidents. road syntheticand Natural foodantioxidants in chemis Photochromiclenses . galvanization and Corrosion International • • • • • • • • Theoryof knowledge: Utilization: Utilization: group group ple.</p><p> equations in acidic or neutral solutions. neutral or inequationsacidic - of an atom in an ion or a compound. a in of ionan or atom an oxidation) reactions play a key role in many chemical inrole key a many biochemicaland reactions oxidation) processes. play states species oxidized and reduced and the oxidizingspecies the and reduced and oxidized and : Redox(reduction – : cience s metals. metals. reducingagents, in reactions. redox Oxidationgain/hydrogen consideredbe of reductionand can in oxygen terms change in or loss, oxidation transfer electron number. reducinga and Anis agent oxidizing oxidized. reduced is agent - exist main fofor and Variablemetals most transition oxidation numbers r series activity undergo which The ease the ranksto they according with metals oxidation. Winkler biochemical can The usedbe demand measure to oxygen Method used as a of sam (BOD), water measure inof a degree the pollution Deduction of oxidation the formula, given a from Deduction compound of of metal transition a name the numerals. Roman by applyingoxidation represented numbers Identificationof the Deductionusing of half reactions redox series activity the reactionredox a from Deductionor feasibilityof of the reactiodata. n non - Essential i dea Essential Applications and skills: Applications 9.1Oxidation and reduction of Nature involvingone to evidence is How specific involving one reduction hydrogen), and and from electron used (oxygen transfer,in elements oxidation — changes definitionof the is invokingone to scientistsof that example good a oxidation numbers way similarities the .9) broaden (1 principles. general to Understandings: • • • • • • • • • • Core 9: Redox processes Topic</p><p>Chemistry guide 63 Topic 9: Redox processes Useof lity to oxidizespecies other lity to Winkler to measureMethod BOD. s products trichloromethane). (eg - curricular links: curricular - xperimental determination of amounts, masses, volumes and of masses, volumes determination xperimental amounts, Experiments could include demonstrating the activity series, redox Experiments could activity the include demonstrating Oxidizingagents as cansuch disinfectants. chlorine usedbe as : : chlorineits isto due as disinfectant a abi concern of formingharmfulby Aim6 titrationsusingand the Aim8 Topic— halogen3.2 reactivity Topics— difference4.2 ionicand 4.1 covalent between bonding and Topic— oxidation10.2 alcohols of Biologyreactions— redox topics8.3 and 8.2 in physiology Aims: Syllabuscross and Topic— e 1.3 concentrationssolution of • • , Oxidation numbers Oxidationnumbers 1)and in oxygen pe roxides - inkler Method to calculate to BOD. Method inkler s ( s hydride in metal hydrogen of should be represented with the sign given before with number signthe the shouldgiven represented be state formally distinguish formally terms. two the between 1) should 1) covered. be - eg +2 not 2+. not +2 eg Solution of a range of redox titration problems. Solutionof problems. range a of titration redox W Application the of oxidationand Oxidationoften state interchangeably, though number are used IUPACdoes Oxidation states oxidation The ( in booklet sectiondata the A 25 . issimple series activity in given are represented by numerals Roman represented according are IUPAC. to Guidance: 9.1Oxidation and reduction • • • • • •</p><p>64 Chemistry guide Topic 9: Redox processes cells. - real ? ionhalf - The basic The actcertain concept why usedchanges of justify types to . curricular links: curricular - electrochemical cells — electrochemical oxygen fuel oxygen cell source usedbe in a s spacecraft, can energy an . mindedness: - Constructioncellof using voltaic metal/metal two typical a Electrolysisincludecould salt. experiments molten a A of that video : : are always associated with each other? Are concepts such as energy always associated are asconcepts Are energy other? with such each Researchoften infactors. space centres energy on exploration abstran just Isenergy cellsFuel pacemakers Heart Aim6 Aim6 of couldtheseused be also showelectrolytic to some processes. – hydrogen NASA in by International USA. Spacethe suchThe first engineered as those international the involving multinationala Stationof project is example good a community. scientific Utilization: Utilization: Theoryof knowledge: International • • • • • • Aims: Syllabuscrossand fuel cells — fuel C.6 Option 5.3 topic Physics alvoltaic two cell using the desire to produce energy can be driven by can social driven be profit. needsdesire — the or energy produce to (4.5) cells. - : ionhalf - Voltaic cells convert chemical energy to electrical energy and electrolytic cells convert electrical energy to chemical to electrical to electrical chemical electrolyticand convert y.convert energy Voltaiccellsenerg energy energy cells ea : cience s sponta neousprocesses. ) cells: ) Galvanic Voltaic cells convert energy from spontaneous, from exothermic Voltaicenergy cellschemical convert processes ele to ctricalenergy. reductionand electrode) Oxidation(negative the at occurs occurs anode the at voltaica cathodecell. (positive in electrode) by chemicalbringing to about Electrolyticelectrical cellsenergy, energy convert non - Oxidation(positivereduction and the electrode) at occurs occurs anode the at electrode) cathode(negative in cell.electrolytican ofConstructionelectrochemical cells.of annotationand types both Explanationused in is electricity produce to voltaic a reaction redox a how of cellin cell. conducted electrolytic an is current how and cells. ionand Distinctionflow in electron electrochemical both between typic a involving experiments of Performance laboratory metal/metal electrolysis the Deductionsalt. of of molten a of products the Essential i d Essential Electrolytic cells: Electrolytic and skills: Applications 9.2 Electrochemical cells cells Electrochemical 9.2 Natureof research of implications Ethical Understandings: Voltaic( • • • • • • • • •</p><p>Chemistry guide 65 Topic 9: Redox processes What the are . The use ofThe . liquid which methanol, can be : Although: environmentally fuelhydrogen an the considered cellis produced from plants as a carbon neutral fuel plants neutral from produced doesascontribute whichnot to carbon a (one effect),greenhouse the fuelcellspotential. in has enormous of development the to barriers fuel cells?current Aim8 internal the combustion engine, offriendly, storage to efficientalternative fuel problem hydrogen is major a • For voltaic cells, a cell diagram convention should voltaiccovered. be cells, For celldiagram a 9.2 Electrochemical cells cells Electrochemical 9.2 Guidance: •</p><p>66 Chemistry guide Topic 10: Organic chemistry The The 11 hours 11 think of where examples net importers and net importers those net are that the less in play the knowledge of the ways analytical Whatdo role mindedness: - acquisitionknowledge? scientific of A small proportion of nations have control over the the control world’sover have oil ofA small proportion resources. nations interdependenceof are that countries the of can describedbe measure standard octane number) (octane rating The as a ratings of often performance the in fuelcars the vary Octane used aircraft. and complicated globe, the quitea re and widelyregionally throughout fact the by different that ofvalues. use means countries different expressing the a label from The originates chemistry” “organic vital a forcemisconception that of wasexplain to needed life. you Can chemistry the ofKekuléinspiration the for came that cyclic the <a href="/tags/Benzene/" rel="tag">benzene</a> structure claimed dream. a from petrochemicals. use of great Fractionalmany distillation makes synthetic pesticides,explosives, scents Dyes, soap, and cosmetics, herbicides, flavourin gs. exporters is an important factor in factor sha isexporters economicpingand globalimportant an policies developments. similar has from developed vocabulary misunderstandings?shouldand Can controlledbe eliminate languageto such ever problems? Utilization: Utilization: Theoryof knowledge: International • • • • • • . . format in fullcondensed and pesticides can have harmful peoplehave environment. the and effects (4.5) canpesticides both on PTFE and superglue.and — PTFE (1.4) Organic chemistry focuses of chemistry Organic containing compounds carbon. chemistry the on : cience: s Aseries homologous family, serieswith isthe same of compounds of a the commona structuralwhichformula, by general each from other same differ unit. Structuformulasral can represented be compounds formulabut Structural are molecular isomers with same the of differentatoms. arrangements of parts Functional reactive the are groups molecules. contain compounds Saturated single compounds unsaturated and b onds only containtriple double bonds. or ishydrocarbon. unsaturated Benzene aromatic, an Explanationinseries. homologous a of boiling trends members the of of points lecularformulas.Distinctionempirical,structural and between mo Core chemistry Organic 10: Topic 10.1 Fundamentals of organic chemistry of organic chemistry Fundamentals 10.1 Natureof scientificand Serendipity discoveries additives— drugs, and implications Ethical Understandings: • • • • • • • • Applications and skills: Applications ntial i dea Esse ntial</p><p>Chemistry guide 67 Topic 10: Organic chemistry heory, heory, Whoshould are fossil— are of a wide range of widea of range generated molecular - ffectenvironment? the a dimensionalmodels uctures,multiple bonds, VSEPR t onsin regard? this : of alcohols and biofuels as fuel petrol to alcohols of alternatives biofuelsand as curricular links curricular - Many products can Many fossilinherently obtainedthe be to from fuelsdue Either use model kits or suitable kitsEither or use model computer Experimentscould include distillationuse liquids separate the to a of or source are of main consequences There fuelsfossil our in as using : : : use the Discuss : B.2B.7and — proteins be responsiblebe fordecisi making rotary evaporator remove to mixture. a rotary solventa from energy. fundamental isesquestions of some ra richchemistry This carbon. fuelsthey do how and valuable burn too to Aim6 Aim6 Aim8 Aim8 (gasoline)diesel.and graphics programmes to construct to - graphicsthree programmes organicmolecules. c— weak8.4 acids — organicD.9 in structure Option medicines resonancemolecularand bond and polarity Topicforces — intermolecular 4.4 Topicreactions — exothermic 5.3 enthalpiesbond and Topi A.5 — materialsOption polymers and Options Aims: Syllabuscross and Topic— empirical1.2 formulas molecular and str Topicsdot) — Lewis4.3 and 4.2 (electron • • • • needsbe to . s functional groups: chainbranched - and - halo hexane <a href="/tags/Alkene/" rel="tag">alkenes</a>, alkynes, halogenoalkanes, alkenes,, alkynes, ) of ) ketones, <a href="/tags/Alkane/" rel="tag">alkanes</a>, alkenes, alkynes, : alkanes : 2n+2 H n . D models (real or virtual) of (real models virtual) D organic or molecules. different classes different arenes cyclicalkanes halogenoalkanesand to up as alcohol is the class class the is hydroxylEg isfor alcohol OH, functional the as where group non - hexyne. to up alkenes hexene to up alkynes and basic the (in six to up atoms compounds for chain nomenclature carbon of purposes) one of containing classes the only alcohols,aldehydes, ethers, halogenoalkanes, esters ketones, and acids. carboxylic alcohols, ethers, aldehydes, ketones,carboxylicalcohols,esters, aldehydes, ethers, amides, acids, amines, nitrilesand Identificationof h ydroxyl, functionalphenyl, ingroups Identificationmolecules of eg typical nitrile, ether, ester, carboxyl, aldehyde, amine, <a href="/tags/Alkyl/" rel="tag">alkyl</a>,carboxamide, carbonyl, alkenyl alkynyl. and Construction3 - of of Applicationinnomenclature the IUPAC of straight rules atomscarbon tertiary and secondary in Identificationof primary, and secondary nitrogen halogenoalkanestertiary primary, and alcohols and in amines. atoms using benzene Discussionchemicalof physicalstructure evidence. and the of Skeletalformulasdiscussedcourse.should inbe the formulasC general (eg The distinction The class functionaland between names names group following shouldThe nomenclature covered: be – – – chainisomers. made. name. alcohols,aldehydes carboxylicand shouldknown. be acids Guidance: 10.1 Fundamentals of organic chemistry of organic chemistry Fundamentals 10.1 • • • • • • • • • •</p><p>68 Chemistry guide Topic 10: Organic chemistry can have a n canhave <a href="/tags/Methane/" rel="tag">methane</a>, and methane, and r. problem in many countries in problem many . perfumes, food flavourings, solvents, nitroglycerin , flavourings,— perfumes,foodsolvents, curricular links: curricular - usage as fuelusageadditives. as lyseinrole breatha the mindedness: , , - varied uses varied , biofuelspainkillers and Methane is gas,greenhouse a Methane ruminants itsand from in suchcountries release Argentina contributesZealand asNew total and to Uruguay, Brazil, significantly gasgreenhouse emissions. Landfillsalso are sourcea of technologiescountries insome gas the capture to as developing sourcea are for ofgeneration. heat and electricity energy growing a is misuse Alcohol fuels.<a href="/tags/Alkane/" rel="tag">Alkane</a> usage as of role fruitThe in ethene ripening. Alcohols Alcohols Esters impact on their economies their on socialand impact structures. Syllabuscross and International • • • • • • • Utilization: Utilization: Topicprocesses— redox 9.1 A.5 — polymers Option B.3 — lipids Option reactions. rich species species rich developments and back developments applicationsorganic can key to chemicalmapped be scientific of research deficientcarbon. They can undergo undergo can They radicalsubstitution A <a href="/tags/Nucleophile/" rel="tag">nucleophile</a> is an electron - an is Anucleophile donateselectronan to - eactions. low reactivity and undergo free undergo and - lowreactivity Structure, bonding Structure, strandschemicalinterconversions and key infunctional involving are reactions organic chemistry. group cation or condensation) and some undergo some and oxidation condensation) or cation reactions. cience: s (nucleophilic)substitution reactions. containingit that lonea pair Alkanes have than reactive Alkenesalkanes reactions. more addition are undergo and can usedbe water to Bromine distinguish alkenes alkanes.and between Alcoholsacidsnucleophilic called substitution undergo with reactions (also esterifi reactive Halogenoalkanesalkanes. than more are basis the consist Additionof form and widea range of polymers monomers of plastics the industry. does undergo readily not Benzene addition doesreactionsundergo but electrophilicr substitution Alkenes: Halogenoalkanes: Benzene: 10.2Functional groupchemistry Natureof to Useof has that inof date made been the — much data progress the interconversions. functionalgroup (3.1) reactions involving Understandings: Alkanes: • • • • • • Alcohols: Polymers: Essential idea: Essential</p><p>Chemistry guide 69 Topic 10: Organic chemistry products. - fatsas by - determination and determination extraction. : Experiments: alkanescould include distinguishing alkenes,and between Discuss: foodsignificanceof ofin the the hydrogenation the alkenes Aim6 filtration(using vacuum soap usefiltration, a the and preparing of under gravity includingBuchnerdistillation,and flask), reflux purification recrystallization, point melting Aim8 productionincluding trans Aims: • • ic acid) to to acid) ic sulfur andalcohols secondary withhalogens of in a terms ionreaction alcoholan of with a Explanation of distillation and reflux in the isolation of of in Explanation the distillation reflux the and radical substitution mechanism involving photochemical involving radicalmechanism substitution fission. homolytic - form an ester. an form <a href="/tags/Carboxylic_acid/" rel="tag">carboxylic acid</a>, in the presence of a catalyst (eg concentrated carboxyliccatalystconcentrated of in (eg presence acid, the a Writing equations for the complete and incompleteand combustion Writingforequations complete the of hydrocarbons. Explanation ethane and of reaction the of methane Writingforequations halogensreactionsand hydrogen the alkenes and of with halides alkenes ofhydrogen water. and with symmetrical of Outlinofe alkenes. polymerization addition the the to and Relationshipof polymer monomer the structure the between unit. repeating combustion of Writingforequations alcohols.complete the reactions Writingforprimary of equations oxidation the forWritingcondensat the equation the forWritingsubstitution the halogenoalkanes of equation the reactions with aqueoushydroxide. sodium free potassium or (usingdichromate(VI) as acidified manganate(VII) potassium oxidizingagents). carboxylicand aldehyde products. acid Halogenoalkanes: Alcohols: Alkenes: 10.2Functional groupchemistry and skills: Applications Alkanes: • • • • • • • • •</p><p>70 Chemistry guide Topic 10: Organic chemistry Free radicals should be represented by a by represented radicalsshouldFree be 2 and electrophilicand 2 reactions not substitution are N 1 and S and 1 N radicalreactions. substitution - required. single dot. Referencesteps initiation, to termination and should in propagation made be free of mechanisms The S 10.2Functional groupchemistry Guidance: • •</p><p>Chemistry guide 71 Topic 11: Measurement and data processing case tions, 10 hours 10 coldfusion ” “ (ISO) published the (ISO) inThis 1995. has been Organization correcting and communal public correctingcommunal and - errors interpreted replication.be through 3.4) must (3.2, curricular links: curricular - o what extent what o do other the to these characteristics apply also mindedness: - Considerfullmoral the obligationsthe scientistscommunicate to of The distinction The : Classroles different and Class Aof and B glassware : de to the Expressionthe to de in Measurement Uncertainty of As a result of collaboration between seven international seven izaAsorgan resulta collaboration of between includingIUPAC,International the Standards Gui countries in widelyadopted into most several hasand translatedbeen languages. Scienceasdescribedbeen self a has T endeavour. ofareas knowledge? spacecraft.Orbiter Climate of Crash Mars the regarding CERN speed from flawed.the Originalresults of were neutrinos Aim6 couldexplored.be Aim8 uncertaintie experimental including extent s. data, of The their of Fleischmann and Pons in the 1990s is an example of when this of1990s Ponsand is was innot Fleischmann when of the example an fulfilled. drug trials tion— drug D.1 Theoryof knowledge: Utilization: Syllabuscrossand International • • • • • • Op Aims:</p><p> be takenbe results. evaluatingexperimental into account when precision, accuracy, systematic, and random random systematic,and — precision,accuracy, ) to ) appropriate an + errors. ually lead to systematic errors in errors uallylead systematic to numerical obtained from information All measurement has limita of accuracy,and thisand All precisionmust measurement cience: s Qualitative data includes data Qualitative non - all measurement. observationsfrom not obtained are and data measurements, alwaysQuantitative associated from errors/uncertainties, apparatus, the human withby random by and determined limitationstimes. as such reaction errors Propagationof of in impact random processing data shows the the finaluncertaintiesresult. the on Experimentaldesign us procedure and which cause measurement, deviationa in particulara direction. trials Repeat measurementsand errorssystematic not but will random reduce errors. systematicand Distinctionerrors random between ( as uncertainties range a Record in measurements all uncertainties Discussionreduce into experiment. ways an of Propagationofin processed use the of uncertainties including data, percentage uncertainties. the on Discussionimpact their systematic errors work, in all of experimental can resultsreduced. be they how and a isor have to likely sourceEstimation major error of particular a whether precision. Topic 11: Measurement and processing data Measurement 11: Topic Core Applications and skills: Applications 11.1 Uncertainties and errors and results and measurement in Uncertainties 11.1 Natureof with replicatesreliability quantitativemeasurements Making ensure to Understandings: • • • • • • • • • • • Essential idea: Essential</p><p>72 Chemistry guide Topic 11: Measurement and data processing ision as the random isionas random the answer should be given to the least the final to given be should answer en adding or subtracting, the the subtracting, addingen or Wh minor effect minor finalresult. the on result experimental the when Calculation can e rror compared percentage be of withresult.theoretical a accepted or precisionand Distinctionresults.accuracy between in evaluating of number The figuresfigures in significant in the resulta based is the on given data. of Whendecimal places.dividing number finalor multiplying the is answer of least the to figures. significant given number prec same the to value data the recorded be that Note must error . SIunits programme. the usedbe should throughout Guidance: 11.1 Uncertainties and errors and results and measurement in Uncertainties 11.1 • • • • •</p><p>Chemistry guide 73 Topic 11: Measurement and data processing e usee spread sheetsof ling.of statistical Interpretation these fitlines gradients.and - decay graph decay plot to determine activation energy determine plotto between scientists between wide.world – rate and Boltzmannfrequency – time distribution;concentration plotting software may be u sed,be plottingincluding may software th curricular links: curricular – - cation mindedness: - Graph - : trends cantrends settinglead often predictions, soto and of underpins the policie suchareas government ass inhealth education. and many of derivation the and best Charts and graphs, which graphs, and Charts transcendlargely can language facilitate barriers, communi a are visualGraphs soof representation use perception sense as and data, a of way knowing.extent what does alsoother the on interpretation To their rely reason? ofand ways suchlanguage knowing, as widelyused Graphicalrepresentations inare data suchareas of diverse as population, finance and climate l mode Aim7 Utilization: Utilization: International • • • • Syllabuscross and Theoryof knowledge: gas volume, temperature, pressuregraphs Topic— gas1.3 volume, Topic— Maxwell 6.1 concentrationgraphs Topic— Arrhenius 16.2 Topic— titration18.3 curves kinetics B.7 — enzyme Option — greenhouseeffect; C.5 Option globaland dioxidecarbon concentration temperatures — firstC.7 Option order/ Aims: fit lines or curves through data points, data through curves fit linesor - Graphs are are visualGraphs a in of representation . data trends cience: s Graphical techniques are an effective means of effectivemeans Graphicaltechniques communicating an effect the an of are ofcan and variable, leaddependent independenta on determination to variable physicalquantities. Sketchedlabelledunscaled but used have graphs show to are and axes, inversely qualitaor proportional such trends, variables are that tive as proportional. have graphs in labelled scaledand quantitativeDrawn used are and axes, measurements. ofgraphs Drawing includingresults choexperimental correct axesthe of ice and scale. of of and Interpretation ingraphs relationships the terms dependent of independentvariables. Productionof interpretation and best and slope by graphs Calculation from measuring (gradient) quantities of intercept,includingunits. appropriate including an assessment of when it includingwhen of can assessment an cannot and as considbe lineara ered function. 11.2 Graphical techniques Graphical 11.2 Natureof idea of The testedbe incorrelation graphically. whosecan experiments — can results displayed be (2.8) Understandings: • • • • • • • Applications and skills: Applications Essential idea: Essential</p><p>74 Chemistry guide Topic 11: Measurement and data processing e sensinge in physics. on between scientists between on in d ifferent model.(1.10) dimensionalof view inorgans the ricalcomposition percentage formulafrom data the composition of a substance or determine the purity of a of purity determinethe a or composition the substanceof a curricular links: curricular - mindedness: - countries. Monitoring and analysisand is Monitoring ofxenobiotics a toxinsin and environment the collaboraticontinuousinvolves that endeavour that information Electromagneticcan beyond waves transmit of sense our Whatperceptions.of senseofaslimitations the way a knowing?are perception spectroscopysensors IR is in remot and heat used cells within magnetic can molecules Protonsdetectedbe human in by water - giving three a resonance(MRI), imaging human body. human Theoryof knowledge: Utilization: Utilization: Syllabuscross and International • • • • determination of Topic— determination 1.2 empi the experimental other determinationand formulafrom from data molecular of or the empirical data. the both experimental formulaand H 1 magnetic resonance and infrared spectroscopy have identification have structuraland made spectroscopy resonancedetermination magnetic infrared and e spectroscopy ( spectroscopy e be understood. be , proton , nuclear ry structure. H NMRH IR.or 1 Analytical techniques can be used to determine the structure of structure the ana lyse compound, a determine Analyticalcanusedbe to techniques Spectroscopicstructuralidentificationinorganic and used techniques in are organic the of compounds. cience: idea: s NMR) and infrared spectroscopy (IR) are techniques infraredand (IR)are spectroscopy NMR) can that usedbe help to ir the determine identifyto and compounds The degree of can (IHD) degree usedbe index The unsaturation or deficiency of hydrogen a from of number formulathe molecular multiple determine rings to bonds or in molecule.a proton (MS), spectrometry Mass nuclear resonanc magnetic a from Determinationformula.of molecular IHD the from structural compound the about Deductionfeatures information of a of composition percentage MS, data, is (EMS) in electromagnetic booklet given spectrum data the The in section 3. for each regions employed The technique should of for methods. principlesrequired operating not any these The are mpound. Essential Essential co Applications and skills: Applications 11.3 Spectroscopic identification organic compounds identification of Spectroscopic 11.3 Natureof in instrumentation Improvements spectromet — mass of(1.8) routine. compounds explain to developed — forare observable be not Models may that based spectra vibration certainexample, bond the on are phenomena Understandings: • • • • • • Guidance:</p><p>Chemistry guide 75 Topic 11: Measurement and data processing nuclearatom the : Spectral: databases usedbe could here. effects The : their on gasesgreenhouse various the of depend — Aim7 Aim8 radiation. heat absorb abundanceability their and to Topic2.1 Topicenthalpies— bond 5.3 Aims: • • H NMR,H 1 For . umbers of hydrogen atoms of umbers hydrogen in each environment specific MS fragments (section 28) specific fragments(section MS n and Integration traces should be covered but splitting patterns are not not are patterns traces Integration shouldsplitting but covered be H NMR data data (sectionNMR H 27) only the ability to deduce the number of ability the differentonly deduce to number the (proton) hydrogen relative the and environments isrequired. required. The data booklet data for(sectionThe absorptions contains characteristicIR 26), ranges 1 11.3 Spectroscopic identification organic compounds identification of Spectroscopic 11.3 •</p><p>76 Chemistry guide Topic 12: Atomic structure 2 hours . . ge Hadron Collider Hadron ge to our method of our to Higgsboson ” “ image atthe atomic level. D - Germer electron diffraction experiment. diffraction electron Germer 3 Werner or An electron as a can wave a behave Heisenberg. curricular links: curricular - — mindedness: - : Databases could be used for compiling graphs of trends in ionization energies energies in ionization trends of graphs for compiling be used could : Databases at CERN independently announced CERN at discoveredhad particlea they that with consistent predicted previously behaviour with the In 2012 two separate international separate two 2012 In working Lar the at teams itself, exposed “Whatis nature but observe nature we not questioning.” conditions. particledepending perception experimental the on sense give Can knowledge us world? objective the about a short too Brogliede have macroscopic The that equation shows pa rticles properties Is for it wavelength wave meaningfulobserved. their be to talk to of sense from perception? observed whichbe properties can never Electron microscopyhas led to many advancesinbiology, such as the ultrastructure ofcells and viruses. The scanningtunnelling microscope (STM)uses a stylus ofa single atomto scan a surface andprovide a Aim7 - Davisson the for are available and simulations pic— lattice15.1 enthalpy ms: Ai Syllabuscross and Utilization: Utilization: International • • • • • Topic— periodic3.2 trends Topic— ionic4.1 bonding To Theoryof knowledge: which are given in booklet given data the are in </p><p>𝑣𝑣 ℎ =</p><p>𝐸𝐸 emission spectra provide evidence for — emission(1.8) existenceprovide the levels. of spectra energy and ) h . ( 𝑣𝑣 ℎ levelsin atoms. =</p><p>𝐸𝐸 The quantized transitionsof The nature states molecules. energy is of energy the and to related in electrons atoms cience: s cessive ionization energy data for an element give information that shows that information give for data element an cessiveionization energy In an emission spectrum, the limit of convergence at higher frequency higher at emissionlimitan the In convergence of spectrum, correspondsenergy. first the to ionization in across firstTrends existence the ionizationperiods for energy account of levelsenergy submain and - Suc relationselectron to configurations. using Solvingproblems spectral from first data Calculationionizationenergy the of value the of frequency of or giveswavelength the limit. convergence the its from successive element energy Deduction ionization of an of group the data. across a energy Explanationfirstdiscontinuities ionization in and trends the of period. ofe valu The Planck’s constant formulaisUse of expected not calculations ionizationofRydberg the inenergy. sections2. and 1 12.1 Electrons in atoms atoms in Electrons 12.1 Natureof Experimentalevidence theories support to Understandings: • • • • • • • • • Applications and skills: Applications Guidance: Additional higher level structure Atomic 12: Topic Essential idea: Essential</p><p>Chemistry guide 77 Topic 13: The periodic table—the transition metals 4 hours nalysedusing redox a incompletesublevels.d curricular links: curricular - ments Zn, Cr follow not do Cu Zn, and therefore are and ments patterns these mindedness: - : The oxidation The : manganese,and offor states could example, vanadium be Economic: corrosion of iron. impact of the titrations. The properties and uses of the transition metals make them important and uses properties The them transition of make metals the factor ininternational major for the Mining commodities. precious a is metals countries. economiessome of for medical alchemical the symbols originate The female from male and for symbols What iron. copper and pseudoscienceof the has role alchemy science? of modern in played development the Aim6 investigatedTransition could metals experimentally. be Aim8 Utilization: Syllabuscrossand International • • • • Theoryof knowledge: actionsTopicre — redox 9.1 Topicof — oxidation10.2 hydrogenation alkenes alcohols, of A.3 — homogeneousOption catalysis heterogeneous and Aims: with electrons are - in terms of in unpaired terms not form ions form not do es , form complex ions form with , it 2 when the s the when 2 of+ states bond within a complexion. withinbond a state block.(3.1) - coordinate ransition elements follow certain patterns of behaviour. The ele The followelements — t ransition certain behaviour. of patterns rowd transitionas element orbitals. of the magnetic properties in properties transition metals magnetic the of block elements elements block - The transition elements have characteristicall transitiontheir to related The have are having elements these properties; properties not considered to be a to considered not rowd - duction of the total charge given the formulaof the ligandsand given ductionion the ofpresent. charge total the ligands, have coloured compounds, and display catalytic and magnetic ligands,magnetic and coloured displayand compounds, have catalytic properties. electrons. Transition elements have variable Transitionhave elements oxidation Zn is Transitionshow elements oxidationan variable form Explanationoxidation statestransition of to ability metals the of successive from ionization energies. Explanationthe of nature the of De Explanation oxidation Common ionsnumbers of listed inmetal data are the transition the booklet14. and 9 in sections removed. removed. incompleted - Essential idea: Essential Guidance: Applications and skills: Applications 13.1 First 13.1 of science: Nature forLookingdiscrepanciesand trends first consideredin anomalous the - Understandings: • • • • • • • • metals transition table—the periodic The 13: Topic Additional higher level</p><p>78 Chemistry guide Topic 13: The periodic table—the transition metals sin orbitals. orbitals. orbital spectrometer datalogger. spectrometer curricular links: curricular - Cu could Cu investigated. be The colours The : of Co, of ions,Fe, range a such elements Cr, complexof as Complex: ions investigatedbe could using a concentration The : toxicof ionscarefully be to metal needs transition Aim6 Niand Aim7 Aim8 in systems. environmental monitored levels in a complex ion. The electric field of ligands may cause levelselectricd - the The in complexmay a ion. field ligands of Utilization: Syllabuscross and • • • Topicof— electron2.2 ionsconfiguration and atoms Aims: through the use of models and theories based on how electrons are distributed use the ofare based inelectrons how on d - theories and models through itals in in itals orb transitionion metal ingspectrochemical the colourobserved. orbitals. two sets of orbitals of different energy in complexa sets energy different of orbitals of two block elements are coloured, as light is absorbed when an coloured, when as isblockare elements light absorbed he colour— t he complexesof metal can transition explainedbe orbitals have the sameorbitals the inenergy have split isolated an but sub - intoatom, two - e not expected to recall the colour of specific complex ions. complex specificrecallof expected not e colour the to colour linked to symmetry can exploredbe — colourin linked sciences,(4.1) symmetry the to arts. the and architecture, d level splits into idea: The d subd - The Complexesof d - d - electronis the excited between colourthe to isabsorbedThe complementary of oxidation Explanationidentity of of ion, the number metal effect the the the of identity ofthe and metal the ligand the colour the on of complexes. of Explanationligandssplitting the on ofd - the effect the different of us colour transitioncomplexesobserved metal and series. spectrochemical inThe booklet sectiongiven data the is list of series in A15. booklet data the ligands16. t ate polyden in in sectiongiven is Studentsar ion. Essential Essential complex ions to split so that the energy of corresponds complexsoelectronan of energy photon a ionsthe to transitionthat them split light. to visible between Applications and sk ills: Applications 13.2 Coloured complexes complexes Coloured 13.2 of science: Nature theories and Models (1.10) Transdisciplinary Understandings: • • • • • • • Guidance:</p><p>Chemistry guide 79 Topic 13: The periodic table—the transition metals orbitalsin an d of the 3 - ofthe Only the splitting the Only octahedral crystal field is required. The relation between the colour observed and absorbed isabsorbed and relationcolour the between observed The the illustrated by sectioncolourwheel in in booklet data the 17. their and splittingknow different the Studentsexpected not patterns are to relationcoordination the to number. 13.2 Coloured complexes complexes Coloured 13.2 • •</p><p>80 Chemistry guide Topic 14: Chemical bonding and structure 7 hours ng explanatory power, for power, explanatory ng izi Whatasdone we globala h ave structure. structure . heory, resonance and structures, t heory, VSEPR dot) (electron linksmolecule’s a to and links to a molecule’s linksand a to curricular links: curricular - mindedness: - How has ozone depletiontime? has How ozone changed over extent what is depletion To of ozone example an failuresuccessa a and both concern? forinternationalsolving environmental an bonding can Covalent describedbe orbital molecular nce vale or bond using To extent of what is ways theory. alternative having describing same the or strength a a phenomena weakness? action Drug and science Vision community to reduce ozonereduce to community depletion? labuscrossand Theoryof knowledge: International • • • • • Syl Utilization: Topics— Lewis4.3 and 4.2 bond and molecular polaritymolecular and bond Topic— shapes10.1 organic of molecules Topic— transition13.1 chemistry metal </p><p>) is ) σ bonding structures to structure alone. structure FC = (Number of (Number valence = FC (electron dot) (electron (Number of (Number non - - depth explanations of bonding systems often require more sophisticated explanations depth oftenconcepts more require bonding of theoriesand systems bonding. of (electron dot) (electron charge an atom if atom wouldan charge have atoms all ance structure is Aresonance ofone structure or two structuresfor ion moleculea that or end overlapend of orbitals, atomic in resulting - to ndingand structure on/end - bonding theories have been modified over time. Newer theories astime. bondingmodifiedbeen simple theories have remain to over need as possible maxim while (electron dot) (electron — Larger structures and more instructures - Larger more and ion involves electronsinvolves by/betweenshared all in are ionthat a atoms ½(Number of ½(Number bon ding electrons) structure with the atoms having FC FC having valueswith structure atoms the dot) Lewis The . (electron - ) is formed by the sideways overlap of sideways the is overlap orbitals, by ) atomic in formed resulting π ( expandedoctets. electron density concentrated between the nuclei of the bonding atoms. A pi nuclei the between atoms. electrondensity concentrated bonding the of bond electrons) is closestpreferred. zero to electrons) in the molecule had the same electronegativity. electronegativity. inmolecule the same the had Covalent bonds result from the overlap of bondsA ( bond sigma overlap the orbitals. result Covalent atomic from can structure (FC) charge used be Formal dot) decide to Lewis which (electron The is several. FC from the is preferred Exceptionsspecies octet the to incompleteinclude rule some octets having and Delocalizat Lewis more Resonance or usinginvolves two molecule or ion as opposed to being localized between a pair ofionbeing pair a moleculebetween aslocalized or opposed atoms. to particulara ion. molecule represent or alternative Lewis more cannotfullywith describedLewisbe one formed by the direct the head - by formed electron density above and belowand plane electronthe ofof density above bondingnuclei the the atoms. Further aspects ofbo covalent Further Essential idea: Essential 14.1 14.1 of science: Nature razor Occam’s of Principle idea the (2.7) example formalcharge. of Understandings: • • • • • Additional higher level bonding and structure Chemical 14: Topic</p><p>Chemistry guide 81 Topic 14: Chemical bonding and structure structures predicted by predicted by structures heory. : Globalof : impact depletion. ozone simulations Computer : can usedbe model to ethical, : economicimplications environmental and Moral, social, of VSEPR t VSEPR Aim1 Aim7 Aim8 depletion ozone itsand solution. Aims: • • • . sshould be ) and pi (π) bonds. piand (π) ) σ structures. ndingand structure ) or pi (π) bonds are formed from the linear the from )formed bonds pi are (π) or . x σ to ascertain which Lewis (electron dot) structure is structure which dot) ascertain to preferred Lewis (electron whether sigma ( sigma whether d by CFCs and NO and CFCs by d covered in context the ( covered offormation of sigma the Prediction structures of dot) Deduction of molecules (electron showingLewis ions and the forallsix to up atom. pairs valence eachelectrons on electron Application FC of different from dot) Lewis (electron and of geometry molecular electron the Deduction domain using theory VSEPR with fiveassociated and domains anglesbond sixand geometry electron ozone. and ofoxygen dissociate to Explanationrequired light wavelength the of of Descriptioncatalysis the when depletion mechanism the of ozone of cata lyse form linear orbitals combination The orbital ofmolecular to atomic fivepolarities Molecular correspondingsix and to geometries of electron should domains covered. also be combinationof orbitals. atomic Further aspects ofbo covalent Further 14.1 14.1 and skills: Applications • • • • • • • • Guidance:</p><p>82 Chemistry guide Topic 14: Chemical bonding and structure ave the same mean energy as energy same the mean ave as Quantum mechanics Quantum several involves curricular links: curricular - (electron dot) structures, resonance VSEPR and bond and t heory, dot) (electron r simulations r Compute : orbitals. could hybrid usedbe model to Hybridization is a mathematical device which allows us to relate the bonding isthe relate in Hybridization mathematicala allows us device which to natural the Whatmoleculea isits to relationship the symmetry. between Which play doessciences, world? natural the and symmetry mathematics role inknareasof different the owledge? Aim7 Utilization: Syllabuscross and Theoryof knowledge: • • Topic— Lewis4.3 polarity molecular Topic— shapes10.1 organic of molecules Topic— transition13.1 chemistry metal Aims: (electron dot) (electron and sp hybridization. 2 , sp, 3 and sp hybrid orbitals in methane, in orbitals methane, spand hybrid 2 , sp , 3 results from the from resultsof mixingtypes on of orbitals atomic different Hybridization results from the mixing of atomic orbitals to form the same number of number orbitals same the equivalent new hybrid canform that mixing the orbitalsHybridization h atomic offrom results to idea: A hybrid orbital Ahybrid Explanationofformation sp the of Identificationexplanationand of Lewis relationships the between Studentsspeciesconsider only need with sp the same atom. same the geometries molecular typesand structures,electron of domains, hybridization. ethene and ethyne. and ethene the contributing the orbitals. atomic Essential Essential Applications: Applications: Guidance: 14.2 Hybridization Hybridization 14.2 of science: Nature theories regard to need can The ashelp in uncertain valence — hybridization theory bond explaingeometries, limited. is but molecular depending on theoriesphenomena, explaining (2.2) specific same the requirements. Understandings: • • • •</p><p>Chemistry guide 83 Topic 15: Energetics/thermochemistry 7 hours emperatures, emperatures, Usedatabases of carbon cycle,— carbon electronKrebs the transfer cycle in and curricular links: curricular - mindedness: mindedness: - Use of data loggers to record temperature changes. temperature Use of record loggers data to : Discuss: accepted sourcevalues useand idea of this critique to the A: possible of enthalpy is the experiment calculate to either : on: stoichiometric relationships — stoichiometric 1.3 and 1.2 im7 s biology. The importance of which something of obtain importance to measurements beingThe able Borehole directly cannott measured be iseverywhere. significant cycles energy Other Aim4 experiments. Aim6 cubea icecapacity ofheat the ofcrystallizationor is when water of water water. hot to added A snow cover depth, glacierprecipitation and depth, snowcover recession,evaporation of rates Whyindirect some cycles among indicatorsglobal of itare is warming. global combat to forproblems likecountries important collaborate to global warming? source to accepted values. Syllabuscrossand Utilizati International • • • • • Topic ionicand atomic Topic— ionization3.2 radii energy, Topicenthalpy— bond 5.3 Aims: cycles.</p><p> energy cycles for— energy allow calculation the directly. (3.2) values cannotof that determined be forenthalpy/energy of ce,covalent bond andsolution. Haber orHaber dissolution energy Clin water. 4 (aq))can be used + M  (g) + M eg Haber Haber oxidescyclesfor2 and chlorides.1 and group The conceptThe of energy change the in a single step reaction being equivalent summation the to of steps smaller can be applied changes to involving ionic latticeenthalpies so 18), enthalpies (section lutions aqueous of ng effect of some ions large ly in effectng some some of producing covalent character cience: : idea izi s hydration,ionization, atomization, electron affinity,latti Representative equations ( in related an are latticeofand Enthalpy enthalpy solution, hydration enthalpy cycle. energy Construction- Born of lattice cycles Constructionhydration, solution and energy from of For enthalpy. or NH NaOH dissolution example solid of changesCalculation - Born from enthalpy of enthalpies. latticehydration and to Relate size ions ofcharge and lab which reactionsexperiments Perform includesinglecould in replacement aqueoussolutions. Polar assessed.ionicsubstancesbe not will terms should ionization, following atomization, The covered: be enthalpy/energy solutionand hydration bond, . electronlattice,covalent affinity, Value for (sectioninenthalpies and given data (sectionthe 19) are hydration of 20) booklet. Essential Essential compounds. Applications and skills: Applications Guidance: 15.1 Energy cycles Energy 15.1 Natureof with replicatesreliability quantitativemeasurements Making ensure to Understandings: • • • • • • • • • • Topic 15: Energetics/thermochemistry 15: Topic Additional higher level</p><p>84 Chemistry guide Topic 15: Energetics/thermochemistry f spontaneous direction o direction earch hypothetical reactions capablereactions hypothetical earch as the secondofaslaw thermodynamics. the : Use: of databases s re to 7 aw curricular links: curricular - and mindedness: 4 - , Experimentsinvestigating processes exothermic and endothermic could : — qualityof energy Sustainable energy is a UN initiative with a goal of doubling of Sustainableis withglobal goalinitiative a doubling UN of a energy sustainable2030. resources by energy are is technicalimportant a Entropy which How has meaning. precise a term ofareas suchin knowledge? different technical terms Aims1 freeofenergy. generating Aim6 to scompare to reliability numerou times compare and data run be repetitive of theoreticalvalues. Utilization: Syllabuscross and International • • • • Theoryof knowledge: Hess’s L Topic— Hess’s 5.2 Topicenthalpy— bond 5.3 Topic— equilibrium7.1 C.1 Option PhysicsB.2 — thermodynamics option Aims: . ) Sº values( ), and absoluteand ), ΔS let. standard entropy standard the higher the entropy. the higher the affect ΔG. ), change in ), ( entropy ) from given given from ) ΔH incalculationand predicting of spontaneity </p><p>ΔS ° 𝑆𝑆 ∆ 𝑇𝑇 −</p><p>° 𝐻𝐻 ∆ ) relates can that ) obtainedbe energy the chemical a from </p><p>G = ° . 𝐺𝐺 to position of equilibrium. position to of ) ∆ T ( A reaction is spontaneous if the overall transformation leads to an increase in total entropy (system plus surroundings). The (system entropy inincrease total an to transformation leads overall the if spontaneous is A reaction ) refers to the distribution of available energy among the particles. the ) among refersavailabledistribution of the to energy S cience: idea: s is taketo change convenienta way directthe into both entropy account ionsand skills: reaction to the change in enthalpy ( reactionchange the to in enthalpy temperature various conditions temperatureand will various that affect enthalpy of this. Entropy ( Entropy ( Gibbsfree energy of conditions. same Entropy gas>liquid>solid under decrease will ininor Prediction increase change an a entropy result whether of considering by reactants products.and states the the of Calculation ofchanges ( entropy Application of Relationof ΔG reaction Examinevarious conditions that ΔG transformation the from indirectresulting chemicals,of entropy the and the changesurroundingsof energy. heat as resulta gain/loss the of the of is data Thermodynamic in given section of12 book data the The more ways the energy can ways more energy the The distributedbe Essential Essential change always increases the total entropy of available changeexpense isthe at always increases totaluniverse the entropy This energy of knownwork. useful do to the Guidance: Applicat 15.2Entropy and spontaneity Natureof years the Theoriescan assuperseded be through resulta idea (2.2) — the has of of in evolved statistics probability. and developments entropy Understandings: • • • • • • • • • •</p><p>Chemistry guide 85 Topic 16: Chemical kinetics ic Sulfur 6 hours . ic acid. ic sulfur equations molecule collisions collisions molecule 2 N 1 and S and 1 N especially S especially curricular links: curricular - on closely mirrored a country’s a economic health mirrored for longa time. closely on mindedness: - killinginhibitors. agents and Databases, data loggers and other ICT applications Databases,ICT loggers data other and can usedbe to - : ng explanatory power.low probabilityexplanatory ng of The three nt to the slowest step reaction. the isof slowest equivalethe to nt izi acidproducti indicators Whatof current health? some country’sa economic are The first catalyst used in industry was for productionfirst the of The industry used in catalyst Whatindirect Reactioncan by supported be evidence. mechanism is of role the certainempiricalbe evidence in in science? scien tifictheories?ever we Can researchis Cancer identifyingfor all mechanisms; carcinogens asas about well cancer Aim7 research proposed mechanisms for lab work performed and to carry out out andfor researchmechanisms proposed lab performed virtual carry work to investigate to experiments factors which influence rate Theoryof knowledge: Utilization: Utilization: International • • • • Syllabuscross and Option A.3 — catalystsOption Biologytopic — enzymes 8.1 acting as catalysts Aims: Topic— organic20.1 mechanisms equation rst withactivation lower affected by temperature and itsand units temperature affectedare by is ing graphical representations for zero, fi forzero, inggraphical representations ) k ningstep. . The order of The . nature fractional canor integer either be in newer theoriesremain to need maxim newer as aspossible simple while determi — : s a linear chain of possible empiricallysuch expressions and theseRate linear of particular limit In chain mechanisms. can cases, a s be determined only a reaction idea: science energy. eactions may occur by occur stepR eactions one by than sloweststep the and more determines may step/RDS). of determining rate the reaction (rate ofof ste molecularity isp The elementary an reactant number the particles takingin step. that part of order reactiona The of particles respectnumber the reactant, a reactionto a can describe, with taking- in rate the part experimentally. equations Rate can determined be only of ( value constant The rate the introducing Catalystsreactiona alter mechanism, step a and data experimental from Deductionforof equationan expression rate the expression. rate the solving involving problems lysSketching,identifying,ana and Evaluationconsistentbe of to mechanisms with kinetic reaction proposed and stoichiometricdata. determined from the the from of overalldetermined order reaction. the reactions.second and order elementary reactions, no equilibria and only one significant activation barrier, the rate rate the reactions, activation elementary equilibriano barrier, significant one only and Essential Essential 16.1 Rate expression and reaction expression and mechanism Rate 16.1 Natureof razor Occam’s of Principle likely. stepwise (2.7) means more reaction are mechanisms Understandings: • • • • • • • • • Applications and skills: Applications kinetics Chemical 16: Topic Additional higher level</p><p>86 Chemistry guide Topic 16: Chemical kinetics stepshowingreactions; the - . profile determiningstep. determiningstep stepis should first the not be determiningstep in the - inrate the a considered. ers withers values. whole ord number to Calculations limited be will – concentrationConsiderconcentration rate and graphs. – time illustratemulti level Useprofiles potential to energy - in rate t he involved Catalysts are - Reactionsrate the where concentrations which experiment allowsstudents see to Any effect the vary to equation rate a henceand is determine rate the upon appropriate. higher E higher 16.1 Rate expression and reaction expression and mechanism Rate 16.1 Guidance: • • • • • •</p><p>Chemistry guide 87 Topic 16: Chemical kinetics data data canbe ain the effect of temperature aineffect the temperature of hypothesis of enzymes and the the and enzymes hypothesisof to expl to lockkey” and Useof effect study to experiments virtual simulationsand of curricular links: curricular : - 7 and Experiments could include those involving the collection of temperature Experimentscould include thosetemperature of collection the involving and frequencyvalues. factor and : Graphing: easily to calculators input ana lyse and can employed be a for E The flashing light of fireflies is produced by a chemicala flashing involving The by producedprocess firefliesis of light enzymes. relatio nshipThe “ the between Arrheniusequation. Aims4 stericand factors temperature of rates on reaction. Aim6 for readingsdata obtain to graph. a sufficient Aim 7 Utilization: Utilization: • • • • • Syllabuscross and Topic— collision6.1 theory Aims: emperature of a reaction has a much greater of ofgreater effectrate much a reaction reactiona than has the on emperature . 𝐴𝐴 ln +</p><p>𝑎𝑎 𝐸𝐸 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 −</p><p>=</p><p>𝑘𝑘 and intercept,and — changingt the ln</p><p>/ R / a E – theories ) takes intotakes account ) the expression A stepreactions showing in RDS the - . 𝑎𝑎 𝐸𝐸 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 − 𝑒𝑒</p><p> colliding. 𝐴𝐴 is given in the data booklet. data isin given the </p><p>� 1 = 1 𝑇𝑇 − exponential factor) ( 2 1 is a lineara plot with gradient is 𝑇𝑇 � k 𝑎𝑎 𝑅𝑅 𝐸𝐸</p><p>= 1 2 𝑘𝑘 𝑘𝑘 . 𝐴𝐴 ln againstln ln +</p><p>The activation energy of the reactionon activationfrom rate. reactiona The energy effect can of determined be temperature 1/T 𝑎𝑎 𝐸𝐸 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 −</p><p> ing graphical representation of the Arrhenius equation in its linear form form in linearits ofing graphical Arrhenius the equation representation </p><p> cience: s its effect on collision rates. This resulted in the development of Arrhenius the development byresulted in collisionon proposes itsequation This the rates. which quantitativemodel a effect =</p><p>. 𝑘𝑘 A The expression The ln The Arrhenius equation uses the temperature dependence Arrhenius equationtemperature the The uses of constant rate the activation the energy. determine to of Agraph frequency - factorThe pre (or Ana lys ln Using 𝑘𝑘 Arrhenius the equation and Describingtemperature ratebetween frequencyconstant;relationships the of factormoleculescomplexity and frequencyand Determiningfactorsevaluating and values of energy activation data. from level diagrams illustrate multi to Useenergy sources Considerdata various inlinear the using frequency of collisions with proper orientations. frequencycollisionsof with proper the diagram. the Essential idea: Essential 16.2 Activation energy energy 16.2 Activation Natureof falsified Theoriescan or supported be new replacedand by explained change(2.5) reactionon rate. Understandings: • • • • • • • • • Guidance: Applications and skills: Applications</p><p>88 Chemistry guide Topic 17: Equilibrium Isthis 4 hours chemical chemical the equation. What . dependstemperature the on curricular links: curricular - sp because we create mathematics to mirror reality or because or becausereality mathematicscreate we is reality the mirror to intrinsically mathematical? The equilibrium law can be deduced by assuming that the order of equilibrium law The can assuming order forward the the deducedbe that by backwardand inreaction coefficients the matches systems. equilibrium Wecansuccessfully model to use mathematics problems insoMany assumptions be when only science lved are can made Whatsolving? in problem which mathematics. simplifythe intuition of role the is in dynamic equilibrium can concept appliedbe The closedof system a to a sciences. of range h uman and in biological, systems the environmental isin science? deductive of role reasoning the Utilization: Syllabuscrossand Theoryof knowledge: • • • • Options— bufferB.7 D.4 and calculations Topic— stoichiometricequations 1.3 Topic— equilibrium7.1 Topic— weak18.2 acid equilibria base and A.10 — K Option . c K . 𝐾𝐾 ln</p><p>𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 −</p><p>=</p><p> be explained the be by 𝐺𝐺 ∆</p><p>. 𝐾𝐾 ln</p><p>𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 −</p><p>=</p><p>𝐺𝐺 . . ∆ is given in the data booklet data isin in sectiongiven the 1. rinciple to be applied. (1.8, 1.9) (1.8, rincipleapplied. be to 𝐾𝐾 𝐾𝐾 ln</p><p> ln</p><p> and the equilibrium the and constant. 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 − G − 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅</p><p> telier’s p telier’s ∆ â = =</p><p>𝐺𝐺 Ch 𝐺𝐺 ∆</p><p>∆</p><p> rinciple forin canchanges concentration rinciple : The forThe equilibrium the law.constant The particular a positionof by reactioncan onlyquantified be equilibrium telier’s p telier’s idea: science â Ch Le position corresponds The maximum a valueto equilibrium of a and of entropy inof value the Gibbs the minimum free energy. constant change Gibbs canof free The energy reactiona equilibrium the and thesure usedbe both mea positionrelated to reaction are and equilibrium an of equation, the by Solutionusing equilibrium problems expression the homogeneous forof Relationship between Calculationsequation the using expression The expression the Studentsderive to expected be not will use ofThe quadraticwill equations assessed. be not equilibriumlaw. Essential Essential Applications and skills: Applications 17.1 The equilibrium law The 17.1 equilibrium Natureof quantitativereasoning stoichiometric the Employing backwardand determinedreactions — experimentally expressionsfrom forward can rate deducedbe fordirectly equationsallowand Le Understandings: • • • • • • • • • Guidance: Additional higher level Topic 17: Equilibrium 17: Topic</p><p>Chemistry guide 89 Topic 17: Equilibrium esterification reaction and other other and esterificationreaction The equilibrium constant The foran concept The with computer of equilibrium can illustrated be dynamic a : : Aim6 reactionsinvestigated. experimentally be could Aim7 animations. Aims: • • 17.1 The equilibrium law The 17.1 equilibrium </p><p>90 Chemistry guide Topic 18: Acids and bases base 10 hours 10 For example, do we judge we do example, For of people from different offrom parts people curricular links: curricular - mindedness: - metal complexes Transition metal couldexplored. experimentally be Animationscan usedbe distinguish to different the between – acid : : base theory has developed from the ideas the has from developed basetheory – theories. Acid ofcollaboration competition.both and through world the phenomenon can same exploredbe The from sometimes different perspectives,different explainedand by theories. Aim6 Aim7 theories by their universality, their elegance? theoriescompeting by or simplicity Theoryof knowledge: Utilization: Syllabuscrossand International • • • • covalent molecules and Lewis dot diagrams molecules TopicsLewisand — covalent 4.3 and 4.2 diagrams dot Topic— transition13.2 complexes metal Topic— nucleophiles20.1 Aims: involve proton transfer. proton involve base theories can considering extendedbe field lone wider a to pairs by applications electrons.of of basetheories – — acid Lowry and Lewisand Lowry acids basesshould and be base theory to inorganic to to organicand chemistry theory base – acid base concept can be extended to reactions to basecan not do concept extendedthat be ’ The acid The – cience: fyof role the species. reacting the s identi A Lewis acid is a lone pair acceptor and a Lewis base is a lone Lewisd onor. a pair and ALewis lonebase isacceptor a pair acid is a Whenformed. isbond Lewisa base coordinatea Lewis reactsa acid with Anucleophile electrophilean and is acid. base Lewis a Lewis is a ApplicationLewis of Bothorganic inorganicshouldand studied. examples be Relations– Brønsted between discussed. Essential idea: Essential Guidance: 18.1 Lewis acids and bases Lewis 18.1 and acids Natureof theories Theoriescannew falsifiedreplaced supported, be by or extends but – Lowry doesn'tit. falsify (2.5) LewisBrønsted theory Understandings: • • • • • • Applications and skills: Applications Additional higher level bases and Acids 18: Topic</p><p>Chemistry guide 91 Topic 18: Acids and bases aking assumptions about relative the concentrations basepairs curricular links: curricular - mindedness: - The properties The weakand of acids could strong investigated be : Mathematics is a universal language. The mathematical nature of The this Mathematicsmathematicallanguage. is nature topic universala languages native communicate to helpsmore speakingdifferent chemists objectively. Aim6 experimentally. International • • Utilization: Syllabuscrossand Topicacid te — conjuga 8.1 – Topicconcept pH — the 8.3 Topicweakand — strong 8.4 acids bases and Options— buffersB.7 D.4 and Aims: b , a K p , p K , a B.7 and and K b s b K , K , a K , p , ) and a weakand a ) a a K , K , equilibrium law allows strengths of acids and bases to be determined and equilibrium structure. lawmolecular their to allowsstrengthsrelated determined be of to acids bases and base reactions. problems Numerical can be simplified by m , pOH, ), and between between and ), a K log - (aq)], pH (aq)], = – . a w K p = K = pplication of the pplicationthe of b is ( is K a — a × K (aq)], [OH (aq)], a p + K [H and a K ). involving the the involving assessed.will transferproton one of be b depends on the temperature. dependstemperature. the on w The equilibrium lawThe can be applied to acid – . K b log K . - ) b = cience: K b idea: s K . p and p K and b b K K p base( and D.4. and The expression forThe dissociation the constant weak( a of acid acid conjugate a base For pair, relationship The between Solutioninvolving problems of strengths Discussionof values of using acids relative bases the and of value The solutions assessedbe calculation in The inoption of only willbuffer pH examples Only K298 than can assessed.Calculationsbe other temperatures at pH of Studentsused stateapproximations should when in are equilibrium calculations. use ofThe quadraticwill equations d. assesse be not is ( is Essential Essential of the species involved. The use is logarithms ofThe ofsignificant also involved. species the here. 18.2 Calculations involving acids and and involving bases acids Calculations 18.2 Natureof Obtainingevidence for scientific theories (1.9) Understandings: • • • • • • • • • • • Guidance: Applications and skills: Applications</p><p>92 Chemistry guide Topic 18: Acids and bases ves, determination ves, of titrations ofindicator. an a curricular links: curricular - of a weak acid, preparation and investigation of a buffer investigationand solution and ofa of preparation weak a acid, Whatofunusual featuresthe Students are curve? mathematical pH a Experimentscould cur pH includeof investigation Data logging, Data databases, spreadsheets simulationscanand used.be all a tric/conductiometric thermome : : — — the p K the the determination of determination the p K the Is a pH curve an accurate description of reality or an artificialan accuratean or description Iscurve pH a representation? reality of Doesof sciencerepresentation a offer reality? Aim6 Aim7 For example, the equivalence the example, usingFor po int by conductivitya could determined be temperaturea probe. or probe Theoryof knowledge: Utilization: Syllabuscross and • • • shouldusingwith use the familiar logsofalso Arrhenius the when be natural expressionintopic 16.2 Aims: Topic5.1 Topic16.2 of development in pH meter technology hasof reliable measurement ready and for in meter allowedpH more — development tion ofweaka acid/base iza pH against volume for involving titrations volume against pH base buffer always remains the same, buffer basesame, buffer the always remains and bases. and value. value. a K /base. d aci pH curves can be investigated experimentally are but mathematically determined by the dissociation constants of acid the and base. An indicator with an base result in little or no changeno in or pH. baselittle result in cience: idea: s strong and weak acids and bases with an explanation of their important weakand strong important acids with explanationtheir an bases of and features. The characteristics of the pH curves produced by the different the characteristics The by produced combinations curves pH the of of components the weakAnacid acid weakindicatora base or a where – base is different acid have conjugate colours.the – base pair relationship of The range pH the which acidbetween an indicator, a is – base p weakacid, its an d region the represents small bufferadditions curve The pH the where on region of or acid composition ofThe actionand solution. buffer a shapes general The of of graphs equivalence the Selectionpoint for indicator titration,a given appropriate an of indicaofof titrationpoint end the the and the tor. Whileof nature the – acid the solutionsby mixing either canweak a acid/base prepared be with solutiona of partial neutral by salta or conjugate, containing its by different formed the Predictionof pH salt relative the of aqueous solutions combinationsweakand strong of acid base.and strong and weakand strong acid s with strong a (3.7) . Essential Essential equivalence the pointend can appropriate usedbe determine to point reaction. the of Applications and skills: Applications 18.3 pH curves curves pH 18.3 Natureof of Increased power advancesand techniques in instrumentation available pH Understandings: • • • • • • • • •</p><p>Chemistry guide 93 Topic 18: Acids and bases Important Important (aq) - required. OH (aq) - (aq) + =pOH. + b B K (aq) + In + (aq) + Colour B Colour H</p><p>= pH or p or pH = axis B Colour a K p</p><p>± 1. ± a K Colour A Colour interceptwith pH equivalencepoint bufferregion points where HIn(aq) colour changeThe a can consideredbe of range takeover to place p BOH(aq) Only examples the involving Only assessed.will transferproton one of be featuresare: – – – – indicatoran which For is acid: weak a – – indicatoran which For is base: weak a – Examplesinlisted in bookletindicators sectiondata of are the 22. four the from weakpossibleand acidsformed Saltscombinations strong of and basesCalculations considered. required. not should are be acidity transitionThe inions of topic covered metal is The hydrated 13. of hydrated ions other metal treatment is not </p><p>18.3 pH curves curves pH 18.3 Guidance: • • • • • • Colour A A Colour </p><p>94 Chemistry guide Topic 19: Redox processes 6 hours nsider the environmental and ethical Many electrochemical cells canact as energy sources alleviating the world’s energy problems but some cells such as super-efficient microbial fuel cells (MFCs) (also termed biological fuel cells) can contribute to clean-up of the environment. How do nationalgovernments and the international community decide on research priorities for funding purposes? The SHE is an of an example Wouldarbitrary reference. our scientific be knowledge the same if different chose we references? Electroplating. Electrochemical in dentistry. processes Rusting of metals. Theory of knowledge: of knowledge: Theory Utilization: Syllabus and cross-curricular links: Topics 1.2 and 1.3—problemsinvolving Avogadro’s constant,amount of substance and the ideal gas equation processesTopic 9.1—redox International-mindedness: • • • • • . ) Eº of the SHE is º E</p><p> or 100 kPa for gases. -3 is negative indicativespontaneous of a º) is the potential (voltage) of º E G  is positive indicative of a non-spontaneous </p><p>º is 0.</p><p>G º  G  hydrogen ion and hydrogen gas at 100 kPa and hydrogen ion and gas at 298 -3 is positive, º is negative, is 0, then º º E E .When E ° Energy conversions between electrical and chemical energy lie at theelectrochemical core of cells. � � ���� ° reduction half-equation under standard conditions measured relative to the SHE. Solute concentration is 1 mol dm 0 V. process. Whenprocess. K. The standard electrode potential ( process. Whenprocess. A voltaic cell generates anelectromotive force (EMF) resulting in the movement of electrons from the anode (negative electrode) to the cathode (positive the cell potential ( is termed circuit. The EMF electrode) via the external The standard hydrogen electrode(SHE) consists electrode of an inert platinum in contact with 1 moldm When aqueous solutions are electrolysed, can bewater oxidized to oxygen at the anode and reduced to hydrogen at the cathode. �� of electrolysisCurrent, duration and charge on the ion affect the amount of product formed at the electrodes during electrolysis. Electroplating involves the electrolytic coating of an object a metallic thinwith layer. Additional higher level Redox processes 19: Topic</p><p>Essential idea: 19.1 Electrochemical cells Nature of science: Employing quantitative reasoning—electrode potentials and the standard hydrogen electrode. (3.1) Collaboration and ethical implications—scientists on electrochemical have collaborated to work cell technologies and have to co implications of(4.5) using fuel cells and microbial cells. Understandings: • • • • • •</p><p>Chemistry guide 95 Topic 19: Redox processes up. up water treatment. water freewaste - They can clean assist - inThey environmental in cost in spontaneity of a reactionspontaneity of a Biologicalfuelelectrical electricalproduce power to can cells energy : — devices,factorieshouses, etc. Aim8 Microbial fuel cells (MFCs) powered by powered by Microbialin microbes fuel sewage cells can clean(MFCs) result sewagewhich may Topic15.2 equation — Nernst C.6 Option and protection; waste Biologytreatment option microbialB.3 — environmental fuel cells Aims: • er using er Explanations values. o E ate etc) and wat and etc) ate f ) using ) electrode standard o G ∆ products formed during electrolytic is given in the data booklet in sectionisin in booklet given data the 2. 1 - energy changesenergy ( should be understood. be should values, nature of ofelectrode the concentration and values,nature the º E is given in the data booklet in section isin in booklet given data the 1. ° ” series in cells “ − 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛</p><p> rochemical cells cells rochemical = ° 𝐺𝐺 Calculation of cell potentials usingCalculationelectrode standard cell potentials. of potentials Predictionreactiona spontaneous isusing not whether of or - Determinationfree standard of Explanationof the products formed duringthe electrolysis of aqueoussolutions. reactions lab could that in experiments Perform include single replacement aqueoussolutions. of amounts Determinationof relative the electroplating. Explanationof process the of should in include electrolysis the theory Electrolytic covered of processes be to sul chloride, aqueouscopper(II) solutions sodium (eg ∆ constant mol C 500 96 Faraday’s = term The processes. graphite or platinum inert both electrodes electrodes. copper and shouldrefer to electrolyte. potentials. Guidance: 19.1 Elect 19.1 and skills: Applications • • • • • • • • • • •</p><p>96 Chemistry guide Topic 20: Organic chemistry ecular 12 hours 12 Reaction mechanisms vary Reaction vary mechanisms new compounds with compounds novel new ize have considered have ethical the and s a vital role in drug design in role uptake drug in sdrug and medicine vital a curricular links: curricular dimensionalusing compounds visualization organic mol of - - mindedness: - Three : What sustainableand organic to green chemistry, in does relation role chemistry, in play globala context? synthesis Organic play organic Nutrition,sciencealsofood by underpinned biotechnology and are chemistry. Aim6 could models covered. be and biochemistry. and Utilization: Utilization: Syllabuscrossand International • • • • Topics— organic10.2 and 10.1 chemistry Topic— covalen14.1 bonding t Topic— hybridization 14.2 A.5 A.9and Option — polymers Aims: 1 2, 2, N N 2 N inversion 1 and for N 1 involves a involves 1 N occur for secondary occur polar solventsS and polar [halogenoalkane]. For S [halogenoalkane].For non - k 1 reaction1 depends on only N ies that canelectron iesaccept pairs that 2 is stereospecific with an isstereospecific 2 N y understanding different types of organic reactions and their mechanisms, it is understanding synthes to different y possible mechanisms, organic their of and types reactions types of reactionplace. of types taking 2. Both 2. mechanisms scientists have collaborated to work on investigatingon and work to collaborated synthesis— scientists the have pathways new of — b N deficientspec 2 involves a concerted reaction with transitiona concerteda involves 2 reaction N bimolecular <a href="/tags/Substitution_reaction/" rel="tag">substitution reaction</a>. S substitution reaction. bimolecular Key organicKey reaction include types substitution substitution, addition, electrophilic nucleophilic electrophilic actions. and redox re [halogenoalkane][nucleophile].S cience: idea: s 1 represents a nucleophilica represents 1 S unimolecularand substitution reaction reactions2 best using conducted are aprotic, N N carbocationS intermediate. halogenoalkanes. state. rate = k = rate ofcarbon . the at configuration the concentration of the halogenoalkane, rate = concentration the = halogenoalkane, the rate of represents a nucleophilica represents primary halogenoalkanes primary it S is from a nucleophile.a from Lewis are acids. <a href="/tags/Electrophile/" rel="tag">Electrophiles</a> S halogenoalkanes tertiary predominantmechanism the For is S determining step rate (slow The in step) S an S Anelectrophile is- electron an reactionsbest usingsolvents. conducte are protic, d polar pertiesof .1) used which reactionnumber a fall (3 Organic in applications. types categories. several can different into be then Essential Essential and help in understanding the different helpand in understanding the 20.1 Types of organic reactions Types 20.1 Natureof forLookingdiscrepanciesand trends pro Collaborationethicaland implications (4.1, 4.5) implications chemistry. environmental adopting green of Understandings: NucleophilicSubstitution Reactions: • • • • • ElectrophilicReactions: Addition Additional higher level chemistry Organic 20: Topic</p><p>Chemistry guide 97 Topic 20 – Organic chemistry Core Core ctechniques), extractions.and separations A range of Arange experimentsexploring of syntheticvarious reactions organic : of of in reaction) example Synthesisan : laboratory the widelyuseda (or Aim6 of types interconversions functionalgroup could reactions done. be and couldtechniquesfiltration,chemistry include distillation, organic of reflux, purification (including chromatographi Aim6 or householda aspirin) drug fadingmedicine ctor (eg of (eg produ tomato ketchupreaction of — electrophilicbromine). addition • • 2 N 1 and S and 1 N and sodium sodium and reducecarboxylic to d acids) (use bonds around its ring. Each carbon to carbon bond of 1.5. Benzene is susceptible to attack by electrophiles. mechanisms. Explanation of how the rate depends theon rate Explanation the mechanisms. how identity of of the halogenoalkane the whether ishalogen leaving the (ie group), primary, theand tertiary or secondary choice solven t. of has a bond order borohydride. Markovnikov’s rule can be applied to predict the major product in Markovnikov’s predictcan to rule major the applied be electrophilicalkenes withofhydrogen reactions addition unsymmetrical product halidesofformation The interhalogens. and major can the be explainedstability of p ossible of in relative the carbocationsterms in the reactionmechanism. Benzene is the simplest aromatic hydrocarbon compound (or arene) and has a delocalized structure of π alcoholsCarboxylic acids can aldehyde). primary the to reduced be (via alcohols. Ketonescan agents secondary to reduced be are Typical reducing hydride lithiumaluminium water. Explanation is hydroxide nucleophile better than a why of reactions of substitution Deduction of of nucleophilic the mechanism the ha logenoalkanesaqueousin hydroxide S termssodium of with Outlineprotic of aproticand solvents. difference the between of Deductionreactions addition of electrophilic the alkenes of mechanism the halides. withhalogens/interhalogens hydrogen and ReductionReactions: and skills: Applications NucleophilicSubstitution Reactions: ElectrophilicReactions: Substitution 20.1 Types of organic reactions Types 20.1 • • • • • • • ElectrophilicReactions: Addition </p><p>98 Chemistry guide Topic 20: Organic chemistry uric f dimensional 1 reactions.1 stagereaction. N more precise suchmore details , - ashthree d hooks in hooks reaction mechanisms - - two a via containing compounds: aldehydescontaining compounds: ) and wedge ) phenylamine phenylamine + and + δ - δ d. ize as specific temperatures need not be included.be not need asspecific temperatures representationsbonds (using as tapered be shown should below) appropriate encouragedin where explaining reaction mechanisms. and ketones to primary and secondaryand alcohols ketonesand primary to carboxylicacidsand to aldehydes,using suitable reducing agents. shouldemphas be Deduction of the mechanism of the nitration (electrophilic substitution) of Deduction of nitration the (electrophilic mechanism the acidof mixture reactionsuland concentratedof (usingnitric a benzene Writingcarbonyl reduction of reactions of to Conversion nitrobenzene Referenceforrolytichete to fission S should made be fissiondifference shouldThe heterolyticand be homolytic between understood. difference fishand The arrows curly between - Useof charges ( partial known Typical(eg conditions of reagents and be should reactions all catalysts,reflux However et c.). reducing agents, acid). ReductionReactions: 20.1 Types of organic reactions Types 20.1 ElectrophilicReactions: Substitution • • • • • • • • Guidance:</p><p>Chemistry guide 99 Topic 20: Organic chemistry 1.3) What . up to a to up like( manner. Explore some - reverse compound a synthetic via om natural sources natural includeand om approach isapproach routes often synthetic indesign the used of synthesis and the ability to think in a in synthesisthink to ability the and curricular links: curricular - mindedness: - synthetic Multiple stage organic synthetic route series of experiments ( synthetic series Multiplestage route organic experiments of - : : retro re important to the to developed important re world. maximum of maximum four stages). t axol,capsaicin. mescaline and How important are products natural important How developing to countries? A compounds products Natural are isolated fr Aim6 specificproductsavailablecountries examplesin natural which of developing a roles the of are solutions finding imagination,to reasoningintuitionand in practicalproblems? Utilization: Utilization: International • • • • Syllabuscrossand Theoryof knowledge: Topics— organic10.2 and 10.1 chemistry Aims: topic Functional group interconversions are are Functionalinterconversions group step syntheticstarting the and given reagents routes step - Organic synthesisOrganic systematic the preparation is of a from a compound widely available starting materialsynthesis the or a of types can cover any of topicany reactionscan the sub inand 10 types cover - covered cience: synthesisof o rganic compounds. idea: s 20.1. The synthesis of an organic compound stems from a from stems synthesis readilycompound The organican available of starting seriesa via steps. of material discrete basis the suchsynthetic of routes. - Retro Deductionof multi than fourConversionswith more stages in syntheticassessed be not will routes. R eaction product(s). Essential Essential route that often that route seriesa can involve steps. different of Applications and skills: Applications Guidance: 20.2 Synthetic routes Synthetic 20.2 Natureof which Scientific— in- invokes synthetic of thinking the process chemist one retro design, is method organic the Understandings: • • • • •</p><p>100 Chemistry guide Topic 20: Organic chemistry - three important than than important aproxen. dimensions. Whatdimensions.similarities the differences and are Whichof ways connectknowing us indirect to allow two curricular links: curricular - mindedness: Can you think of any drugs or as thinkor drugs good serve medicinesyou of Can may which any - of the forscientist challengesthe the is artistrepresent the to and Have drugs and drugs countries asd Have administere medicinessome soldbeen in and instead with the racemates of desiredenantiomer associatedas therapeuticthe activity? forcasethis? studies indirect existence enceThe provide evid isomers for tetrahedrally a optical of atom. carbon bonded can Whatinvestigatedbe Stereoisomerism physicalmodels. by computer and ofareas other knowledge?is in models such of role the One dimensionalin world sources natural of chiral from Many are derived drugs include and the nicotine, t hyroxinedopamine, and n of role in The vision foodstereochemistry science science. and often perfumes,stereochemistry can many deemed be more In evidence to our theories? evidence our to Whatofis ways in approaches? different inthe two of the role the the knowing approaches? two chemicalcomposition. ilization: ilization: Theoryof knowledge: International • • • • • • • Syllabuscross and Ut</p><p> trans and E/Z isomers isomers E/Z and trans - cis Structural Structural Isomerism</p><p> conformational isomers, which isomers, — conformational elves.</p><p>Isomerism Isomerism Conformational Conformational</p><p>Stereoisomerism n bodyn is dimensionalfoundationpillar huma shapeofchiral.often and structure organican of its of Much moleculethe properties. (4.1) is its the Isomerism Configurational : d multiplicity (ie whetherbon d multiplicity connectivity or in differ not do space different in but atoms have of arrangements which involves isomers Stereoisomerism - three — the : idea science interconvert by by σthat a configurational and isomers about bond rotation interconvert by only bond. a breakingreforming and interconvert into subdivided further are Configurationalisomers opticaland isomers. re subdivided a re into classes Stereoisomers two Essential Essential thems isomers the single,between triple) double or 20.3 Stereoisomerism Stereoisomerism 20.3 Natureof Transdisciplinary Understandings: •</p><p>Chemistry guide 101 Topic 20: Organic chemistry organicchemistry ) ) resolution the menthol) mixture. or of racemic a - — Experiments could include the synthesis and characterization of Experiments: could characterization includean and synthesis the Aim6 (eg ( enantiomer Topics10.2 and 10.1 B.4 — carbohydrates Option in biomolecules B.10 — stereochemistry Option — importanceD.7 actionOption of drug and chirality Aims • the form form the R1R2C=CR3R4 f o cyclic C4 and C3 alkenes and superimposeableimages mirror eachof other. D models (real or virtual) of (real ofmodels virtual) D widea range or stereoisomers. trans isomers can occur in alkenes or cycloalkanes (or heteroanalogues) heteroanalogues) can isomers trans alkenes occur in cycloalkanes or (or - ountsisand inactive. optically cycloalkanes. Cis groups) to relative (or referencea atoms plane. differand of in positions the refer alkenes to Accordingisomers IUPAC, to E/Z groups. Aor chiral four to atoms joined carbon a different carbonis planelight the can of Anactiverotate asoptically compound it polarized passes solutiona ugh Opticalenantiomers. thro are compound. isomers the of non - are Enantiomers not are mirrorDiastereomers of images each other. is of(or inracemate) Aequal mixture a racemic enantiomers two am Construction3 - of in non - Explanation stereoisomerism of (R1 ≠ R2, R3 ≠ R4) R3 R2, neither differentR4) be need R2 or ≠ R3 where ≠ nor R1 from R4. (R1 Applications and skills: Applications 20.3 Stereoisomerism Stereoisomerism 20.3 • • • • • •</p><p>102 Chemistry guide Topic 20: Organic chemistry atoms; the other other the atoms; bonded Prelog priority attached to priority Prelog Ingold – chemical properties of properties chemical enantiomers. . E ifof liegroups side the same the on reference a Z system, the group the system, of– Cahn highest dash type representations involving tapered bonds representations should tapered dashfor involving type usedbe E/Z ans isomers and E/Z isomers should isomers E/Z and inencouraged be teaching the ans isomers tr programme. Comparisonphysical the between and molecules.in Description ofisomers simple organic explanationopticaland using Distinctionpolarimeter. a optical isomers between geometric IUPAC term isomers is The by asrecommended obsolete now and cis - the In is stereoisomer designated as Wedge - representationsofisomers. optical planeperpendicularand bond passing plane the to double the through double the to groups containing- linkingthe bonds the one of the terminal doubly bonded atoms of the <a href="/tags/Alkene/" rel="tag">alkene</a> (ie R1 or R2) is R2) of or R1 atoms bonded of one alkenedoubly the terminal the (ie of with group or the R3 (ie h ighest other compared the to precedence attached stereoisomer The is R4). 20.3 Stereoisomerism Stereoisomerism 20.3 • • • • • • Guidance:</p><p>Chemistry guide 103 Topic 21: Measurement and analysis of 2 hours performance he science he MS and can MS usedbe HPLC) - Protein Data Bank Data Protein the and dimensionalof view inorgans the ompounds, typically no one technique results in a full full techniqueone no inresults typically a ompounds, The Cambridge Crystallographic Database, ChemSpider CrystallographicCambridge Database,The ChemSpider RoyalSociety Chemistry of he (at Brookhaven National Laboratory, USA) are USA) Brookhaven examples (at which National Laboratory, Whytomography replacing scans (CT) computerized MRI is for mindedness: ? - in forensic investigations at crime scenes. ininvestigationscrime forensic at developed by t by developed PDB) (RCSB of scientifichighlight the community. nature international the body. human applicationstechnique some isasfor complementary a others? used but The chemicaloften The the community on shares chemicalinformation structural internationalstage. isintensity of inThe ratio spectrum by higNMR the given resolution h lines the numbersknown the in mathematicalindependentlya Pascal's pattern triangle, thousanda Whyyears byofago number over a different cultures. is mathematicstool such in mathematics science? t effective an Is cells within magnetic can molecules Protonsdetectedbe human in by water - giving three a resonance(MRI), imaging other (and techniquesGC MS GC, as such TLC, Analyticalhigh forcanabuse - usedbe by drug test to techniques patterns athletes. International • • • • • Theoryof knowledge: Utilization: NMR and MS) have resulted in detailed knowledge of the structure of compounds. (1.8) H 1 H NMR and NMR H 1</p><p>H NMR spectra: NMR H 1 ray crystallography can usedbe crystallography ray to - ray crystallography, IR, ray - s, triplets and quartets. s,and triplets , single , in peaks low resolution present advances in spectroscopic techniques (IR, characterization techniques form the backbone the techniquesform of identificationcharacterization structuralc of H NMR and NMR H MS. 1 H NMR spectrum NMR H 1 spin couplingconstants spinstudents but assessed be not will H NMR should covered. be NMR H 1 Measurement and analysis Although spectroscopic : : a cience: i de s number of peaks, under number area eachsplitting peak,shift patterns. chemical and of Treatment spin - should be familiarshoulddoublet with singlets, be MS). identify the bond lengths and bond a nglesbond lengthsbond identify the compounds. crystalline of and Structural identification of compounds involves several different several involves Structuralidentification compounds of analytical techniques IR, including higha In resolution structural technique The single of crystal X as reference the Explanationof (TMS) standard. use the of tetramethylsilane information given Deductionof compound a of structure range a of from the analyticalcharacterization techniques (X following the from Studentsinterpret sh ouldablebe to Highresolution can split into furtherclusters canofsplit into peaks. Topic 21 Topic Additional higher level Essential Essential structuralmolecule. identification a of Guidance: 21.1 Spectroscopic identification organic compounds identification of Spectroscopic 21.1 Natureof — instrumentation in modern Improvements Understandings: • • • • • • • Applications and skills: Applications</p><p>104 Chemistry guide Topic 21: Measurement and analysis s curricular links: curricular - pectroscopic identification of compounds : Spectral: basesdata usedbe here. can Aim7 Option B.2 separation — chromatographyprotein Option and B.9 — chromatographypigment Option and auxiliaries — chiral D.7 Option Aims: Syllabuscrossand Topic— s 11.3 • ray crystallography crystallography ray knownbe not need in - detail, but students should be aware of aware detail, shouldexistence the structural students but this technique of be inidentification context wider the organic and inorganic structural both of of compounds. The precise details of single crystalprecise X The detailssingle of of for methods. principlesrequired operating not any these The are 21.1 Spectroscopic identification organic compounds identification of Spectroscopic 21.1 • •</p><p>Chemistry guide 105 Core topics 15/25 hours 15/25 no singleno . (1.8) . es. uit of knowledge? tions, such as the Aztecs, Romans, suchAztecs, the tions,Romans, as iza : Even though theselocated though ancient Even were in civilizations curricular links: curricular - s convenient to classify materials into materials categories sconvenient classify to the world help purs world the the hinder and mindedness - ize classification is “perfect”. How do we evaluate the different the evaluate we do classificationHow classificationis“perfect”. use we in systems ofareas to different need the does our knowledge? How categor Whatancient used by civil were materials Althoughit i and Chinese?and similar. used geographicallywere locations, diverse they materials the Utilization: Utilization: Syllabuscrossand International • • Topicin ofrole bonding— the 4.2 types electronegativity Theoryof knowledge: packing tionsmaterialsAge arethe used:and Stone variousAge, Age. by Bronze There they of Iron ways materials classifying iza d civil d ize (melting point, permeability, conductivity, point, permeability, (melting character different materials were used for different purposes before the development of development the — differentused scientifica for were properties purposesmaterials different before understanding their of of a material to its bonding and structures ( ofitsstructures to material a bonding and </p><p>Materialsunderstandinginvolves of properties applyingthe then and science those desired to properties structur material, a . cience: s : Materials elasticity, brittleness) elasticity,brittleness) Materials are classified based on their uses, properties, or b onding classified and are uses,Materials their on or based properties, structure. of properties ofionic based The degree the on metallic material a covalent, or can bondinga on incharacter deduceditsbe compound a from position triangle. in mixtures of whichcomposed Compositesare are materials distinct two phases,in ismatrix a reinforcinga phase.phase embedded that Use of electronegativity from compounds for trianglebond diagrams binary data. Evaluationof materials. classifying of ways various characteristics Relating physical arrangements, electron mobility,arrangements, one to slide to ability atoms of relative another) Core topics Core Essential idea: Essential Option A A.1 Materials introduction science A.1 Natureof in technology Improvements has Patternsin science — history (3.1) accordingdesired to patterns. Understandings: • • • • • • Applications and skills: Applications</p><p>106 Chemistry guide Core topics rom various ratios various of rom tructure and bonding and types and tructure Investigationof of t etrahedra s : 3 alentnetworks fit polymers and diagrams. these on and Experimentscould of bands stretching includethe investigating rubber : cement, gravel, sandand cement, drying. investigatingand upon strength breaking the Aims1 Aim6 properties or of different under polymers, metals, chemical environments, composites, ceramics,f or making concreteslabs thin where cov where Aims: • • . Permeability to to should Permeability moisture consideredbe bonding to and with respect simplepacking arrangements. of ceramicsand Consider of properties metallic,terms polymers inmetals, covalent,ionicand bonding. forSeebonding sectiontriangular a diagram booklet data the of 29 A.1 Materials introduction science A.1 Guidance: • • •</p><p>Chemistry guide 107 Core topics They They emission emission identify and quantify trace trace identifyquantify and has grown dramatically. hasgrown susesand metals and mass ate, solving forof concentration solving the nickel a ate, f curricular links: curricular - anycountries? s performance, alloying was initially more ofscience.salloyinga more than performance, was art an initially solutionBeer’sAnalysis using law spectrophotometry. and alloy of ’ MS/OES Spectroscopy MS/OES ion ize mindedness: - - Experiments could include calculating the Faraday constant Experimentscould via Faraday includethe calculating : ICP are used technology, medicines,inare green lasers,technology and weapons What expensive are obtainin to growing but demand. elsewhere.They reserves earth countrieshappens few a ifcontrolled are rare but are by only m usedby The usemetals, ofThe exotic earth or rare minerals, and time, how Whatusedbe factors/outcomesshould determine to money, Who knowledgeeffortdecides spentwhich is scientificon is research? be to pursued? Aim6 electrolysis of aqueous copper sul electrolysiscopper aqueous of copper or determination of conductedbe composition couldsuchlabs colorimetric also as clip in incopper paper a coin. a analysis manganese or gravimetric or silver of Theoryof knowledge: Utilization: Utilization: Syllabuscross and International • • • Topicsspectrometry — mass 12.1 a nd 2.1 spectra Topic— emission 2.2 Topic— oxidation9.1 reduction and Aims: OES. metals. - ng them with them ng etal activity the on a m a ICP spectroscopy, developed from developed understandingan spectroscopy, scientificof principles, to — ICPcan used be of metals with other metals or non - ofor metals with metals other . ng altersng of properties metals. MS MS ICP Opticaland Spectroscopy Emission . . - F Metals can Metals ores their extractedbe from alloyedand for desired characteristics. idea: science: Reduction by coke (carbon), a more electrolysis reactive ofor more a coke Reduction means metal, by are (carbon), ores. their from obtaining metals some of number the and relationship molesThe charge is between of given electrons Faraday’s constant, by mixtures Alloyshomogeneous are Diamagneticparamagneticand spin in differ compounds electron pairing and in fields magnetic behaviour their ofion izi amounts by can Trace metals identifiedbe quantified and gas Spectroscopy in plasma argon Coupled uctively Ind Plasma (ICP) using Spectroscopy Mass ICP Deductionfor of reduction the metals. of equations redox of Relatingextraction method the position the of to Explanationelectrolysis the of by inproduction the alumina of of aluminium cryolite molten Explanationalloyi how of series. spectrafor analysis. Essential Essential inductively Metals spectroscopy and plasma (ICP) A.2 coupled Natureof ofDevelopment techniquesand instruments new of amounts (1.8) metals. amounts trace that enhance of can Detailsmaterials greatly certain — withdata discovery metal of a the (3.1) Understandings: • • • • • • • • • Applications and skills: Applications</p><p>108 Chemistry guide Core topics Animation sICPcould involving used.be Simulationscouldinvestigate to experiments virtual and used be : : Aim7 Aim7 semiconductors. • • MS/OES. - OES instruments will instruments OES be not - MS and ICP and MS and itsand production in ICP - OES. - OES. - oupledplasma (ICP)spectroscopy MS and ICPand MS - MS and ICP and MS - e: assessed. Solving stoichiometric problems using Solvingconstant problems stoichiometric Faraday’s based mass on deposits in electrolysis. diamagnetismand Discussionin relation electron to paramagnetism of ofstructure metals. Explanationstate plasma the of simple calibrationIdentifyand data from abundancesand metals curves ICP from provided and ExplanationseparationquantificationMS and by the of ions metallic of OES. Usesof ICP constant booklet data Faraday’s the 2. is in in sectiongiven DetailsICP of parts operating of analysis Only of covered. be should metals of importance calibrationThe should covered. be A.2 Metals and inductively Metals and A.2 c • • • • • • • • • • Guidanc</p><p>Chemistry guide 109 Core topics being risks. san d t s that are constantly sare that reactions sts are toxic and harmful to the the harmfulto ststoxic and are oxide. (IV) obaltchloride of decomposition the and hydrogen Investigatevarious forcatalysts benefi the both curricular links: curricular : - fication and hydrogenation ficationhydrogenation and i 3 mindedness: - and Experimentscould of decomposition includethe investigating potassium Anion exchange zeolite could using explored. be Virtualsimulationsand experiments catalysts nanoparticlesinvolving as : : : environment. Is environmental environment. pursuit justifiedof degradation in the knowledge? Palladium, platinum and rhodium are common are catalysts used Palladium,inrhodium are and that platinum catalyticBecauseof theseconverter of catalytic converters. value metals, the theftsrise. the on are cataly Some used materials as effective Aims1 Aim6 Aim6 Aim7 sodium tartrate with c tartrate sodium peroxidewith manganese couldhere. done be reaction and are left unchanged at left of and are rate the at increase reaction the Catalysts unchanged always national Utilization: Utilization: Syllabuscross and Inter • • • • • • reaction mechanisms Topics — reaction 16.1 and 6.1 Topic— ester10.2 Theoryof knowledge: Topic— activation16.2 energy B.10 — hydrogenation Option of fats Aims: intermediate. sts in industry. : : Catalysts work by providing an alternate providing Catalysts for by work reaction reaction. the pathway catalysts were used to increase reaction rates before the development of an understanding of how they work. This work. used led increase beforeto rates model to they of development the reaction understandingan were — catalysts how of science idea: Reactantssitescatalysts heterogeneous onto adsorb active at the and productsdesorb. catalysts a form Homogeneous chemically with reactantscombine the to activated complex reactiona temporary or catalytic Transitionmetal adsorption/absorption the on depend properties oxidation of properties variable the and metal the states. cage Zeolitesbecausestructure. catalysts selective act their as of surfacelarge always nanoparticlesCatalyticnearly particles are have that unit mass. per areas process.a Explanationforin factors choosing involved catalyst of a Descriptionas work metals catalysts. heterogeneous how of nanocataly Descriptionof benefits the of forConsider suchdesired catalyticthe selectivity only product, as properties conditions, and impact mild/severe ability efficiency, in environmental work to impurities. use ofThe should carbonnanocatalysts covered. be Guidance: Applications and skills: Applications A.3 Catalysts A.3 Natureof Useof models (1.10) testedimproved. and Understandings • • • • • • • • • • Essential Essential the end ofend the reaction the .</p><p>110 Chemistry guide Core topics oes this mean that we oeswe that this mean axis in the material. the in axis affects these crystals. curricular links: curricular - mindedness: - Experimentscould thermotropicliquidincludea crystal investigating and animations Computer could thermotropicliquid usedbe investigate to : : can access more knowledge? can access more The production of many electronic production of The ofareas goods con is many in centrated world the working the ideal.be conditionsnot where may Should ationally intern be there Whatfor setimplicationsall standardslabour would this the on workers? have goods? costconsumer of in can technology we that store Developments more and mean more informationavailable scale. smaller D increasingly an on Aim6 range whichtemperature the Aim7 crystals. Utilization: Utilization: Syllabuscrossand Theoryof knowledge: Aims: International • • • • Topic— chirality20.3 stereoisomers and crystal crystal crystal state over a crystalstate over accidently discovered flowing liquid crystals in 1888 while experimenting on cholesterol.on experimenting liquid crystalsdiscovered accidently flowing (1.4) in while 1888 phenyl nitriles. phenyl crystals and the biphenyl the crystalsand d by rod shaped molecules rod whichby d crystals. ize Friedrich Reinitzer — FriedrichReinitzer r should be limited to the bi limited be the to should r crystal behaviour on a on behaviour level. molecular crystal crystal materials are pure substances pure show that liquid are crystal materials - Liquidphysical fixed crystals have fluids some that to orientation which properties molecular on are relative dependent are ea : cience s . range temperature a over crystalbehaviour displays(LCD). Liquid crystals are fluids that have physical have fluidsLiquid(electrical, properties crystals that optical are and dependent fixedare that elasticity) orientation molecular on so to me axis in the material. liquid Thermotropic - liquidliquid Lyotropic solutions showare that the - crystals liquid Nematic iscrystal phase character Discussionforneeded substancea used be to in properties the of liquid - Explanation liquidof - phasea crystalswhichstable, Propertiesforneeded include: chemically liquid sopolar they range, suitablea can ischange over temperature stable orientationelectrican fieldswitchingwhen speed.applied, is rapid and is Soapwater of and liquid example an lyotropic Liquidu crystal behavio Smecticsliquid crystalsdiscussed. be not need other and types (certain) range of range (certain) con centrations. liquid nitrilesexamples thermotropic of are are randomly distributed but on average align distributed in samerandomly average on the but are direction . A.4 crystals Liquid A.4 Natureof scientificand Serendipity discoveries Understandings: • • • • • • • • • • Guidance: Applications and skills: Applications Essential i d Essential</p><p>Chemistry guide 111 Core topics . How has How . the ies. the second world war second the world tion and condensationand tion reactions : links curricular - mindedness: - : Physical: high lowand could density polyethene of be properties Plastics were virtually unheard of Plasticsunheard to prior virtually were Aim6 or othercould polyamide polyester, polymer investigatedsynthesis be or a of to e fficiency. performed measurequantitatively atom introduction of plastics affected the world economically, world the socially introductionand affected plastics of environmentally? International • • Utilization: Utilization: Syllabuscross and Aims: Topics— addi 20.1 and 10.2 ray diffraction,ray ablebeen understand tunnellingscientiststo have microscopes, scanning electron etc), - chemistry. weakening the rs in polyvinyl chloride and volatile chloride inrs polyvinyl and ize polymer development and development — polymer such understandinan usepossible ofquickerg involved, has or as carcinogenicgrown recyclingthan risks the as a result of advances in technology (X resulta of in— astechnology advances ces between the polymer chains. polymer the cesbetween a hardened thermoset by curing. thermosetby into bly hardened a the formation offormation the expanded polystyrene. Polymers are made up of repeating monomer units ofup Polymerswhich are monomer repeating canmade ertmanipulatedbe prop structures give to with indesired ways various rs added to a polymer increase flexibility the by polymer a to added rs ize cience: s Thermoplastics soften when heated and harden when cooled. when Thermoplasticssoftenharden and heated when in is viscoussofta polymer prepolymer a Astate thermosetting solidthat or changesirreversi forceflexible Elastomersunder are deformed be will but to can and return original their nearly sha oncepe isstress the released. High(HDPE) chains density polyethene has branchingno allowing be to packeder.togeth (LDPE) densityflexible. polyethene Low branching has isand some more Plastic is economy applied measurea ofAtom in green efficie ncy have substituents Isotacticside. addition same the on polymers substituents the have Atacticplaced. randomly polymers addition Descriptionuse the of plastic of hydrocarbons in hydrocarbons intermolecular for intermolecular : idea Essential A.5 Polymers A.5 Natureof Advancesin technology level manipulate and . This developed be occurs into polymers what ways. allows new matter (3.7) molecular the on new Theoriescan supersededofbe science. units repeating — Staudinger's of proposal many made was of ) integral inpolymer (1.9 development the macromolecules Ethicsassessment risk and (4.5) properties. Understandings: • • • • • • • • • • Applications and skills: Applications</p><p>112 Chemistry guide Core topics uding LDPE uding ng 2 - ng izi Solving problems and evaluatinginand economy Solvingsynthesis problems atom reactions. theiron depend Descriptionstructural of properties the how of polymers features. of properties the Descriptionincl polymers, modifying of ways of polymer from formed Deductionstructuresof polymers of is economy in equation the for The provided atom percent booklet data in section1. foams as examplesConsiderpolystyrene only of property polymer manipulation. and HDPE.and methylpropene. A.5 Polymers A.5 • • • • • • Guidance:</p><p>Chemistry guide 113 Core topics implications? Wouldcarbon a What the are of future developments in futurethis developments of not an attempt to violate itto any attempt an not is laws; which was previously thought to be unattainable.be to thought previously whichdo was How , curricular links: curricular mindedness: - cross - these advances in technology change our view of view these change knowledgeadvances our what in technology is attainable? the on Is knowledge the area? rely we publiclyneed we available do or of authority experts? Some studies shown inhaling Some that can ashave be dust harmfulas nan oparticle will or regulated be research?hinder asbestos.this nanotechnology Should International collaboration in space exploration is growing. space nanotube feasible,be wanted? elevator or use ofThe us “see” to allowed scanning the tunnelling microscope has individualatoms concerned people are Some possible the about ofimplication nanotechnology. possible the evaluate we do How consequences of acting ribosomes form Proteinisinsynthesis as nanotechnology with cells a assemblers. molecular Syllabusand Topicspolarity — molecular 4.3 International • • • • • Theoryof knowledge: Utilization: we are too big.” big.” too are we assembly assembly - shapeddeposit anode. the on hysics upof assembly nanoparticles canand - high power electron microscopes have allowed for the study of positioning of atoms. (1.8) electron — highof microscopes study power forpositioning allowed atoms. the of have assembly is the bottom is assembly the - Chemical techniques molecules in using position atoms reactions chemical whilst physical techniques allow and atoms/molecules be manipulated to : cience: i dea s Molecular self Molecular Possiblechemical of discharge, arc nanotubes methods vapour are producing depositionhighand (HIPCO). pressurecarbonmonoxide (CVD) surface the vaporizing Arcofdischarge of either involves carbon the one metal electrodes,disch electrodes through arc an arging in or a submersed smalla solvent, which - forms hydrocarbon rod Distinguishinginchemicaland physical manipulating between techniques form to molecules.atoms of properties nanotubes. carbon ptionand structure the of Descri Explanationisforgas, inert an oxygen, not and CVD necessary why of of preparation nanotubes.carbon Explanationhydrocarbon from of solvents production the of carbon in arc discharge anode. oxidatio by the at n production atomscarbon HIPCO. of Deduction forfrom of the equations occur by selectively occurmolecules by Self attaching surfaces. specific to canin also solution. spontaneously occur Richard Feynman, Nobel Richardin winner Feynman, P Prize he principleshe as can isI things far It see,against speak manoeuvring not do of as atombyphysics, of possibility the atom. — A.6 Nanotechnology A.6 Natureof in apparatus Improvements in theories development the regard to need of error and asThe theories. uncertain nanotubes(2.2) of role — the associated their and trial “T something,can inbut it done; be practice,has in because done been not principle, that Understandings: • • • • • • • • Applications and skills: Applications Essential Essential positioned to specific requirements. positionedrequirements. specific to </p><p>114 Chemistry guide Core topics uction, environmental cleaning, environmental uction, Investigate manufacturing theoretical the of scale large and : Animations,: manufacture simulations, videosand nanotube of 9 9 and and , 8 , 8 , nanotechnologyproducts implications. their and Examplesincludecould medicinal sportingequipment, products, constr theoretical other or uses. robotics,commercial weaponry usesand should used. be Aims1 Aims7 Aims: • • against particles on the nanoscale,againstparticles the on t effectivet o n responsibilitiesrnmentsinvolved industries the gove inand of this research. Discussion of some implications Discussionapplicationsand some nanotechnology. of of Explanationconductorsgood and strong nanotubes are of why of electricity. as include toxicity to nanotechnology of levels uncertainty ations implic Possible nanoscale,a on risksconcern withmaterials, human new that unknown health defence systems are of of Conductivity fullerenesand in graphene terms can explained be delocalizationisexplanation of not An basedelectrons. hybridization on required. A.6 Nanotechnology A.6 • • • • Guidance:</p><p>Chemistry guide 115 Core topics cean? in the Pacific the in O reduce is a Mobius strip Mobius a isreduce and the plastic the gyre s influence ssymbols? of recognition the globalrecognition ranks of symbol this reuse , Whatfactor the problem of problem the RIC codes RIC spectra IR and can used. be curricular links: curricular - mindedness: - : Database: of has of raiseddevelopment awareness chemistry the The : of green the The international symbol for international The recycle symbol , However designed in late the 1960s. wellsymbols. below other can How nations address products the on ofThe impact negative a technologycan science have and scientists Are respo nsible for of environment. impact the ethically their products? Aim7 Aim8 ethical the and environmental technology.and implications science using of Utilization: Utilization: Syllabuscross and International • • • • • Theoryof knowledge: Topicreactions— redox 9.1 Topic— organic10.1 compounds spectroscopy Topic— infrared 11.3 Biologyof option— impact C.3 ecosystems on humans Aims: in mind, but the risks and implications also need to be considered. (4.8) risks the but also implications considered. be and to need inmind, in polymer inpolymer s ul are products new there challenges with recycling associated of and high levels of of toxicity of some r ize ) of plastics from an IR IR an from plasticsof ) s han other materials. other han (RIC leading to cellulargeneticand leading to member heterocyclicrings member oxygen with two - 1 and 4. products. plastics plastics — environmental impact of impact environmental use the plastics. of scientific research often proceeds with perceived benefits perceived — scientificproceeds researchoften with the equation for any given combustion given for any reaction. equation the Although materials science usef many generates cience: idea: s Plastics do not degrade easily because bonds. ofPlastics easily covalent strong their degrade not do incomplete Burningofreleases chloride and dioxins, polyvinyl HCl gas combustion hydrocarbon Dioxins contain sixunsaturated disruptingChlorinated dioxins hormone are , processing Plasticsrecycledbe to t more require Plasticsdifferenton recycled based resin are types. Deductionof intensive is ofprocess.Discussion recycling the energy an polymers why of Discussion the of dioxins.and (PCBs) of biphenylsComparison structures of polychlorinated the Discussionof plasticconcerns volatile healthusing the of Distinguishe s Cod possible Identification Resin atoms, usually inatoms, position s damage. production. spectrum. Applications and skills: Applications A.7 Environmental impact A.7 Natureof Risksproblems and Understandings: • • • • • • • • • • • • Essential Essential thesematerials. </p><p>116 Chemistry guide Core topics n sectionn 31. passedinon the D) and PCBsand D D) as examples of o plastics (shower curtains, plasticsLow o etc). (shower like substances. like ) are in booklet data the are ) in section 30. s plastics plastics — foodchain. Dioxins do not decompose in the environment and canand Dioxinsinbe environment the decompose not do Considerpolychlorinated dibenzodioxins (PC Considerphthalateexamples esters of as plasticizers. toxins Housefires can t releasedue many ResinIdentification Codes (RIC Structuresbookletof molecules i materials in various data the are carcinogenicdioxin chlorinated- or dioxins halogen cabling these zero smoke hazards. is prevent to used often in wiring A.7 Environmental impact A.7 Guidance: • • • • • •</p><p>Chemistry guide 117 Additonal higher level topics 15/25 hours 15/25 ray crystallography. - ow reliableknowledge ow our world of is microscopic the curricular links: curricular - ray crystallography mindedness: - — t ravelling4.2 waves - Animations and simulations would be very useful Animations : simulationsand explain would very be to ray crystallography can usedbe ray analyse to structures. - Pauli exclusion principle exclusion — Pauli X ray diffraction ray beyond world the biological the ushas probe to allowed limits - Analyticalexploration, applicatio forensics,techniques nshave in mineral medicinedoes elsewhere.and advanced How unequal the access to technologyaffect economies? world X ofsenses. H our we what to know macroscopic the at compared level? Aim7 superconductivityX and ruments. (2.2) ruments. Theoryof knowledge: Utilization: Syllabuscrossand International • • • Topic2. 2 Topicradius — atomic 3.2 periodicityand Topic— X 21.1 topic Physics Aims: atom/ion is number. coordination atom/ion its an thus expelling it. thusexpelling raycrystallography - Schriefferexplains below critical the theory (BCS) that – etals and X etalsand superconducting materials, with zero electrical provide of example good a — superconductingcertaina zero temperature, theories resistance below ne edingwith modifiedbe materials, to </p><p>Cooper Superconductivity is zero electrical resistance and expulsion of magnetic fields.electrical Superconductivityis expulsionand zero magnetic of resistance oftheories science: : Materials ray diffraction ray analyseionic and to structures can of used be metallic - Superconductorsmaterials resistanceno electric currents are offer that to belowcriticala temperature. image effect Meissner mirror The a ability the is superconductor a of create to field,field magnetic of external an electrons between causedResistancecollisions is conductors inby metallic positiveand lattice. ions the of – Bardeen The superconductors1 have Type transitionssharp whereas superconductivity to gradual superconductors2 havetransitions. Type more X compounds. lattices unitCrystal repeating contain cells. simple faceson Atoms of cellsshared. edges and are unit of number The neighbours nearest of r pairselectrons r freelyCoope in temperature form superconductors which move superconductor. the through A.8 Superconducting A.8 m Natureof Importance basic instthe understand to fit to behind scientific important modern principles is It data. new Understandings: • • • • • • • • • Essential idea: Essential Additional higher level topics Option A</p><p>118 Chemistry guide Additonal higher level topics Type 2 Type , in metallic structures.in , metallic 𝜃𝜃 𝑑𝑑 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 2 tice are distorted slightly by a passinga distorted by slightly are tice = 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 raycrystallography - e cubiccubice centred cells,body and cells (BCC) ray crystallography are not required. not are crystallography ray - ly be appliedbe ly simple to cubic structures. etals and X etalsand the density of a pure metal from its from of atomic crystalmetal density pure a the radii and A second electron is attracted to this slight positive deformation and a and deformation slightthis to Aattracted second is positive electron ray crystallography these but ray will assessed. be not - electron. occurs. couplingthese of electrons two Analysis of resistance versus temperature data for Type 1 for data and Type Analysistemperature resistance of versus superconductors. in terms Explanationof a superconductivity pairs through moving Cooper of positiveion lattice. crystal structure Deductionfrom constructionunit cell or structures of information. Applicationequation, Bragg the of Determinationof packing structure. simplea pairs explanation with Cooper Only BCSof istheory At low required. positive the temperatures ions in lat the principles Operating X of pure with metals simpl Only should facecubic covered. centred be cells(FCC) superconductors of can Perovskiteanalysedbe structures crystallineby many X Bragg'sequation will on A.8 Superconducting A.8 m and skills: Applications • • • • • • • • • • Guidance:</p><p>Chemistry guide 119 Additonal higher level topics curricular links: curricular - mindedness: - Synthesisof performed. be could nylon : Doespoliticsessential science, in role most the economics research, play or polymers? new of suchas development the Aim6 Utilization: Utilization: Syllabuscross and International • • Topic— addition10.2 condensationand reactions Topic— synthesis20.2 techniques A.5 — polymers Option Aims: ic uric acid. uric f sulfur The hydrogen The Iron Age and Bronze Age. Is it possible that today’s age is the Age of Polymers, as science continues to manipulate matter fo as sciencer Age.matter Polymers, Is today’smanipulate is to age it Age possibleBronze and Age the Iron continues of that strength and its solubility in concentrated sul itsinand strength concentrated solubility ®’s e possiblee reactions. products condensation of O arO 2 (1.5) ? Condensation polymers are formed by Condensationformed the are polymers loss monomers small join. molecules functionalfrom as of groups is a polyamide withis structure. polyamide a ordered and strong a ea : cience: ® s , HCl H , and 3 Condensation polymers require functionaleach Condensationtwo monomer. polymers on groups NH Kevlar Distinguishingcondensation and addition between polymers. descriptionsand Completion ofshow to condensation polymers how equations formed. are respective their from Deductionpolyestersand structures of polyamides of the monomers. ExplanationKevla r of polymers. chemistry Considergreen acid. bonds between O and N can N and bondsO between withbroken be use the concentrated of Essential i d Essential Applications and skills: Applications A.9 Condensation A.9 polymers Natureof SpeculationStone the had Age, have — w e desiredpurposes Understandings: • • • • • • • • Guidance:</p><p>120 Chemistry guide Additonal higher level topics . sp ous oxidation states and act ous and act oxidation states include investigations K of curricular links: curricular : Investigations: of treatment. waste water - 8 and Experimentscould : What responsibility do scientists have for the impact of their endeavours on the the on Whatfor endeavours ofscientists do impact the have responsibility their planet? Aims1 Aim6 ims: Utilization: Utilization: Syllabuscross and Theoryof knowledge: • • • Topicreactions— redox 9.1 Topic— transition13.2 complexes metal Biologyofoption — impact C.3 ecosystems on humans A catalysed biological biological actshexadentate as - 4 emoving metals solution.in emoving Weissreaction mechanism. – Haber as an applicationan as r of heavy metals heavy sp — K through various mechanisms. various through . (4.8) . risks the but also benefits perceived considered implications be — scientificand to need proceeds in researchoften with mind, Weissfree in radicals naturally generates reaction diamine acts diamine as bidentatea ligand EDTA and Transition metals can metals - iron the catalyse Transition reaction the with Toxicity and carcinogenic properties of heavy metals are the result of their ability to form coordinated compounds, have vari coordinated have form to compounds, result the ability their of are metals carcinogenicToxicity heavy of properties and - – : , 2 1 cience: i dea s are invaluesbooklet section data the are in 32. d problems d sp Toxic doses of transition metals can disturb the normal oxidation/reduction Toxictransition of normal the doses can metals disturb balance in cells Some methods ofremoving heavy metalsare precipitation,adsorption, and chelation. monodentate stable more ligands Polydentate form complexes similar than considering which by ligandscan effect, explainedbe chelate the to due changes. entropy heavy Explanationsubstances metals. can chelating used be how of remove to Deductionof bonds with centralofa liganda form coordinate can number the ion. metal Calculations involving contrastand Fenton the Compare and Ethane - Haber The K processes. (Fenton) forreaction (Fenton) being reactive generating mechanism the hydroxyl radicals. ligand. Applications and skills: Applications A.10 Environmental impact A.10 Natureof an Risks Understandings: • • • • • • • • • • Guidance: Essential Essential as catalysts in the human body. asincatalysts human the </p><p>Chemistry guide 121 Core topics 15/25 hours 15/25 supplyof other subjects, other including As technologies have developed, more data data As developed, technologies hasmore have and lightand absorption curricular links: curricular - metal complexes ptionB.9 — metal lightand absorption reactionshydrolysis)and (condensation O N mindedness: - Metabolic reactions in the human body are dependent on dependent body are Metabolicthe reactions in human the balanced significant regular a are nutrientsthrough there diet. Globally diverseand major food,ofdifferenceswhich nutritious have in availability the health. impactshuman on offundamental study is the Biochemistry to many nutrition pharmacology, agriculture.and genetics,immunology, Utilization: Utilization: Topicand 13.2 International • • Syllabuscross and — electronicC.8 Option conjugation Topic— S 10.2 ses providing energy for cells. for energy providing ses rich molecules from carbon dioxidecarbon richfrom molecules - are called catabolism and reactionsand called catabolism synthesisare of are discovery of discovery of patterns (3.1) in reactions metabolism. </p><p> ght energy. energy. ght : Metabolic between complex a differentinterplay involve reactions many in components environments. highly controlled cience: s : Biochemistry and water using water and li The diverse functions diverse The structures their on depend and molecules biological of shapes. Metabolicin reactions highly controlled environments. take aqueous place Reactionsbreakdown of calledanabolism. by form condensation by down Biopolymers reactions broken are and hydrolysisreactions. Photosynthesisenergy of synthesis the is Respiration is a complex set of metabolic proces Explanationcondensation hydrolysisreactions. between difference the of and equations use ofThe tionofexplain to summary respira and photosynthesis the potentialdioxidecarbon and balancing oxygen of in atmosphere. the required. of not are p hotosynthesisand Intermediates aerobic respiration Core topics Core Option B Applications and : skills Applications B.1Introduction to biochemistry Natureof time. number large a place in ofhave Usesame same the the at of occurring reactions different — biochemicaldata systems collectedbeen leadingthe to Understandings • • • • • • • • • Guidance: Essential idea: Essential</p><p>122 Chemistry guide Core topics . ® or gel or , concentration concentration studies for accessible protein on data protein sequencing protein is and routine a , values b qualityfreelyand mation. mation. and p K and a curricular links: curricular - K p and — pH 18.2 mindedness: - Experiments could involve hydrolysis Experimentscould separationof and involve protein, a logging Data exp erimentsabsorption/involving : : sequence and functionalsequenceand infor Universal Protein Resource (UniProt) is UniversalProtein Resource of The consortium (UniProt) a bioinformatics by as resourcefora institutes.scientific the isIts community mission act to ensive,high compreh providing - synthetic are Many materials Examples polyamides. Kevlar and include nylon Electrophoresismedicalisidentifyin diagnostics some used of patterns to urine. or serum unusualcontent protein in blood first The wasind Fredericksequence Sanger be insulin in to 1951, protein a by years. processten Today took that over Aim6 chromatography identificationacid paper amino of by mixtures Aim7 very efficient process, and is a major part of part known study as efficientthe proteomics. major a very isprocess, and electrophoresis DNA. proteins of and content protein reagent. using Biuret the Topic— stereoisomerism20.3 A.9 — condensationOption polymers B.9 — chromatographyOption Biology— proteins8.1 and topics2.5 enzymes 2.4, and Aims: Utilization: Syllabuscross and International • • • • • • Topicsand 8.3 (also known as (also amino acids, joined by amide links acids, amide amino by joined rried the the ca thought, as protein rried not and originally conclusion the to different — several continents led DNA, several on that experiments dimensionalitsstructural shape rmines dete in role pH and the the and pH ions. presencemetal of heavy no acids,no hydrolysisreactions peptides. of and and Proteins are the most diverse of of diverse Proteinsmost biopolymersthe the living structuralresponsibleand are for integrity organisms. metabolism cience: s perature Proteins are polymers of 2 - Proteinspolymers are cationsacids canand Amino exist amphoteric zwitterions, anions. and are as secondary, described are and Proteinprimary, diverse the structures at are quaternaryand levels. tertiary Aprotein’s - three in metabolic or components processes. specificallya proteins to enzymes actbinding that are as Most by catalysts substrateactive the site.at depends activity conformation, inthe on changes Asitto sensitive is enzyme tem separation chemicaland is Chromatography based physical different on principles. of formulas Deductioncondensationreactants productsand structural of in the reactionsami of of points acidsmelting and in Explanationsolubilities terms of amino the of zwitterions. isoelectricand pH for charge, Applicationbetween pointrelationships the of acids amino proteins.and peptidebonds). B.2 Proteins and enzymes Proteins B.2 Natureof viewCollaborationre peer and informationfor (4.4) inheritance. Understandings: • • • • • • • • • • Applications and skills: Applications Essential idea: Essential</p><p>Chemistry guide 123 Core topics : Simulations: can u sedbe for gel electrophoresis. Aim7 • ix and beta pleated sheet, to and ixpleated beta and values and locatingagents should valuesand be f arerequired. not max V esses of paper chromatography and of chromatography gel esses electrophoresis paper and m of the fouroforigin the levelstypes and including structure, protein the of fibrous and globular proteins withfibrousexamples of proteins globular each. and Description involving activity changes Deductionof interpretation and in enzyme of graphs temperature. and substrateconcentration, pH Explanationproc the of identification.and acid inamino separation protein and structuraland formulas innames ofgiven data the The acids amino the are bookletin section 33. Referencealpha to shouldhel made be chromatography the paper In use of R kinetics enzyme In K of bonds and interactions involved. covered. covered. Guidance: B.2 Proteins and enzymes Proteins B.2 • • • • • • •</p><p>124 Chemistry guide Core topics fat. - trans Public making, known making, as especially in sports, and methods for sports,detectmethods especiallyand ion.in curricular links: curricular - ormation a human right? Whathuman a right? knowledgeuniversally be should ormation mindedness: - the negative effects of diets high in saturated fat, cholesterol, fat, inof and saturated effects negative high the diets There are large global and cultural differences in the dietary sources globallarge are of culturaland There differences lipids in dietary the used prevent to methods and rancidity. very Differentlabelling. different food have countries standards towards Is accessinf to available? industry, the medicalWhat government, of responsibilities different the are professionchoices in individual the healthy and making diet? about do How know we lfreedom. their also but bodieslimit can individua the protect is individual?for the and what society best fatsusedAlkalineissoapin process the - hydrolysisof of saponification. Steroidabuse , of ternational Theoryof knowledge: In • • • • • Utilization: Syllabuscross and Topics — functionalhydrogenation 10.2 groups, and 10.1 ofalkenes Topic— free10.2 radical mechanisms Topic— configurational20.3 isomerism Biologytopic — lipids2.3 d therefored insoluble in water. polar an polar term studies led knowledge to have term ofasand lipid soluble vitamins ers — long - phospholipids can occur using enzymes or in or phospholipidsenzymes using can occur insulation, as transport insulation, Lipids are a broad group of non - Lipidslargely group are broad a biomolecules that are d. cience: s iction of the relative melting points of fats and oils from their structures. their from ictionfatspoints melting relative the of of oils and ize Fats are more reduced than carbohydrates and so yield more energy than reduced soand more when yield are Fatsmore carbohydrates oxid fatty condensation acids three by produced Triglyceridesare of with glycerol containand acids canmonounsaturatedor saturated, links.be ester Fatty polyunsaturated. Phospholipidsof derivatives are triglycerides. of Hydrolysis triglycerides and ascharacteristic a Steroidssteroidala fused have known structure, ring backbone. storage, in energy cellLipidsof components as structural membranes, act electricaland thermal hormones. of formulas Deductioncondensationreactants productsand structural of in the glycerol phosphate.fatty and acids hydrolysisreactionsand and/or between Pred fatsComparison ofrancidity of in oxidative and with processes the hydrolytic in favour molecules the respectconditions sitethe and the to that reactivity of reaction. the alkalineacidic or conditions. B.3 Lipids Lipids B.3 Natureof Significanceexplanations public the science of to foodThishas ledproducts. new (5.2) to Understandings: • • • • • • • • • Applications and skills: Applications Essential idea: Essential</p><p>Chemistry guide 125 Core topics erent fatserent and Experiments could include the calculation of the iodine number of fats Experimentscould number iodine the of include calculation the to : or the separation of lipids from common food common from using sources separation the lipids of or different measure degree of measure unsaturation, calorimetric diffon experiments Aim6 , oils solvents and a separating funnel.solventsseparatinga and Aims: • high - cholesterol, ) LDL fats are not required. not fatsare - determinethe unsaturation of a trans and oils do not have to be learned. be to have not do oils densitylipoprotein ( fatsteroids.of use the and abuse and - - low trans and ) fatty acids are given in the data booklet in sectionacidsin in booklet fattygiven data the 34. are HDL some ein( densitylipoprot Application of the concept of iodine number to to Applicationiodineconcept the of number of Comparisoncarbohydratesof molecules storage lipidsand aswith energy density. energy respectsolubility their to and of rolesDiscussion the impact health,ofon including lipids the dietary of structures ofThe examples Specificfatsof named and cis - structural differences The between fat. saturated, unsaturated and unsaturated saturated, B.3 Lipids Lipids B.3 • • • • • • Guidance:</p><p>126 Chemistry guide Core topics from sugarcane from s ly investigated. Shouldscientistsinvestigated. ly be ates. quarters ofquarters production come tion projects that deaths from diabetesdeaths tionthat from projects doublewill spartame as an artificial sweetener has been controversial as for artificialan has sweetener spartame been a mindedness: - in tropical and subtropical regions and the remainder comes from sugar beet beet sugar from comes inremainder tropical the and subtropicaland regions clim in whichtemperate cultivated is jor international commodity and isinternationaland produced jor is Sugar commodity in different ma 130 a about - countries.three Approximately Diabetescannotoccurs that chronic effectively is body the when disease a functioningblood regulate failurea to due sugar, in insulin. of production the or World The izaHealth Organ 2030. a nd 2005 between able not Lactosedigest is to individual condition the in iswhich intolerance a failurea to to foundlactose,sugar due products. in is the It milk dairy and hydrolyses that sufficientproduce levels enzyme lactase, of the lactose into is It an norm. glucoselactose intolerancethe is galactose. and Globally Westernof example invading science. a perspective use ofThe years as many ful sidenot the are effects held morally responsibleconsequences work? their adverse heldmorally for of the Theoryof knowledge: International • • • • . y O) 2 (H x structuresmonosaccharides. of groups by making carbon and hydrogen implicit. making by groups (1.10) hydrogen and carbon richtransfer. biomolecules, centrala in role metabolic whichreactions play energy of in solution to form ring structures ring solution form in to consider the structural role of carbohydrates. (1.8) structural the carbohydrates. of— consider role ize understanding the stereochemistry of jections— understandingpro stereochemistry helpstructural cells.the their carbohydrates roles isHaworth in understanding to essential OH groups. OH tions – iza Carbohydrates- oxygen are cience: s Carbohydrates have the general the have Carbohydrates formulaC projections cyclic Haworth the represent group ketonea aldehyde an group (aldose)or Monosaccharidescontain either several and (ketose) formsof Straightchain cycl sugars between form monosaccharides formingdisaccharides c bonds and Glycosidi polysaccharides. sources used as are reserves.energy Carbohydrates and energy of formulas Deductionpolysaccharidesdisaccharides structuralfrom of and the monosaccharides. given and Relationshipfunctionsand monosaccharides of properties the of structures. polysaccharideschemical their to containinglinkage. ether an B.4 Carbohydrates Carbohydrates B.4 Natureof Constructmodels/visual focuspositionand of nature the on attached Obtainingevidence for scientific theories Understandings: • • • • • • • • Applications and skills: Applications Essential idea: Essential</p><p>Chemistry guide 127 Core topics ert food “ preparations preparations reducingsugars using or iodine Benedict’sFehling’s solution tests or to cane. curricular links: curricular - debate refers to the controversies arising from developments that div that developments from controversiesarising refers debate the to ” : Experiments: could include using cropsproduction from raisesThe : questions many of about biofuels distinguishsugars non - and reducing between Carbohydrates are used in are bindCarbohydrates to pharmaceutical the industry in carbohydrates of fermentation the Ethanolfrom is biofuel a as produced cropssugar such or corn as Aim6 solutionstarch.of forpresence the test to Aim8 intotablets. issuesThe related sustainability. such deforestation, soil erosion as and fuel vs agriculturalproduction.into biofuel crops Utilization: • • • • Syllabuscross and Topics— organic10.2 and 10.1 functional groups Topic— organic20.1 reactions Topic— stereoisomerism2 0.3 — biofuelsC.4 Option Biologytopic — carbohydrates 2.3 Aims: not not are specific disaccharides and the linkage the and specificdisaccharides forms and the structure of structure formsthe and cellulose - and β - ring forms of glucose and fructose are given in formsgiven ring of fructosethe are glucose and α - details of polysaccharides are not required. required. detailsnot polysaccharides of are The straight chain The and α booklet data in section 34. component The monosaccharidesof distinction The between required. B.4 Carbohydrates Carbohydrates B.4 Guidance: • • •</p><p>128 Chemistry guide Core topics tionof the s claim that that sclaim Publiccan bodies amin pills, has amin become curricular links: curricular - mindedness: - Experimentscould levelsof C include DCPIP the determination vitamin s. structure and physicaland — structure 4.3 and 4.2 properties : ucrative in many countries. in ucrative many umed foods, such as fluoride to water or iodine or salt? to water to foods, fluoride umed as such veryl do How limit freedom. their know is we individualwhat the protect best also but individual? forthe and society diseases supplements C coldcould common vitamin ledprevent to such the as Whatwidespread their use. of role the in scientific is communicating authority knowledgepublic? the to The food supplements industry, especially food The supplements saleindustry, the vit of protec deficiency VitaminD as resulta increasing, greater of partly is skin from sunlight. Whatcommonly to in addingethical the considerations supplements are cons Linuswinindividualman to Hi Prizes. two is Pauling Nobel only the Aim6 infood Utilization: Syllabuscross and Theoryof knowledge: International • • • • • Topic— organic10.1 functional groups Topic— configurational20.3 isomerism Biologyoption — human nutritionD.2 healthand Aims: Topics 4.1, ) is an example of scientists seeking a cause for specific observations. This of example resultedan for seekingcauseis a in observations. specific ) scientists d by by d ize vitalamines vitamins ( vitamins the discovery of discovery — the f deficiency diseases (eg scurvy and beriberi). and (1.8) diseasesfscurvy (eg deficiency Vitaminsorganic functionswith diverse micronutrients diet. are the obtainedbe from must that : cience: s Vitamins are organic micronutrients which (mostly) cann synthes be ot Vitaminsorganic which micronutrients are (mostly) fat) or of can itspredicted be solubility from vitamin a (water The structure. vitamins heat. sensitive Most are to affecta nd cause Vitamindeficiencies indiet particularthe millionsof diseases peopleworldwide. of ComparisonD. and A, structures C of vitamins the Discussiondeficiencies causeseffects in different vitamin of the of and solutions.countries suggestionand of provided in are bookletD and data the structures C The of section A, vitamins 35. names food diseasesSpecificor of have not do sources deficiency vitamins of learned. be to the body but but suitable obtainedfoodbe body from the must sources. Applications and skills: Applications Guidance: B.5 Vitamins Vitamins B.5 Natureof observations evaluatingMaking and claims explanation the o Understandings: • • • • • • • • Essential i dea Essential</p><p>Chemistry guide 129 Core topics and green chemistry in general. chemistry green and , lls to break up oilup break to spi biodegradable plastics in the environment. biodegradableplastics in environment. the and curricular links: curricular - biotics i mindedness: - Risk assessment, including the risks to the environment, is Riskessentialan including assessment, risks environment, the the to : Experiments: could of breakdown of include comparison the the : of development has The raised: science the of chemistry green nce of its its chemistry was green of term The firstnce in accepta coined and 1991, in education philosophyinlegislationand has many led developments to countries. countries inbanned isUse most its to due of DDT toxic effects pesticide the malaria in where continues, countries biomagnification.and however, Its use sa public challenge. remain major health Aim 6 biodegradablenon - and Aim6 of work. part all experimental Aim8 awarenessof ofethicaland implicationsscience environmental the using and technology. International • • • • • Utilization: Utilization: Syllabuscross and Topic forces — intermolecular 4.4 Topiccompounds syntheticand — natural 10.1 organic of impact Optionsplastics A.5 A.7and — environmental — ant D.2 Option Aims: is the responsibility of scientists to consider the ways in which products of their research and findingsand whichscientistsofis consider productsin responsibility research the negatively their ways of the to the production the releaseand to — it ize organisms. Our increasing has problems, led environmental Our several whileto knowledge helpingalso of solve to others. biochemistry cience: guest chemistry involves guestchemistry creation the molecules synthetic of host that s – Xenobiotics refer to chemicals that are found in an organism that are not not are Xenobioticsthat found referare chemicals to that in organism an present there. normally Biodegradable/compostableby down broken plastics or consumed can be living other bacteriaor Host enzymes of by some actions inthe selectivelymimic cells, by performed bindingsuchguestin specific to materials environment. species,the as toxic developedbeen have Enzymes help to in of breakdown the other and spills oil industrial wastes. efficiencyinenergy biological Enzymes can detergents enabling improve by temperatures. effectivecleaning lower at Biomagnificationfoodsubstancein in increase the concen a is a of tration chain. chemistry, also chemical to approach is Green called sustainable chemistry, an engineeringresearchand seeks that minim to of asDiscussionincreasinginxenobioticsproblem antibiotics such the of plants. sewagetreatment Descriptionin biodegradable starch plastics. of role the of the environment of environment the hazardous substances. B.6Biochemistry and the environment Natureof collaboration, ethical Riskconsiderations assessment, use the example, of inand biological For environment, enzymes the impact find to detergents this. counter to ways (4.8) Understandings: • • • • • • • • • Applications and s kills: Applications Essential idea: Essential</p><p>130 Chemistry guide Core topics ofa ” greenness “ guest chemistry should be on non - on be should guestchemistry – such as solvents are not expected. not suchsolventsare as ” guest chemistry to the the to of inremoval the pollutant specific a chemistry guest green chemicals green an example of biomagnification, chemical including source of example an the of environment. g the atom economy. economy. substanceinbiochemicalincludin research, used atom the g the substance. Examples could include heavy pesticides. substance. the or metals include heavy could Examples Applicationhost of – Descriptionof criteriaand in Discussionchallenges assessingthe the of Specificof names “ emphasis The of in explanations host covalentbonding within supramolecule. the Guidance: B.6Biochemistry and the environment • • • • •</p><p>Chemistry guide 131 Additional higher level topics 15/25 hours 15/25 making are often are making associated with particular iles, foodsbiodegradableand iles, beverages, and basecalculations curves pH and – a wide range of conditions. widea range effective metaphor but the the but is “inducedmodel an is fit” a effective metaphor key” in ow are are ow used metaphorsmodels and in construction the of and - curricular links: curricular - . - lock “ mindedness: - better model. H better knowledge ? placenames Technologies based on enzyme activity go backgo parts activity Technologiesancient to in times many based enzyme on of- Brewingcheese and world. the term The widelyused inare industrial Enzymes domesticand Examples applications. text includedetergents, biological plastics. Advances in protein engineering have led to the synthesis of enzymes ledsynthesis engineeringthe to have plastics.inenzymes of protein Advances effective are that Utilization: Theoryof knowledge: Syllabuscrossand International • • • Topic— chemical6.1 kinetics Topicsscale pH — the 8.4 a nd 8.3 8.1, acids basesand conjugate and Topics— acid 18.3 and 18.2 model for enzymes. (1.9) for enzymes. model ” inducedfit and the value of value the and the ) max V hypothesis to “ hypothesisto ” bygraphical means, explanationand of buffers buffers in solution. competitive inhibition of enzymes with inhibition competitive of enzymes scientists collaborate to synthesize new enzymes new synthesize control to to and desired (4.5) control). reactions collaborate waste(ie — scientists visspectroscopy calibrationa curve and - law. lockkeyand for an enzyme forenzyme an ) Lambert m – considerations K : Analysesconcentrationand of areas activity protein key of are biochemicalresearch. science Michaelis ( constant basedknownon standards. Inhibitors play an important role Inhibitorsof in important an regulatingplay activities the enzymes. acids Amino act proteinsand as can use Proteinassays UV commonly of rate reaction ( Determination of maximum the non - and Comparisoncompetitive of olicinhibition product Explanationconceptinmetab pathways. of the of solutions, in suchCalculationanalysis protein used as buffer of those pH the of inand reactions acids in solution.amino involving calibrationa of solutionDeterminationfrom of in protein a concentration the using curve Beer the referenceactive the site structure, protein site.to allosteric and itssignificance. Additional higher level topics Option B: BiochemistryOption B: B.7 Proteins and enzymes Proteins B.7 Natureof Theoriescan supersededbe — “ Collaborationethicaland Understandings: • • • • • • • • Applications and skills: Applications Essential idea: Essential</p><p>132 Chemistry guide Additional higher level topics damaging environmental environmental damaging heavy metal heavy ion concentration. logging experiments with temperature or logging pH experiments investigate to probes with temperature Many enzyme technologies enzyme Many help mitigate Experiments could include measuring enzyme activity Experimentscould with changingenzyme include measuring - Data : : : Aim6 and pH conditionstemperature, of Aim7 Aim8 oiland paper leather, industries. from effectsas chemicals, such of enzyme activity under activity different– enzyme conditions; modelling computer enzyme of or substrateinteractions. Aims: • • • values max V and m K competitive inhibitors competitive on equation is given in the data bookletequation is in in sectiongiven data the 1. Hasselbalch visspectroscopy, of wavelengthsisand reagents knowledge particular - not required. not The effects non - and The competitive of – Henderson The ForUV shouldcovered. be B.7 Proteins and enzymes Proteins B.7 Guidance: • • •</p><p>Chemistry guide 133 Additional higher level topics . whose me dual privacy and dualprivacy models and diffractionand models their discoveries concerning the molecular structure of structure molecular discoveriestheir the concerning rojectprogram was internationalan research "for enome P mindedness: - hat is the role of collaboration in advancing isknowledge? collaboration of role the hat goalmapping the was g enes complete to sequencingand in the the all of genome. human nucleicsignificanceliving acidstransfer itsforand material" in information W personal hasinformation. extent the of whichright to the to government access WhoknowledgeDNA? access to individual’sright the of has an The H uman G The in policies ofThe greatly foodslabelling the (GM) on modified genetically vary differentcountries. protected of international are organisms Most modified genetically by the Whatscientificand global the on have eco patents. nomy effect does this community? knowledge. not but stores DNA information Whatinformation knowledge? and differences the are between in Nobel Physiology Prize Crick, to or The jointly Medicinewas1962 awarded Watson and Wilkins existence The opens databases DNA questions up indivi of of ray diffraction ray functionsofexplanation forprovides known (3.7) DNA. - Theoryof knowledge: International • • • • • • • lace of — double helix from X ansferring DNA between species. between ansferringDNA nucleotidesequence. low improvements in apparatus lowimprovements organisms have genetic have material has that by altered been organisms hydrophobic components. hydrophobic DNA is DNA controlling geneticexpresses the that cell.itself by the proteins of synthesis material the by d by the cell the by d tripleta geneticcode, using known ascode, which the ize science: thymine, and a sugar ribosesugar a and thymine, in place deoxyribose. of Nucleotidesphosphoric condensation the products pentosea acid of are sugar, cytosine or (T) thymine nitrogenousa and base guan ine — adenine(G), (C), (A), uracil(U). condensation Polynucleotidesby form reactions. hydrogen polynucleotideisby DNA together doublea strands helix two held of bonds. is RNA uracilsinglea usually in contains that p chain polynucleotide sequence primary of the structure The ofdetermines proteins in bases DNA synthes universal. is Geneticallymodified of in DNA Explanationitsof interactions stability the between terms the of hydrophilicand DNA Explanationon charge negative of itsand origin the of the association within basic chromosomes. (histones) proteins Deductionin ofsequence strand ofcomplementary a a or DNA nucleotide the givena moleculefrom of poly RNA genetictr involving engineering techniques, B.8 Nucleic acids acids Nucleic B.8 Natureof problem.Scientists approaches of of solving example Scientificto good discovery a — the is same of the structure the different used method DNA of structure the develop to experiments (1.3) DNA. in scientific Developments researchfol Understandings: • • • • • • • • • Applications and skills: Applications Essential idea: Essential</p><p>134 Chemistry guide Additional higher level topics . of effective investigation failure intermolecular interactions intermolecular and model building model structure, DNA exercises and of , c base pairings between a purine and a pyrimidine.a and purine a between pairings cbase curricular links: curricular - base interactions luding forensics and paternity cases. widelyforensicsused paternity ludingin is It and also – The story of the rivalry between the different the between story of The : in the involved rivalry the teams Experiments: could cells from include extraction DNA and Databases: different from exist organisms sequences genetic of ethical knowledge our : ofraised questions by are Many human the ofproperties physical its includingspecifi the Knowledgeaspects legalofhas several transformed sequencing DNA of inc enquiry, humanand migration. studiesancestry of aspect sequencing DNA evolution.of study the of important an biochemical is Aim5 elucidationin structure ofof 1950s the is DNA a example an Aim6 Aim7 Aim8 including soa nd on. genome, cloning, genetic engineering, therapy, gene collaborationscientific during activities. communication and Biologystructure RNA and — DNA topics7.1 and 2.6 Aims: Syllabuscross and Utilization: • • • • • • hydrogen bonding, Topic— hydrogen 4.4 Topic— acid 8.1 ninga unitbase code determi - and deoxyribose sugars are deoxyribose and unitamino acid translationand Details are sequence. transcription of - given in booklet given data the in section 34. Explanation of how the complementary pairingExplanation bases between complementary the how of enables to DNA replicateitself exactly. concerns foods.Discussionmodified using of and benefits the genetically of Structuresof bases nitrogenous the ribose and of Knowledgeis RNA forms of required. not different the Detailsreplication DNA of process the of required. not are fourconcept expression Limit a of the to DNA of twenty not required. not Guidance: B.8 Nucleic acids acids Nucleic B.8 • • • • • •</p><p>Chemistry guide 135 Additional higher level topics plants enceof myoglobin. sensitizedcells solar . . curricular links: curricular 3+ - red colour is of red pres the to due largely meat mindedness: - d to Fe to d ize Artificial colours are commonly added during the commercial the during added Artificialcommonly and are preparation colours country, by food processinggreatly food.varies colours listapproved of The of whichinternationalforraises trade. questions interactionfoodan on appreciation Experimentsshow our isthat of based senses. our between different the do inHow giving us senses interact empirical knowledge world? the about resu lt the colour hair of are Differentin and differences the tones skin, of eye melanin. concentrationpigment the of generations have Peoplelived forhigh at altitude whosemany ancestors have with hemoglobin developed affinityfor higher a oxygen. purplish The - visible Anthocyaninsfor provide attract to carotenoids signalsand plants seedand for insectsdispersal. also pollination birdsand protect They caused by damage UVlight. from The change inThe cooking on ion iron colour brown becomes to as occurs the oxid Theoryof knowled ge: Syllabuscross and International • • • • • • Utilization: Topic— indicators8.2 Topic— complex13.2 ions — electronicC.8 Option - conjugationdye and d ize containingmacrocyclic are a reliablea of which means difficultand subjective wascolour, communicating previously are based data on to solublewidelydistributed pigments in plants. - soluble pigments, and are involved in involved are and lightpigments, harvesting in soluble Biological pigments include a variety of includeBiological structures chemical functionswith which diverse variety a pigments lighwavelengthsof absorbspecific t. cience: s Their specific ions Their metal on pH. and colour depends Biological pigments are coloured compounds produced byproduced compounds Biological coloured are pigments metabolism. colour with ofThe delocal systems ated highly to conjug is pigments due compounds, many and asPorphyrin myoglobin,such hemoglobin, chlorophyll chelates are with - nitrogen metals large cytochromes of withgroupsand group the contain Hemoglobin heme myoglobin porphyrin ion. iron(II) an to bound between contain Cytochromes heme ingroups interconverts which ioniron the iron(III)redoxand during iron(II) reactions. r wate Anthocyaninsaromatic, are lipid Carotenoidsare - light. susceptible are by photosynthesis. oxidation, catalysed to They shapeExplanationofsigmoidal dissociation oxygen curve hemoglobin’s the of of bindingin cooperative the terms of oxygen. to hemoglobin Discussionfactorsinfluence that of saturationthe of hemoglobin, oxygen pH re, and includingdioxide.carbon temperatu affinityDescriptionof foetalfor greater oxygen the of hemoglobin. ligan ds. electrons,absorption whichintense bands in have region. visible the Applications and skills: Applications B.9 Biological pigments pigments Biological B.9 Natureof of Usemeasurements of absorbance — quantitative data replicate.(3.1) Understandings: • • • • • • • • • • Essential idea: Essential</p><p>136 Chemistry guide Additional higher level topics of pigments from from ofpigments loggers for collecting for absorption loggersdata. Useof data : Experiments : could isolation include extraction the and : plantsources separatingand usefunnel solvents of using the anthocyanins or asindicators. pH Aim6 Aim7 Aims: • • carotenoidsand competitive inhibit competitive orof a oxygen binding. oxygen Explanation of the action of <a href="/tags/Carbon_monoxide/" rel="tag">carbon monoxide</a> Explanationas carbon of action the of factorsOutlineof stabilities the anthocyanins, of the affect that chlorophyllstructures. in relation their to indicatorsbased Explanationact to their on as anthocyanins of ability the of pH. to sensitivity light photosynthetic energy in functionpigments Descriptiontrapping of the of esis. photosynth during chromatography. thinand layer paper Investigationthrough of pigments B specificand heme structures of ofThe examples anthocyanins chlorophyll, carotenoidsand in booklet given data details the are in section other 35; of names required. not structures and pigment are bindingExplanation cooperative limitedbe in to should hemoglobin of inconformational it polypeptideone when becomes changes occurring oxygenated. changes isKnowledge ired. colour specificconditions ofwith requ changing not B.9 Biological pigments pigments Biological B.9 • • • • • • • • Guidance:</p><p>Chemistry guide 137 Additional higher level topics fats, - to one enantiomer. Chemical enantiomer. one to foodindustry. - : links curricular - mindedness: - : Ethical: use the trans and of through questions arise saturated particularly in the fastparticularlyin the Different countries have very Differentdifferentlabelling food have countries with respect standards of fatsof its to type the content, present. including chemical Aim8 Utilization: Syllabuscross and International • • Topic— organic10.1 functionalgroups Topic— organic20.1 reactions Topic— stereoisomerism20.3 A.4 — intermolecular/LondonOption forces Aims: living matter. (2.2) matter. living - trans and - cis ing (β). ing(β). configuration is orms occur most orms biochemistry involves — biochemistry chiral specific many molecules with activity biological form, but food but form, cis cis form. form. trans and a discussion of the advantages and advantages the fats,of discussion a and - trans he role of vitamin A in vision, including the roles of A includingin rhodopsinroles vision,the opsin, vitamin of role he Most biochemical Most processes moleculesonly involve and stereospecific certainof configuration are atoms. carbon with chiral cience: s Withacids L - the only exception,and one amino chiral, are occurring in fat unsaturated Naturally the mostly is the it processingcaninto convert ofof stereoisomers L and configuration refer D the to carbon chiral the sugars and ketone furthest group, or f aldehyde the D from atom frequentlyin nature. known dependingas α β, and isomers, Ring sugarsforms of whether on have (glucose)1 carbon at position or the group (fructose)2 carbon hydroxyl the of above plane the or r of (α) the liesplane the ring the of below interconversion of light the involves Visionactivated chemistry of isomers retinal. fats,of Descriptionpartialand hydrogenation unsaturated hydrogenation the of includingproduction the of disadvantagesof processes. these with comparison ofExplanation properties and structure and cellulose, the of starch. inand the Discussionmaterial importanceof structural the of as cellulose a diet. Outlineof t foundin proteins. B.10 Stereochemistry in biomolecules in Stereochemistry B.10 Natureof Theoriesused claims explain phenomena/evaluate to natural act as guidinga reactions chiralliving between distinction innon - environment and a Understandings: • • • • • • • • • Applications and skills: Applications Essential idea: Essential</p><p>138 Chemistry guide Additional higher level topics unsaturated fats unsaturated shouldb e - / trans cis - retinal. - trans and - cis and in visualof the involved cycle required. Names not enzymes the are and points melting Relative saturated of covered. B.10 Stereochemistry in biomolecules in Stereochemistry B.10 Guidance: • •</p><p>Chemistry guide 139 Core topics 15/25 hours 15/25 tionbased in Paris asedin Abu Dhabi, b , (IRENA) What influencepolitical the of is sful insun’s If sfulharnessing the energy. 3.2, 3.3, 3.5 and 3.6 3.6 and 3.5 3.3, — 3.2, . In . ways social, what might and cultural political, ) curricular links: curricular - energy density — energy ross mindedness: - Lord George Porter Lord George was founded in 2009 to promote increased adoption wasinfounded promote to 2009 sustainableand use ( , religious factors affect the types of research that are financedreligiousfactors of undertaken, an d affect types the are researchthat rejected? or pressure on differentpressureon knowledge? of areas The International Energy Agency International Energy The is organ autonomous an iza for affordable its whichenergy member 28 clean and works reliable, ensure to countries beyond. and Agency InternationalRenewable Energy The UAE geothermal sources ofhydropower, energy, (bioenergy, energy renewable ocean,solar windand energy). we that doubt no succesbe willhave “I weaponssolar had of centuries would were we sunbeams have war energy ago.” are ethical generation many There issues itsand energy raised consequent by contributionsclimate change. pollution and to Utilization: Utilization: Syllabusc and Topic— enthalpies5.1 combustion of Topiccombustion — the 10.2 of hydrocarbons systems societiesand Environmental topics Theoryof knowledge: International • • • • Physics topic 8.1 topic Physics us result from potential changes from kineticand us molecular the at result energy level. renewable renewable . renewable energy renewable 100 %</p><p> x</p><p> energy</p><p> energy</p><p> output input</p><p> total useful</p><p>. . = fuel fuel</p><p> from from</p><p> consumed</p><p> consumed</p><p> transfer</p><p> fuel</p><p> fuel</p><p> of</p><p> released released of</p><p> energy</p><p> mass volume energy energy</p><p> an = =</p><p> of </p><p>Societies are completely dependent on energy resources.energy quantityon dependent Societies The completely is of conversionquality the is but in conserved . any energy degraded are energy</p><p> density</p><p> cience: s effeciency : Energy</p><p>Energy Speci�ic The releases energy at a reasonable rate and producesand source reasonableAa at useful releasesrate energy energy pollution. minimal qualityis of assurroundings.The the to is heat d egraded energy transferred and concentrateda into from go Energy dispersed materials a The form. available of quantity for energy doing the decreases. work sources replenished. naturally - Non are Renewableenergy sources non - Discussionof of and renewable use the of different the fuelDeterminationdensityof specificand of from a energy energy the mass enthalpiesfuel.molar of the and combustion, of densities density or Discussionfuelinfluencedof isits choice the by how of energy specificenergy. sourcesfinite. are energy. Core topics Core Option C Essential idea: Essential C.1 Energy sources sources Energy C.1 Natureof changes— energy Usetheories explainphenomena to natural in around world the andhas quantity both Energy quality. (2.2) Understandings: • • • • • • • • • Applications and skills: Applications</p><p>140 Chemistry guide Core topics ensions. global context. Discussions of the possible energy sources provide opportunities forDiscussionssources opportunities provide energy possible the of densityenergy of The fuelsdifferent could be investigated production dim Energy has global economic environmental and : : Databases: statistics of scale can national and energy be global a on : The choices made in this area have moral and ethical and choices have The inmoral implications. this made area Aim1 within creativity scientificand a study Aim6 experimentally. Aim7 exploredhere. Aim8 Aims: • • • • process from appropriate Determination of the efficiency of an energy transfer ofDetermination of energy an efficiency the Discussion disadvantagesand energy advantages the different of the of sourcesC.8. to in through C.2 data. C.1 Energy sources sources Energy C.1 • •</p><p>Chemistry guide 141 Core topics ienceand national scale can national be distillation and catalyticand distillationcracking sm These abundant resources non - are experiments includeexperiments fractional curricular links: curricular - mindedness: - Many online calculators footprints. available are calculate to Many carbon Considerationfuelsdisadvantagesand advantages offossil of the : Possible : Databases: statistics of and energy global a on : : reactions. ssil fuel used by different choice foand by The countries availability, on fuel used ssil of depends economic,societal, factors.technologicaland environmental PON) are or used MON in (RON, fueldifferent systems Different rating countries. international drilling, Ocean oil issues pipelines are demand spills oil that and cooperationagreement. and Aim6 Aim7 exploredhere. Aim7 Aim8 implications environmental using illustrateseconomic the sc and of technology. International • • • • • • • Utilization: Syllabuscross and enthalpy changes Topicsof — enthalpy 5.3 and 5.1 combustion Topics— hydrocarbons20.3 and 10.1 isomeri and Topic optionand 10.2 — global C.5 warming cells — solar C.8 Option Biologytopic cycling— carbon 4.3 Aims: inengine,car a oal gasification c knocking ” “ branching on the octane the on branching and oxygen. and by fractional by distillation. ignite,which to leads sulfur total amount of gasesgreenhouse amount during producedtotal hydrocarbons. is the the is olecular structure and measured by the octane the measured and by olecular number. structure ide large the to due of of hydrocarbons. amounts nature energy chemical in bonds on. The energy offuels solar fossilfrom energy originates which chemical has by been stored processes time. over cience: idea: s human activities. expressedhuman is dioxide.carbon It of in equivalentgenerally tons Fossil fuels were formed by the Fossilby fuelscontain reduction formed that compounds of were biological nitrogen, hydrogen, carbon, is of cancomplex Petroleum a that mixture splitbe into hydrocarbons different called parts component fractions oil Crude needs before refined be to fractions different use. separated The are physicala by indistillation. process fractional of tendency The fuela - auto to by of performance The fuelshydrocarbons cracking the improved as is and reactions. catalyticreforming coal convert to that Coalchemical gasification are processes liquefaction and gaseousliquidand Afootprintcarbon Discussionlength chain and effect the of of crackingand and Discussion hydrocarbons of reactions reforming the of octane the number. explanationimprove these how processes reactions, Deductionfor of cracking reforming and equations number. liquefactiand ism to related renewable but prov but renewable Essential Essential Applications and skills: Applications C.2 Fossil fuels Fossil C.2 Natureof of science fuelsdevelopment collaborationand use — the technology. (4.1) fossilof hasScientificin role community key a the had and Understandings: • • • • • • • • • •</p><p>142 Chemistry guide Core topics impact impact their their etermination of carbon footprints for different activities. d eterminationand footprintsof burn for els different carbon Discussion of the advantages and disadvantages of the different fossil fuels.Discussionfossil disadvantagesand advantages the different of the of volatility and relative their fractionsIdentificationof petroleum, of various the uses. their different when Calculations atmosphere, dioxidecarbonthe the to added of fu cost of The fuelsof availabilityand fossil and (reserves) production shouldenvironment the on considered.be Guidance: C.2 Fossil fuels Fossil C.2 • • • •</p><p>Chemistry guide 143 Core topics ernationalcollaboration. collaboration between many countries many between to collaboration aims and curricular links: curricular ead to a reductiona to ead infission gasgreenhouse emissions. Nuclear - nuclear fusion — nuclear e that fusion that e source of energy future. isthe an mindedness: - Considerationof impact illustratingenergy environmental of nuclear the Computer animations Computer nuclearand simulationsand decay, radioactive of : : energy particle researchintinvolves energy physics - There are accelerator facilities are labSLAC, Fermi and There DESY, CERN, at scientists Results by shared and Brookhaven. disseminated inare many countries. demonstrat The use of nuclear energy is monitored internationally by the internationally is by use International ofThe monitored energy nuclear Agency. AtomicEnergy High project ITER is The a Whocarries use risks ofThe should benefits. well energy as as nuclear responsiblebe forultimately know is assessing what best these?we do How individual? forthe and society ation: Aim7 fissionfusionand reactions. Aim8 Theoryof knowledge: Utiliz Syllabuscross and Aims: International • • • • • • Topic— isotopes2.1 ofTopicemission — the hydrogen 2.2 spectrum 7.2 topic Physics - lives. - . U by neutron by U energy. Fission involves the splitting of a large unstable nucleus into smaller stable smaller Fission nucleussplitting nuclei.the into unstable large a of energy. involves 238 un is the source of much of the energy needed for life on Earth. There are are many needed for There on Earth. un is technological life energy the in of source the challenges much of is produced from isfrom produced s as increases binding the this energy , idespread use of nuclear fissionproduction usewould forl of idespread energy nuclear the composition the stars of ion se → X + Y neutrons. Y X + → + U 92 236 The fuThe nucleiofinsion s the hydrogen → n 1 0 cience: idea: + s life is the time it takes for half the number of half decay. to it for takes atoms number the is life time the - U U undergoes a fission chain reaction: chain fission a undergoes U Pu, used as a fuel in “breeder reactors” fuelPu,usedin “breeder as a 92 235 per nucleon. per sustaining. Light nuclei can undergo fusion reactions as this increases the binding energy Lightbinding reactionsthe nuclei fusion canenergy undergo as increases this nucleon. per source as Fusionfueland inexpensive the reactions isenergy promising a are radioactiveno and waste abundant, is produced. ana ly to Absorptionused spectra are nuclei fission can Heavy undergo react 235 self be fuelto ofcritical forThe isreaction the mass the needed mass 239 contain Radioactivehalfwaste may isotopes long short and with Half capture. Essential Essential it but would offer of replicating richa source Earth on process this C.3 Nuclear fusion and fission fusion Nuclear C.3 Natureof Assessingscientificethics the of research — w nuclearand isbomb atomic the (4.5) fusion taking process the in inplace hydrogen bomb. the that Understandings: Nuclearfusion • • • • • • • • • Nuclearfission </p><p>144 Chemistry guide Core topics the implications the technology.and science using of lives. - binding energy per nucleon. per energy binding are given are in section of1 data the 2 𝜆𝜆 ln</p><p>=</p><p>2 1 𝑡𝑡 and</p><p>𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆 − equations forfusion reactions. equations 𝑒𝑒 0 𝑁𝑁 and the the usedand be in may fuelspossibilitynuclear that </p><p>= 𝑁𝑁 Constructionnuclear of Explanationof fusionnucleon. inper energy reactions terms binding of including helium, and Explanationspectra hydrogen of absorption atomic the of relationships the lines transitions. the electron and between Deductionfissionoffor reactions. equations nuclear of Explanationfissionin reactions terms of Discussiondisposaland storage waste. the of nuclear of of integral involving numbers half problems decay Solution radioactive of fission recall Studentsexpected not specific are to reactions. workings required. not plantThe o fare power r nuclea a associated health,Safety problems issueswith nuclearrisk and wasteinclude: , meltdown core and nuclearweapons. equations, The booklet. Guidance: Nuclearfission C.3 Nuclear fusion and fission fusion Nuclear C.3 and skills: Applications Nuclearfusion • • • • • • • • • • •</p><p>Chemistry guide 145 Core topics multiplebonds. Solar energy nowledge? k reas ofreas a were dismissed as the results are not reproducible. not dismissed are as results the were consumers and energy companies consumersbeing energy and are ” , obtain replicable sciences? in Are results natural the obtain However curricular links: curricular - Transesterificationoil,wastereduce could reactions,cooking with waste : The conversion of solar energy is important in a number of is conversion different inimportant The : energy number a solar of Experiments : could fermentation include those photosynthesis, involving : The claims of “cold fusion of “cold claims The Aim2 technologies. Aim6 transesterification.and Aim8 excellentproduce and biofuels. Isit always possible to in reproducibleother results possible Theoryof knowledge: • • • • Utilization: Utilization: Syllabuscross and Topicenthalpies— bond 5.3 of Topic— mechanism 20.1 nuclear substitution reactions Biology topic — photosynthesis 2.9 Aims: s are converted converted s are alternative energy source. alternative (5.2) energy an OH 1 + R + 2 2 2 + 6O+ 6 O RCOOR 12 H  6 OH OH 2CO+ 5 C H 2 OH s converts light energy into chemical energy: i 2 mainly comprising of alkyl esters and glycerol, but with some fatty comprising with but ofsome mainly esters glycerol, and alkyl 2C O  O Visiblecanlightbyabsorbed be moleculeshave that conjugateda structure with extendedan system of alternating single and 2 + R +  1 6 cience: + 6H O idea: yst produces a different ester: produces yst different a s 2 12 H 6 Fermentation of Fermentation usedglucose produces as can biofuel:ethanola which be C content of Energy of fueloils that not isto vegetable are diesel similar they but usedviscous. enginestoo in internalare ascombustion they alcoholan and ester an acidTransesterification strong a base or with between catal transesterification the In process, alcoholan reactiona involving with in the base,oil triglyceride the vegetable presenceacid strong of or a mixture a to produces oilsTransesterification methanol or withviscosity with ethanol lower can that usedbe in diesel engines. acids. Light can be absorbed by chlorophyll and other pigments pigments other and withconjugated Lightchlorophyll a can by absorbed be electronic structure. Photosynthes moleculesIdentification visibleabsorb to featuresof allow that light. the them of 6CO RCOOR harnessing the sun’s energy is a current area of area challengesresearchand sun’sis — harnessingccurrent a remain. understanding the energy still </p><p>• • • • • Essential Essential in chemicalphotosynthesis. to canenergy converted be Applications and skills: Applications C.4 Solar energy energy Solar C.4 Natureof Publi as use of make to encouraged energy solar Understandings: • • •</p><p>146 Chemistry guide Core topics Explanation of the reduced viscosity of esters produced with methanol and methanol of Explanationesters viscosity reduced with producedthe of ethanol. of disadvantagesan d Evaluationof of biofuels. advantages the use the Deductionforof transesterification reactions. e quations system conjugated with a Only alternating covered. be double to bonds needs C.4 Solar energy energy Solar C.4 • • • • Guidance:</p><p>Chemistry guide 147 Core topics ure of ure the the een radiation and entering libria i curricular links: curricular - baseequ – mindedness: - The equilibrium between The aqueous dioxide gaseousand carbon could be : equilibrium systems — equilibrium 17.1 and I ntergovernmentalPanel(IPCC) and Change Climate on Protocol Kyoto the whichwas extended in Qatar. mmunity working Thisresearch to issue international the involves together co mmunity includeSuch attempts effects the reduce and warming. global of people questionquestion climateofSome motives change,the reality the and do problem.How the ofassess we “exaggerated” scientists have who the of evidencecollected used models the and human predict to impact the activities? Aim6 experimentally investigated. experimentally Theoryof knowledge: Utilization: Utilization: Syllabuscross an d spectra Topic — infrared 11.3 Topic— transition13.2 complexes metal Biologychange topic — climate 4.4 transfer energy — thermal 8.1 topic Physics Aims: International • • • Topics7.1 Topic— acid 8.2 arth average show clear correlation average temperature arth surface the wide but variations in temperat eports of the Intergovernmental Panel Climateon (IPCC). (5.2) Change of eports Intergovernmental the wavelength wavelength — r levelsand E 2 explanations to the public explanationsthe to wavelength radiation from the Earth. Some of radiation from wavelength Some Earth. the radiated back radiated Earth. to - equilibriumconcentration between of atmospheric re globalwarming — the study of global warming encompasses of study — the of warming range global (4.1) broad a concepts ideasand transdisciplinary. is and Gases in the atmosphere that producedare human by activities are changing climate the as upsetting they are the balance betw heterogeneous : cience: i dea s the absorbedradiation the is dioxidecarbon dioxidecarbon aqueousand in oceans. the radiationlonger the absorb but Greenhouse gases Greenhouse allow passage the short incoming of solar is a There gases Greenhouse radiation isIR absorb inas dipole there change a moment asleculestretch bonds the bend. and in mo the reflect Particulatesas suchdustand smoke they cause as dimming global sunlight,clouds. as do which by greenhouse Explanationmechanisms gases molecular the of absorb infraredradiation. relationship the for increased the between evidence the of Discussion concentrationgases of warming. global and abundanceof effects and Discussion sources, different relative the of gases.greenhouse dio xideapproaches Discussioncontrol the to carbon of different the of emissions. eaving the atmosphere. the eaving l Essential Essential Applications and skills: Applications C.5Environmental impact Natureof Transdisciplinary of Collaboration significance and science causeand Correlation understandingand scienceof — CO occurredfrequently in past. have the (2.8) Earth Understandings: • • • • • • • •</p><p>148 Chemistry guide Core topics greenhouse effect.greenhouse Computer Computer modellingis can powerfula knowledge be which tool by raiseDiscussions awareness of chemistry change green and climate of : : Aim7 gained the about Aim8 ethical, the implications economic science environmental and using of and technology. • • . . 2 O and COand O 2 , H , 4 globalwarming — Discussionocean the increased to due inof changes concentration pH of dioxidecarbon in atmosphere. the gases Greenhouse consideredbe to CH are Guidance: C.5Environmental impact • •</p><p>Chemistry guide 149 Additional higher level topics 15/25 hours 15/25 sequivalent in ofareas different globe? the me : links curricular - the relationship between electrical power, voltage, resistance voltage, and electrical relationship between — the power, mindedness: he conversionhe in a electricity to chemicalof important is energy - : T : leadfactors of – acidvoltage The the : cella the and battery affect that alenergy. number of different number technologies. Are battery recyclingbattery Are program have a primarily vocabulary Doesdescriptivescientific an language or and and “electric function? current” resistance” “internal terms interpretative the Are or accuratemetaphors? descriptions reality of Aim2 Aim6 couldinvestigated be experimentally. Utilization: Utilization: Syllabuscrossand International • • • • Theoryof knowledge: Topicreactions— redox 9.1 Topic— electrochemical19.1 cells cells concentration Biologynerve are topic discussedin — muscle6.5 biology and cells 5.3 topic Physics current Aims: rs asrs fuel. the wate ted by its by internal ted standard conditions. reactions in a fuel cell. - can be used to calculate the potential of </p><p>, 𝑄𝑄 ln m itdepends m on their quantity.</p><p>� 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 �</p><p>− 0 𝐸𝐸</p><p> depends primarily on the nature of the materials used while = 𝐸𝐸</p><p> redox reactions can be used as a source of electricity but disposal of batteries has environmental consequences. — redoxcansourcea disposal reactionsbut environmental used be electricity of batteries as of (4.8) has Chemical energy from from reactionsredox usedbe Chemicalas source can portable a of energy electric </p><p> cience: cell in an electrochemical cell, under non - s total work that can be obtained fro : Energy the the a half Anfiniteresistanceit for electrochemicalcelltakes time internal the to due has of current cella maximum ionsThe limi is diffuse. to The voltage of a battery cell primary a In electrochemicalthe reaction is Rechargeable reversible. not using can electricity.that cellsreversed reactionsbe redox involve chemical containedfuel inA fuel convert energy, a is cell that can usedbe to directly electrical consumed, to energy. are possiblea source Microbialfuel using sustainablecells energy (MFCs) substrates differentor in present wastecarbohydrates The Nernst equation, the but electro same desThe the concentrationcellin are concentration a the of different. are anode and electrolytesolutions cathode the at cells. Distinctionprimary and fuel between cells electrodeDeduction the for of equations half resistance. Essential idea: Essential C.6 Electrochemistry, rechargeable batteries and rechargeable and batteries Electrochemistry, fuelC.6 cells Natureof problems Environmental Understandings: • • • • • • • • • Applications and skills: Applications Additional higher level topics Option C</p><p>150 Chemistry guide Additional higher level topics impact of impact al especially especially ons using of , ionenvironment the of Appreciat coulddiscussed.be , isposal of primary batteries isposaluse can chemicals the and introduce primary of they Bacterial fuel cells use substrates found in waste water as foundBacterialfuel substratesthe water in fuel waste cells and use : Consideration : disadvantagesand advantages of of the different the D : : cadmium and leadand pollution. cadmium Aim8 sources shows energy economic implicatithe environmental and scienceaspects fuelenvironmental cells technology.and The of to withregard methanol Aim8 pollution land water and problems. Aim8 clean up the environment. socan usedbe the up clean to • • • equations and equations - M) fuelM) cells. ) H ) of a fuel cell. /Δ G cadmium (NiCad) battery and (NiCad) the battery cadmium – hargeable batteries. batteries. hargeable ) under anaerobic under ) conditions. - COO 3 exchange membrane (PE d be considered.be d alvanic)cells in connected series. g isin booklet sectiongiven data the 1. in workings of rechargeable and fuelofincluding and rechargeable cells diagrams workings equations. - speciesof cells for in can some to example, used bacteria, be acid storage battery, the nickel the acidbattery, storage ion battery shoul ionbattery the ethanoate ions ethanoate the (CH – ize lithium oxid Comparisonfuel between cellsrec and of Discussionsize,terms mass of types inof advantages the cells of different voltage. and equation. Nernst Solution using problems of the C alculationefficiency (Δ thermodynamic the of Explanation the of half relevant and should up as considered electrochemicalbe source portable a A battery made voltaic ofmore ( or one equation Nernst The Hydrogen and methanol should be considered as fuels for fuel cells. The operation of cells the under acid and alkaline conditions should be considered. Students should be familiar with proton - Geobacter The lead – The Studentswithcathodeand anode the familiar half should be usescells. different the of Guidance: C.6 Electrochemistry, rechargeable batteries and rechargeable and batteries Electrochemistry, fuelC.6 cells • • • • • • • • • • •</p><p>Chemistry guide 151 Additional higher level topics and Should are anomalous and anomalous are 6 striveslimit to spread the peacefulpurposes. Agency How reliable How these predictions? are experts in the search for knowledge? for in search the experts ntermolecular forces ntermolecular in UF peacefulnon - or advances.I There are disputes about whether some countries disputes are some are whether about There curricular links: curricular - nuclear fusion — nuclear mindedness: - the different — the are discussed energy polices nuclear in to attitudes and re is re likelihood no power the tap will of humans that ever atom.” the structure and bondingand — structure 4.3 and 4.1 s oftechnology. this for developingnuclear energy scientists be held morally responsible forscientistsofapplications the morally discoveries?eir th held be of area scientific any knowledgeIs there is pursuit the which of morally unacceptable? There are only only of small are very a nuclear countriesdeveloped There number have that weaponsInternational the and Atomic Energy Island Mile Nuclearglobala incidents have effect; accidents the Three at “The can How Physics the (Robert Millikan,1928). in quoted 1923 Nobel Laureate of impact predicted? technologies new be are opinions the important How of release infission during ofThe cantimes reactions used be peaceenergy to also but energy, generate can of lead destruction to war. in time Chernobyl and the problems the and Chernobyl could caused Fukushima tsunami at a be by potential the discussed dangers. illustrate to Utilization: Utilization: Syllabuscross and Theoryof knowledge: International • • • • Topic reactions Topic— first16.1 order 7.2 topic Physics Geography resourcessections in guide the leus energy energy – life related to to related life - teinmass Eins the the ng natureng of radiation the it ion izi . 2 1 2 𝑡𝑡 ln</p><p> energy required to required nuc a separate energy proportionalof root square the to the = 𝜆𝜆 ). ). Thesefree radicals caninitiatechain · . 2 ) is ) the E 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 . = 𝐸𝐸 our understanding of nuclear processes came from both theoretical both understanding offrom our processes came nuclear experimental and ) is ) of d ifference the nucleus the and mass the between — m ), and hydroxyland (HO ), - 2 Graham’s Law) Graham’s : Large : canquantities small obtainedbe quantities from energy of matter. of cience: s produces which leads to the productionfree ofproduces radicals suchwhich the to oxygen leads as superoxide(O The mass defect mass The (∆ of sum the individualmasses the itsof nucleons. nuclear (Δ bindingThe energy mass the inproducedenergyfrom canfissiona The calculated be reaction differenceproducts the between reactants and using hexafluoride in different uranium The isotopes uranium of can separated, be usingcausing fuelcentrifugation diffusion or enrichment. effusion The isgasa of inversely rate halfRadioactive process is decay firsta order with kinetically the the to due ofdangers are The nuclear energy intoneutrons. and protons ( molar mass the decay constantequation the decay the by reactions that can damage DNA and enzymes in living enzymes reactionsand DNA cells. can that damage equivalencerelationship Essential i dea Essential Nuclearfission: C.7 Nuclear fusion and nuclear fusion Nuclear C.7 fission Natureof discrepanciesand Trends trends. follow not do (3.1) normal the Understandings: Nuclearfusion: • • • • • • •</p><p>152 Chemistry guide Additional higher level topics Computer animations Computer nuclearand simulationsand decay, radioactive of fusionConsiderationdisadvantagesand advantages of of the nuclear : : : Aim7 fissionfusionand reactions. Aim8 implications environmental using illustrateseconomic the science and of and can also usereactionsbomb be technology.fusion ofThe in hydrogen the discussed. Aims • • to to , 2 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 𝐸𝐸 in terms of bonding and interms insection 1. 6 life. - and UF and 2 energy equivalence relationship energy , equivalence relationship energy determine to – – andskills: kings required. not plant are of power nuclear a structure. structure. determine the energy producedenergy the in determine fusiona reaction. the energy produced inenergy the fissiona reaction. Calculationof bindingand nucleus.a energy defect mass the of ApplicationEinstein the of mass ApplicationEinstein the of mass of properties DiscussionUO different the of Solutionradioactive involving h alf problems of law ExplanationGraham’s effusionof between the and relationship the of kinetictheory. of law. Graham’s rate Solutionrelative the on effusion problems of using fission recall Studentsexpected not specific are to reactions. wor The associated health,Safety problems issueswith nuclearrisk and waste,include: fuels possibility the usedand be weapons. in nuclear that nuclear may in booklet data the law Graham’s of given is effusion relationships Decay in booklet sectiongiven data the 1. are in is in curve bookletA sectiongiven data the binding36. in energy C.7 Nuclear fusion and nuclear fusion Nuclear C.7 fission Applications Nuclearfusion: • • • • • • • • • • • • • Nuclearfission: Guidance:</p><p>Chemistry guide 153 Additional higher level topics loggers. both of these of both sensitized solar sensitized cell and illustrates the transdisciplinary nature of nature illustrates transdisciplinary the , nanoparticles 2 d solar cell (DSSC). cell solar d sensitize curricular links: curricular - mindedness: - The properties The using of data can bestbe DSSCs investigated : Students : could inexpensivean build - dye : investigate their photovoltaic properties. investigatephotovoltaic their The harnessing could The fortunessolarofchange energy economic the of countriesofwithland. suppliesgood sunlight unusedand similarities useful has How some issystem Astring. conjugated with violina WhatWhat reasons thisu nderlying similarities? the for are metaphor? these metaphorsand models do role in play acquisition the knowledge? of Aim6 Aim7 Theoryof knowledge: Utilization: Syllabuscross and International • • • • patterns in ionization energy Topicenergy in — patterns 3.2 ionization Topicreactions— redox 9.1 Biologytopic synthesis — photo 2.9 Aims: - the the and type and p and type based - ncreaseseffective the sensitized solar sensitized cell. semiconductor. 2 absorbing dye i absorbingdye - sensitized solar cells (DSSC) cells sensitized solar - convertedin electricity to photovoltaica cell. sensitizeduse makes and photosynthesis ofmimics solar cell, whose TiO operation lar energy is converted to electrical energy the light must be absorbed and charges must be separated. In a photovoltaica In separated. be Whencell must chargesand absorbed be iselectrical to light the converted energy must energy so lar - dye — a cience: idea: s Moleculeslightabsorb systems with wavelength. longer conjugated longer of semiconductora increaseselectrical increaseThe an conductivity of in with whereas temperature conductivity the of decreases. metals conductivity of The increasedbe doping n - produce to can silicon by can be Solarenergy Electrons in which are energy. DSSCs harnessway the plants imitate solar excitedan from into"injected" TiO the molecule directly use ofThe with light nanoparticles coated of structure Relation degree the between conjugation in molecular the Explanationof- photovoltaic the operation the dye of and ExplanationincreaseDSSCs. of efficiency the nanoparticles how of the to Discussion siliconof compared advantages the of DSSC the type semiconductors. type of to surfacerange wider a visible the light allowsmore and over area spectrum absorbed. be wavelength of wavelength light the absorbed. Essential Essential processes occur in the silicon semiconductor, whereas these processes occur in separate locations - insemiconductor, these processesdye whereas a separate processes occur in silicon in the occur Applications and skills: Applications C.8 Photovoltaic cells and cells Photovoltaic dye C.8 Natureof Transdisciplinary biology.and (4.1) sciencechemistry link the and between by produced swere cell voltaic of level Fundingfunding— the of source the and fundingtype first the conducted.ofbe researchto is e Th crucialthe in regarding decisions used later only Earth. on were (4.7) NASA for and probes space Understandings: • • • • • • • • • •</p><p>154 Chemistry guide Additional higher level topics are are type type tzelDSSC should be . ä ─ Gr ionsI to newer ─ 3 /I 2 typesemiconductors inclusion a of d solard cell. sensitized solar cells (DSSC) cells sensitized solar - ize 3 element. In n - In element. 3 sensit Anis example reduction the I of 5 element provides element 5 electrons. extra photovoltaiccell. lativeconductivitysemiconductors and metals re of The should to related be ionizationenergies. of simplea treatment p - of In operation the Only iscells the needed. photovoltaica In in isseparated cell the light the charge s the and absorbed separation processes The charge and conductor. absorption of semi silicon Specificreactionselectrodeand redoxin the semiconductors,introducing electronby smallcreated ina holes crystal the are ofe percentag group a group - in separated dye a covered. C.8 Photovoltaic cells and cells Photovoltaic dye C.8 Guidance: • • • •</p><p>Chemistry guide 155 Core topics 15 /25 hours 15 names. Are names simply labels simply names Are names. made commercially made available. Whenacceptable deceive to it is ethically by different different by tests. blind many limitations reach. and impact their many to mindedness: - The development of development The : medicines new in collaboration iswith done often There have advancesbeen There : pharmaceuticals,of but in development the or do they influence they do of or ways other knowing? our In some countries available some In only certain with are drugsprescription in while counter. the countries available other are drugs over these same can identifiedbe drug same The trials Drugs use double people? Whobe responsible risksAll shouldbenefits.well carry drugs as as ultimately their foralso but bodiesassessingthese? limit Public can individual the protect know we do what How freedom. is individual? forthe and society best Aim9 are there Aim10 biologistsphysicists. and Theoryof knowledge: Aims: International • • • • • • drug and the site the and drug a drug for of drug a 50% of he a drug for of drug a 50% the ctivedose for of 50% the of administered dosage that reaches the target reaches target the dosage administered that </p><p> addictionsideand of effects considerations are drug ). ). ) divided by the minimum effective divided by ) minimum the dose for of 50% the ) divided by the effethe dividedby ) minimum LD50 medicines and drugs go through a variety of tests to determine their effectiveness and safety before they are are of beforevariety a effectivenesstheir they through go drugs and tests — medicines safety and determine to ED50 TD50 ED50 variety of Medicinesa variety have drugsdifferent and functioningof effects body. the the on cience: receptor interactions receptor based of structure the on are t s – ges between the minimum of rapeuticthe minimum range the window is dosa gesthe between : Medicinal chemistry population( ofactivity. the population the ( In animal studies, animal In lethaltherapeutic isthe index dose the therapeutic the index humans, In is toxic the dose The of produce that amounts medically drug the desired the effect a and unacceptableeffect. adverse Dosage,tolerance , administration. fractionBioavailabilityofis the the body. of part human the of steps identifying main syntheticin the The development the include drugs synthesis, structure, and need yield extraction.and Drug population( population( Essential idea: Essential D.1 Pharmaceutical action productsPharmaceutical D.1 and drug Natureof Risksbenefits and Pharmaceuticalclassified products forare potential. use their (4.8) abuse and Understandings: • • • • • • • Core topics Core Option D</p><p>156 Chemistry guide Core topics minimum. a respectively) should keptbe to respectively) 50 /ED 50 TD and 50 /ED 50 Discussion of experimental foundations forDiscussionfoundations therapeutic and index experimental of studies. animal both windowthrough human and methods. Discussionadministration drug of medicinaland Comparisonfunctionalpolarity groups, of administration can how affectbioavailability. ethical stste For economicand lof reasons, human and anima (for drugs LD Guidance: D.1 Pharmaceutical action productsPharmaceutical D.1 and drug and skills: Applications • • • •</p><p>Chemistry guide 157 Core topics luencean does . Fleming’s discovery Fleming’s . discovery ) ylic acid from bark ofbark from willow acid ylic experts. What inf LouisPasteur ( curricular links: curricular - mindedness: - minded attitude have minded on perceptions? our n is used in many different across ways inglobe. the many used is n Aspiri disease that first changedThe way acrossthe was treated antibacterial the globe. we do How pain, ways. perceive how and inDifferentdifferent act painkillers ways perceptions other the of our in are by fluenced knowing? favours prepared the “Chance mind.” only of penicillin is often described as significanceofserendipitous isof described penicillin often the but his been observationswould non - have missed by open - International • • • • Theoryof knowledge: Utilization: Syllabuscrossand Topic— yield1.3 of reaction Topic— functional10.2 groups Biologytopic — defence6.3 infectious against disease linkingcell walls. bacterial the of - in prevention of the recurrence of recurrence the of inprevention , the discovery — the of (1.4) penicillin Fleming. Sir Alexander by part of part penicillins. of structure core the chain results in penicillins that are more resistant more chain the to are in that results penicillins Natural products potent Natural produce to safer altered can or chemically be medicinal with more medicines.useful properties lactam ring is ring lactam a cience: s : : ever. Mild analgesics functionanalgesics intercepting Mild source, the at pain by the often stimulus interfering pain, by swelling with production the or substances of cause that f salicylic from Aspirinacid.prepared is Aspirinas can anticoagulantan used be fungi. Penicillinsby antibiotics are produced A- beta antibiotics cross Some preventing by work Modifyingside the - penicillinaseenzyme. heart attacks heart as strokesand prophylactic. a and Essential idea: Essential Penicillin D.2 Aspirin and penicillin D.2 Aspirin Natureof scientificand Serendipity discovery drugs natural observations replicationMaking and from isolated,be modified and to need salic sources.example, — many data of identified For (1.8) forfever. tree relief pain of and Understandings: Aspirin • • • • • • •</p><p>158 Chemistry guide Core topics : Experiments: could aspirin. includeof synthesis the Discuss: forof animals. antibiotics use/overuse the Aim6 Aim8 Aims: • • - the over the chainpenicillins. of he sidehe - lactam ring on the action the on ring lactam penicillin. of of the ability of acidic (carboxylic) and basic (amino) ability the basicof and (amino) acidic of (carboxylic) for example soluble example for aspirin. , ynergistic effectswith ynergisticalcohol. aspirin of penicillin. prescription of Descriptionsalicylicas analgesics. mild derivatives use the its of and of acid salicylic from Explanationofsynthesis includingacid, yield, purity aspirin the of recrystallization using by point. melting and IR characterization and Discussions the of can Discussionchemicallybe increaseinto modified salta aspirin the how to of facilitatesitsthis how and itsaqueous solubility bioavailability. Discussionmodifying t chemically of effects the of Discussionimportanceeffects of compliance of the of the and patient of Explanationimportance - beta the the of Studentsshould aware be ionic form to groups salts booklet Structuresin inof sectiondata the available penicillinand are aspirin 37. Penicillin Guidance: D.2 Aspirin and penicillin D.2 Aspirin and skills: Applications Aspirin • • • • • • • • •</p><p>Chemistry guide 159 Core topics vatives vatives tions of iza D visual D - ular links: ular curric - mindedness: - Use computer animations Use: computer forinvestigation the 3 of drugs and receptor sites. receptor and drugs Many illegal drugs are cultivated or produced in a small number of illegal producedin countries smalla Many or number cultivated are drugs sold then and viewpoints globally. differ distributed and Cultural ecoand nomic opiates production the on world. the sale and around of perspectives any Is ideas. and there Culturesclashoften different over knowledgeof which independent culture? is Aim7 Theoryof knowledge: Utilization: Syllabuscrossand International • • • Topic— functional10.2 groups Aims: of using morphine and itsand morphine using of brain barrier dep ends barrier brain chemicalitson sites the in preventing brain, the opium and its many derivatives have been used as a painkiller in a variety of forms for thousands of years. One of have One itsand used been derivatives theseforms forof as — opium deri many painkillera thousands in years. variety of a Potent medical drugs prepared by chemical Potentmedical by substances become and canprepared drugs modification addictive be products natural of abuse. of subsequentrelationships cience: s structure and solubility in water and lipids.solubilityand and structure in water The ability The of blood the cross to – drug a narcotic natural opium the Opiatesare from poppy. analgesics derived are that codeineand used are Morphine asanalgesics Strong analgesics. strong work bonding receptor to temporarily by the to related Medicalof properties are compounds use addictive and opiate presenceinbrain. the of receptors opioid morphine. Explanationofsynthesisfrom diamorphine and codeine the of Descriptionofanalgesics. strong use explanationthe and of (heroin). codeine of Comparisonstructures diamorphine and of morphine, the Discussiondisadvantagesand advantages the of addiction compounds. Discussionsideopiateand to effects of of potency Explanationcomparedmorphine to increased diamorphine the of solubility.and basedchemical their on structure Structurescodeine of can in found be data diamorphine the and morphine, bookletin section 37. transmission of pain impulses without depressing the central nervous system. nervous transmissioncentral painwithout of depressing impulses the as analgesics. strong derivatives Essential idea: Essential Applications and skills: Applications Guidance: D.3 Opiates Opiates D.3 Natureof itsand Data is(3.1) diamorphine. Understandings: • • • • • • • • • • •</p><p>160 Chemistry guide Core topics curricular links: curricular - increase the stomach pH by neutralizing increaseby reducing pH stomach the its or secretion. mindedness: - : Experiments: could testvarious to of effectiveness the include titrations erent cultures (ie diet, lifestyle, etc) and genetics can affectforgeneticsand etc) canpH need the diet, (ie lifestyle, cultures erent Diff regulationstomach. of the do utilize we problem.How different Sometimes approaches solve to same the decide we evidence approaches?competing and between Aim6 antacids. Theoryof knowledge: Utilization: Syllabuscross and International • • • Topic— calculations1.3 solutions involving Topics— neutralization 8.4 and 8.2 Topic— functional10.2 groups Topic— enantiomers 20.3 acid B.7 — amino Option buffers Biologyoption — digestion D.1 Aims: receptor antagonists pump inhibitors receptor proton production the or of which acid.prevent stomach (2.8) - 2 orH , Hasselbalchequation. esomeprazole can esomeprazole foundbe booklet data the in in and Excess stomach acid is a common problem that can be alleviated by compounds that canacid that problem that compounds Excessalleviatedbe isby stomach common a cience: s specificassuchthoseuse to the work antacids,that of are reactions, - section37. Non Activeactive the forms of metabolites are after processedbeen drug a it has by body. the use the of by reduced Explanationin can stomach ity the acid be excess how of differentbases. Constructionforbalancingand of neutralization reactions the equations and stoichiometricapplication of equations. these – SolvingHenderson the using buffer problems Explanationcan usedbe to such compounds ranitidine how of as (Zantac) acid inhibitstomach production. (Prilosec) Explanation esomeprazole and like compounds omeprazole how of can usedbe suppress to (Nexium) secretionstomach. acid in the Antacidhydroxide, magnesium hydroxide, includecalcium should compounds bicarbonate. sodium and carbonate hydroxide, aluminium sodium Structuresfor ranitidine reduce the excess the reduce acid. stomach Essential idea: Essential Applications and skills: Applications D.4pH regulation of thestomach Natureof Collectingof t of overproduction acid. stomach samplingof symptoms the trialling and thisof — one dyspepsia through Medicaldata the treatmen condition is includes often instantly acid the prescription the neutralize antacids of to Understandings: • • • • • • • • • Guidance:</p><p>Chemistry guide 161 Core topics Whatglobal the is of impact e? curricular links: curricular - mindedness: - The control and treatment of control high the treatment and The price HIVis by of exacerbated : retroviral agents socioculturaland retroviral issues. - How has How AIDS 1980s? the epidemic in changed early the since itsdiscovery of diseas Whatthe spread isstop to needed the Aim8 thisdisease? anti Utilization: Syllabuscrossand International • • OptionsB.2 B.7and — proteinsenzymes and Biology topic — vaccination 11.1 Aims: understanding of how viruses invade our systems. (4.1) systems. understandingour invade of viruses how problem. er from from er bacteria. the different ways in ways which work. antiviral medications different the Antiviralbeen recently medications infections beingforviral have researched. developed still some are others while e it to multiply. Alternatively, they the prevent they may viruses from Alternatively, ite multiply. to : cience: s multiplying by blocking enzyme activity within activity host the blocking cell. by multiplying enzyme Viruses lack a cell structure and so are more difficult to target with than drugsdifficult Virusesmore cellso and structure are lack target a to bacteria. work by Antiviralalteringcell’s may drugsso the virus the that material genetic cannotus Explanationof Descriptionviruses how diff of as work (Relenza) (Tamiflu)a Explanationzanamivir and oseltamivir how of against agent viruses. preventative flu zanamivir.and of Comparisonstructures of oseltamivir the associated with Discussionsolving AIDS the difficulties the of and can foundbe bookletStructures data for zanamivir inoseltamivir in the section37. Essential i dea Essential Guidance: Applications and skills: Applications D.5 Antiviral medications D.5 Antiviral Natureof ourScientific has improved collaborationresearchin scientific the community — recent Understandings: • • • • • • • •</p><p>162 Chemistry guide Core topics drug Do standards Do . the designthe (synthesis) drugs? of ic waste). ( 4.8) ( waste). ic typically involves a number of number a involves organic different typically reactions. e safelye dispose waste? of nuclear medicinal mindedness: - Solvent disposal is a growing environmental problem disposal Solvent environmental growing a is How do w do How : therapyPacific The : which sourcetree chemo the is of yew the : Taxol is facing extinction. facing is Taxol Whatethics the governing are Consider how pharmaceutical companies determine how Considerpharmaceutical how companies spend to determine research fundsmedications. new develop to Doresponsibilitya pharmaceuticalrare researchon do to have companies with significant them financialdiseasesprofit? provide not will that Productionof drug a country region? and by practicesand vary odds at balancebe to we do with each How appear that ethical other concerns solutiona formulate to trying when problem? the to Aim8 Aim8 Aim8 Theoryof knowledge: Aims: International • • • • • • • for . over solvents over - the scientific — the consider community must sideside the both the of effects effects patient the on the and medications of organisms becomeresistant antibacterials. to - occurs when micro when occurs risks and problems and risks The synthesis, The of effectan isolation, canadministration and medicationshave environment. the on : cience: levelwaste (HLW) givesamounts large that is off ionizingof waste s levelwaste (LLW)ionizing of gives smallthat is off amounts waste - - Tamiflu(oseltamivir). High radiationfor longa time. Low Antibioticresistance of impact disposal.Describe medical nuclear environmental the waste Discussionissues left to related environmental of improper disposal from drug Explanation waste, a ntibiotic and of dangers the of of antibiotic waste, development the animal and resistance. Discussion of the basics of green chemistry (sustainable chemistry) processes. was used develop to Explanationprecursor the chemistry green how of in in booklet sectiondata ofthe 37. structure provided The is oseltamivir radiationfor time. short a Essential i dea Essential Guidance: Applications and skills: Applications D.6 Environmental impact impact some medications Environmental of D.6 Natureof Ethical implications and production disposal (ie development, usewaste,and solvents of nuclear antibiot of and environment the on medications Understandings: • • • • • • • • •</p><p>Chemistry guide 163 Additional higher level topics 15 /25 hours 15 (3.7) quantities to satisfydemand. the quantities to curricular links: curricular - mindedness: - Considerethical the insteaddrugs implications synthetic using of of : natural sources. natural There is distributionand unequal an There medicinesand drugs availability certain of globe. the around Aim8 Utilization: Syllabuscross and International • • Topic— synthetic20.2 routes Topic— stereoisomerism20.3 Aims: . formsof cancer. enantiomer so that it can be carried out out itcan carried be so that </p><p>(paclitaxel) is obtained and used as a (paclitaxel)isused and obtained organicsynthesis many of these substances natural laboratories — many in can inproducedhigh be now enough the demand for certain hasdrugs demand — the exceeded supplysubstances the natural of thesesynthesize to needed (4.8) drugs. Chiralauxiliaries individualmolecules. allowchiral of production the enantiomers of a chiral auxiliary case study study case auxiliary chiral a cience: s — : Medicinal chemistry Taxol is a drug that is commonly used to treat several different several used Taxoltreat to commonly is is that drug a synthetically is but trees Taxolcommonly occurs now naturally in yew produced. active substance is Atemporarily chiraloptically an is that auxiliary into incorporated an Explanation taxol how of enantiomer. desired the form auxiliaries Descriptionchiral to use the of of identify to Explanationenantiomers. of use the of polarimeter a in booklet sectionofdata e structure th 37. The isin taxol provided chemotherapeutic agent. chemotherapeutic asymmetricallysingleofwithformation selective the a Additional higher level topics Option D Essential idea: Essential D.7 Taxol D.7 Natureof Advancesin technology Risksproblems and Understandings: • • • • • • • Guidance: Applications and skills: Applications</p><p>164 Chemistry guide Additional higher level topics that can that life - edical imaging. , can also be used to both diagnose and cure diseases.cure and alsocan used, be diagnose both to curricular links: curricular - mindedness: - The use of nuclear technology in medical treatments is in useconsistent not medical treatments ofThe across technology nuclear factors globe. some cost,the Culture, beliefsand are availability influenceuse. its is in MRI. “nuclear” simply oftenThere term the names Are referenceno to ways other of labelsinfluence does public they do knowing? our or How perceptioninfluence scientificimplementationprogressand ? Theoryof knowledge: Utilization: Syllabuscrossand International • • Topics— NMR21.1 and 11.3 — nuclearC.7 and Options reactionsC.3 half and — m C.4 option Physics 212. 212. all usedall for 131 and Pb - and 131 - life equation. life - 90, I 90, - 177,Y 90 are90 isotopes common used for - 99m, Lu - 99m, - life, emission type and chemistry. and life,type emission - 99mis the common most radioisotopeused in and Boron Neutron Boron and Capture (BNCT) Therapy - 177 and yttriumand 177 - it is important to try and balance try to riskradiation the to being with benefit the important considered. exposure isof ) (4.8 — ittechnique the of Nuclear radiation, whilst dangerous owing to its ability to damage cells Nuclearradiation, whilst its to damage to causeability and owing dangerous mutations ulation of the percentage and amount of and decayed radioactive amount and material ulationpercentage the of radiotherapy based type the on radiotherapy of radiation emitted. icinenuclearmed based half its on Alpha, beta, gamma, proton, positronproton, and emissions Alpha,neutron gamma, beta, are technology. is resonance applicationan Magnetic (MRI) imaging NMR of can external. internalbe and/or Radiotherapy Alpha (TAT) Therapy Targeted two which are used methods inare cancer treatment. side radiotherapy. Discussioncommon from effects of Explanationtechnetium why of Explanationlutetium why of Balancingalpha involving particles. beta equationsand nuclear Calc diseases Explanationusedbe treat itto how and spread might TAT of have that body. the throughout Commonside effectsdiscussed shouldinclude hair loss, nausea,fatigue and sterility. tissue. regenerating or growing and DNA to damage the include should Discussion Tc including; medicine nuclear in used Isotopes medicaltreatment. after certaina remaining of period usinghalf time nuclear the ance: Essential idea: Essential Applications and skills: Applications Guid D.8 Nuclear medicine medicine Nuclear D.8 of science: Nature Risksbenefits and Understandings: • • • • • • • • • • • •</p><p>Chemistry guide 165 Additional higher level topics to identify newly identify newly to purification.(3.7) substances. How do changes in technology influence substances.in changesdo How curricular links: curricular - mindedness: - A variety of spectroscopy techniques of A: variety can spectroscopy usedbe databases Computer : withspectroscopy usedbe could confirm data to Developmentsincreased: in technology have chances the people of developed molecules. developed our ethical our choices? The misuse of The is sport ininternationaldrugs an problem. in technology increasedDevelopments have chan the ofces people being changesdo caughtinfluence How using substances. in technology illegal our ethical choices? Aim4 Aim7 identity ofthe molecules.synthesized newly Aim8 beingcaught illegalusing Theoryof knowledge: Utilization: Syllabuscross and International • • • • • Topic— functional10.2 groups Aims: r. r. the data booklet. data the the properties on whichon properties the , NMR (section NMR booklet) data of27 and the H 1 of steroid detection in sport utilizing chromatography steroid chromatography utilizing detection sport in of A variety of analytical isolationA forvariety identification, medicines of analysis and detection, used techniques is drugs. and extractionsorganic based structure explainingand are relationship the between solubility.and Organic structures Organic use canthe infrared ofanalysed be identifiedand through NMR. spectroscopy,proton and spectroscopy mass presence The of of sample can use the alcohol detectedbe in breath through a of fuela lysecelloftype breatha ox reactionred a either or of of analytical Interpretation organicdeterminean to variety a structure spectra NMR. including spectroscopy, proton infrared spectroscopy mass and organican product. e xtraction Descriptionpurificationof and of process the of Considerdistillation,use the lawRaoult’s fractional of Description process the of spectroscopy. mass and Explanationofdetectedbe lyse with use the alcohol breatha can a how of organic functional Studentsidentifyshouldcommon ingroups a ablebe to by structures recognition compound drug given of IR from and common (sectionbooklet), data the of 26 steroid is structure Aincommon sectionprovided 34 in mass spectral fragment (section fragment spectral o fmass 28 data. booklet) data the Essential idea: Essential Guidance: Applications and skills: Applications D.9 Drug detection and analysis detection and analysis Drug D.9 of science: Nature assisted NMR)and Advanceshave in — advancesMS instrumentation in technology detection, (IR, inand drug isolation Understandings: • • • • • • • •</p><p>166 Chemistry guide Assessment</p><p>Assessment in the Diploma Programme</p><p>General Assessment is an integral part of teaching and learning. The most important aims of assessment in the Diploma Programme are that it should support curricular goals and encourage appropriate student learning. Both external and internal assessments are used in the Diploma Programme. IB examiners mark work produced for external assessment, while work produced for internal assessment is marked by teachers and externally moderated by the IB.</p><p>There are two types of assessment identified by the IB.</p><p>• Formative assessment informs both teaching and learning. It is concerned with providing accurate and helpful feedback to students and teachers on the kind of learning taking place and the nature of students’ strengths and weaknesses in order to help develop students’ understanding and capabilities. Formative assessment can also help to improve teaching quality, as it can provide information to monitor progress towards meeting the course aims and objectives. • Summative assessment gives an overview of previous learning and is concerned with measuring student achievement. The Diploma Programme primarily focuses on summative assessment designed to record student achievement at, or towards the end of, the course of study. However, many of the assessment instruments can also be used formatively during the course of teaching and learning, and teachers are encouraged to do this. A comprehensive assessment plan is viewed as being integral with teaching, learning and course organization. For further information, see the IB Programme standards and practices (2010) document.</p><p>The approach to assessment used by the IB is criterion-related, not norm-referenced. This approach to assessment judges students’ work by their performance in relation to identified levels of attainment, and not in relation to the work of other students. For further information on assessment within the Diploma Programme please refer to the publication Diploma Programme assessment: principles and practice (2009).</p><p>To support teachers in the planning, delivery and assessment of the Diploma Programme courses, a variety of resources can be found on the OCC or purchased from the IB store (http://store.ibo.org). Additional publications such as specimen papers and markschemes, teacher support materials, subject reports and grade descriptors can also be found on the OCC. Past examination papers as well as markschemes can be purchased from the IB store.</p><p>Methods of assessment The IB uses several methods to assess work produced by students.</p><p>Assessment criteria Assessment criteria are used when the assessment task is open-ended. Each criterion concentrates on a particular skill that students are expected to demonstrate. An assessment objective describes what students should be able to do, and assessment criteria describe how well they should be able to do it. Using assessment criteria allows discrimination between different answers and encourages a variety of responses. </p><p>Chemistry guide 167 Assessment in the Diploma Programme </p><p>Each criterion comprises a set of hierarchically ordered level descriptors. Each level descriptor is worth one or more marks. Each criterion is applied independently using a best-fit model. The maximum marks for each criterion may differ according to the criterion’s importance. The marks awarded for each criterion are added together to give the total mark for the piece of work.</p><p>Markbands Markbands are a comprehensive statement of expected performance against which responses are judged. They represent a single holistic criterion divided into level descriptors. Each level descriptor corresponds to a range of marks to differentiate student performance. A best-fit approach is used to ascertain which particular mark to use from the possible range for each level descriptor.</p><p>Analytic markschemes Analytic markschemes are prepared for those examination questions that expect a particular kind of response and/or a given final answer from students. They give detailed instructions to examiners on how to break down the total mark for each question for different parts of the response.</p><p>Marking notes For some assessment components marked using assessment criteria, marking notes are provided. Marking notes give guidance on how to apply assessment criteria to the particular requirements of a question.</p><p>Inclusive assessment arrangements Inclusive assessment arrangements are available for candidates with assessment access requirements. These arrangements enable candidates with diverse needs to access the examinations and demonstrate their knowledge and understanding of the constructs being assessed. </p><p>The IB document Candidates with assessment access requirements provides details on all the inclusive assessment arrangements available to candidates with learning support requirements. The IB document Learning diversity and the IB programmes: Special educational needs within the International Baccalaureate programmes outlines the position of the IB with regard to candidates with diverse learning needs in the IB programmes. For candidates affected by adverse circumstances, the IB documents General regulations: Diploma Programme (2011) and the Handbook of procedures for the Diploma Programme provide details on access consideration.</p><p>Responsibilities of the school The school is required to ensure that equal access arrangements and reasonable adjustments are provided to candidates with learning support requirements that are in line with the IB documents Candidates with assessment access requirements and Learning diversity and the IB programmes: Special educational needs within the International Baccalaureate programmes.</p><p>168 Chemistry guide Assessment</p><p>Assessment outline—SL</p><p>First assessment 2016</p><p>Component Overall Approximate weighting of Duration (hours) weighting (%) objectives (%)</p><p>1+2 3</p><p>Paper 1 20 10 10 ¾</p><p>Paper 2 40 20 20 1¼</p><p>Paper 3 20 10 10 1</p><p>Internal 20 Covers objectives 1, 2, 3 and 4 10 assessment</p><p>Chemistry guide 169 Assessment</p><p>Assessment outline—HL</p><p>First assessment 2016</p><p>Component Overall Approximate weighting of Duration (hours) weighting (%) objectives (%)</p><p>1+2 3</p><p>Paper 1 20 10 10 1</p><p>Paper 2 36 18 18 2¼</p><p>Paper 3 24 12 12 1¼</p><p>Internal 20 Covers objectives 1, 2, 3 and 4 10 assessment</p><p>170 Chemistry guide Assessment</p><p>External assessment</p><p>Detailed markschemes specific to each examination paper are used to assess students.</p><p>External assessment details—SL</p><p>Paper 1 Duration: 3/4 hour Weighting: 20% Marks: 30 • 30 multiple-choice questions on core, about 15 of which are common with HL. • The questions on paper 1 test assessment objectives 1, 2 and 3. • The use of calculators is not permitted. • Students will be provided with a periodic table. • No marks are deducted for incorrect answers. </p><p>Paper 2 Duration: 1¼ hours Weighting: 40% Marks: 50 • Short-answer and extended-response questions on core material. • The questions on paper 2 test assessment objectives 1, 2 and 3. • The use of calculators is permitted. (See calculator section on the OCC.) • A chemistry data booklet is to be provided by the school. </p><p>Paper 3 Duration: 1 hour Weighting: 20% Marks: 35 • This paper will have questions on core and SL option material. • Section A: one data-based question and several short-answer questions on experimental work. • Section B: short-answer and extended-response questions from one option. • The questions on paper 3 test assessment objectives 1, 2 and 3. • The use of calculators is permitted. (See calculator section on the OCC.) • A chemistry data booklet is to be provided by the school.</p><p>Chemistry guide 171 External assessment </p><p>External assessment details—HL</p><p>Paper 1 Duration: 1 hour Weighting: 20% Marks: 40 • 40 multiple-choice questions on core and AHL, about 15 of which are common with SL. • The questions on paper 1 test assessment objectives 1, 2 and 3. • The use of calculators is not permitted. • Students will be provided with a periodic table. • No marks are deducted for incorrect answers. </p><p>Paper 2 Duration: 2¼ hours Weighting: 36% Marks: 95 • Short-answer and extended-response questions on the core and AHL material. • The questions on paper 2 test assessment objectives 1, 2 and 3. • The use of calculators is permitted. (See calculator section on the OCC.) • A chemistry data booklet is to be provided by the school. </p><p>Paper 3 Duration: 1¼ hours Weighting: 24% Marks: 45 • This paper will have questions on core, AHL and option material. • Section A: one data-based question and several short-answer questions on experimental work. • Section B: short-answer and extended-response questions from one option. • The questions on paper 3 test assessment objectives 1, 2 and 3. • The use of calculators is permitted. (See calculator section on the OCC.) • A chemistry data booklet is to be provided by the school.</p><p>172 Chemistry guide Assessment</p><p>Internal assessment</p><p>Purpose of internal assessment Internal assessment is an integral part of the course and is compulsory for both SL and HL students. It enables students to demonstrate the application of their skills and knowledge, and to pursue their personal interests, without the time limitations and other constraints that are associated with written examinations. The internal assessment should, as far as possible, be woven into normal classroom teaching and not be a separate activity conducted after a course has been taught.</p><p>The internal assessment requirements at SL and at HL are the same. This internal assessment section of the guide should be read in conjunction with the internal assessment section of the teacher support materials. </p><p>Guidance and authenticity The work submitted for internal assessment must be the student’s own work. However, it is not the intention that students should decide upon a title or topic and be left to work on the internal assessment component without any further support from the teacher. The teacher should play an important role during both the planning stage and the period when the student is working on the internally assessed work. It is the responsibility of the teacher to ensure that students are familiar with:</p><p>• the requirements of the type of work to be internally assessed • the IB animal experimentation policy • the assessment criteria—students must understand that the work submitted for assessment must address these criteria effectively. Teachers and students must discuss the internally assessed work. Students should be encouraged to initiate discussions with the teacher to obtain advice and information, and students must not be penalized for seeking guidance. As part of the learning process, teachers should read and give advice to students on one draft of the work. The teacher should provide oral or written advice on how the work could be improved, but not edit the draft. The next version handed to the teacher must be the final version for submission.</p><p>It is the responsibility of teachers to ensure that all students understand the basic meaning and significance of concepts that relate to academic honesty, especially authenticity and intellectual property. Teachers must ensure that all student work for assessment is prepared according to the requirements and must explain clearly to students that the internally assessed work must be entirely their own. Where collaboration between students is permitted, it must be clear to all students what the difference is between collaboration and collusion.</p><p>All work submitted to the IB for moderation or assessment must be authenticated by a teacher, and must not include any known instances of suspected or confirmed academic misconduct. Each student must confirm that the work is his or her authentic work and constitutes the final version of that work. Once a student has officially submitted the final version of the work it cannot be retracted. The requirement to confirm the authenticity of work applies to the work of all students, not just the sample work that will be submitted to the IB for the purpose of moderation. For further details refer to the IB publication Academic honesty (2011), The Diploma Programme: From principles into practice (2009) and the relevant articles in General regulations: Diploma Programme (2011).</p><p>Chemistry guide 173 Internal assessment </p><p>Authenticity may be checked by discussion with the student on the content of the work, and scrutiny of one or more of the following:</p><p>• the student’s initial proposal • the first draft of the written work • the references cited • the style of writing compared with work known to be that of the student • the analysis of the work by a web-based plagiarism detection service such as http://www.turnitin.com. The same piece of work cannot be submitted to meet the requirements of both the internal assessment and the extended essay.</p><p>Group work Each investigation is an individual piece of work based on different data collected or measurements generated. Ideally, students should work on their own when collecting data. In some cases, data collected or measurements made can be from a group experiment, provided each student collected his or her own data or made his or her own measurements. In chemistry, in some cases, group data or measurements may be combined to provide enough for individual analysis. Even in this case, each student should have collected and recorded their own data and they should clearly indicate which data are theirs.</p><p>It should be made clear to students that all work connected with the investigation should be their own. It is therefore helpful if teachers try to encourage in students a sense of responsibility for their own learning so that they accept a degree of ownership and take pride in their own work. </p><p>Time allocation Internal assessment is an integral part of the chemistry course, contributing 20% to the final assessment in the SL and the HL courses. This weighting should be reflected in the time that is allocated to teaching the knowledge, skills and understanding required to undertake the work, as well as the total time allocated to carry out the work.</p><p>It is recommended that a total of approximately 10 hours of teaching time for both SL and HL should be allocated to the work. This should include:</p><p>• time for the teacher to explain to students the requirements of the internal assessment • class time for students to work on the internal assessment component and ask questions • time for consultation between the teacher and each student • time to review and monitor progress, and to check authenticity.</p><p>Safety requirements and recommendations While teachers are responsible for following national or local guidelines, which may differ from country to country, attention should be given to the guidelines below, which were developed for the International Council of Associations for Science Education (ICASE) Safety Committee by The Laboratory Safety Institute (LSI).</p><p>174 Chemistry guide Internal assessment </p><p>It is a basic responsibility of everyone involved to make safety and health an ongoing commitment. Any advice given will acknowledge the need to respect the local context, the varying educational and cultural traditions, the financial constraints and the legal systems of differing countries.</p><p>The Laboratory Safety Institute’s Laboratory Safety Guidelines ... 40 suggestions for a safer lab Steps Requiring Minimal Expense 1. Have a written health, safety and environmental affairs (HS&E) policy statement. 2. Organize a departmental HS&E committee of employees, management, faculty, staff and students that will meet regularly to discuss HS&E issues. 3. Develop an HS&E orientation for all new employees and students. 4. Encourage employees and students to care about their health and safety and that of others. 5. Involve every employee and student in some aspect of the safety program and give each specific responsibilities. 6. Provide incentives to employees and students for safety performance. 7. Require all employees to read the appropriate safety manual. Require students to read the institution’s laboratory safety rules. Have both groups sign a statement that they have done so, understand the contents, and agree to follow the procedures and practices. Keep these statements on file in the department office. 8. Conduct periodic, unannounced laboratory inspections to identify and correct hazardous conditions and unsafe practices. Involve students and employees in simulated OSHA inspections. 9. Make learning how to be safe an integral and important part of science education, your work, and your life. 10. Schedule regular departmental safety meetings for all students and employees to discuss the results of inspections and aspects of laboratory safety. 11. When conducting experiments with hazards or potential hazards, ask yourself these questions: –– What are the hazards? –– What are the worst possible things that could go wrong? –– How will I deal with them? –– What are the prudent practices, protective facilities and equipment necessary to minimize the risk of exposure to the hazards? 12. Require that all accidents (incidents) be reported, evaluated by the departmental safety committee, and discussed at departmental safety meetings. 13. Require every pre-lab/pre-experiment discussion to include consideration of the health and safety aspects. 14. Don’t allow experiments to run unattended unless they are failsafe. 15. Forbid working alone in any laboratory and working without prior knowledge of a staff member. 16. Extend the safety program beyond the laboratory to the automobile and the home. 17. Allow only minimum amounts of flammable liquids in each laboratory. 18. Forbid smoking, eating and drinking in the laboratory. 19. Do not allow food to be stored in chemical refrigerators.</p><p>Chemistry guide 175 Internal assessment </p><p>20. Develop plans and conduct drills for dealing with emergencies such as fire, explosion, poisoning, chemical spill or vapour release, electric shock, bleeding and personal contamination. 21. Require good housekeeping practices in all work areas. 22. Display the phone numbers of the fire department, police department, and local ambulance either on or immediately next to every phone. 23. Store acids and bases separately. Store fuels and oxidizers separately. 24. Maintain a chemical inventory to avoid purchasing unnecessary quantities of chemicals. 25. Use warning signs to designate particular hazards. 26. Develop specific work practices for individual experiments, such as those that should be conducted only in a ventilated hood or involve particularly hazardous materials. When possible most hazardous experiments should be done in a hood.</p><p>Steps Requiring Moderate Expense 27. Allocate a portion of the departmental budget to safety. 28. Require the use of appropriate eye protection at all times in laboratories and areas where chemicals are transported. 29. Provide adequate supplies of personal protective equipment—safety glasses, goggles, face shields, gloves, lab coats and bench top shields. 30. Provide fire extinguishers, safety showers, eye wash fountains, first aid kits, fire blankets and fume hoods in each laboratory and test or check monthly. 31. Provide guards on all vacuum pumps and secure all compressed gas cylinders. 32. Provide an appropriate supply of first aid equipment and instruction on its proper use. 33. Provide fireproof cabinets for storage of flammable chemicals. 34. Maintain a centrally located departmental safety library: –– “Safety in School Science Labs”, Clair Wood, 1994, Kaufman & Associates, 101 Oak Street, Wellesley, MA 02482 –– “The Laboratory Safety Pocket Guide”, 1996, Genium Publisher, One Genium Plaza, Schnectady, NY –– “Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories”, ACS, 1155 Sixteenth Street NW, Washington, DC 20036 –– “Manual of Safety and Health Hazards in The School Science Laboratory”, “Safety in the School Science Laboratory”, “School Science Laboratories: A guide to Some Hazardous Substances” Council of State Science Supervisors (now available only from LSI.) –– “Handbook of Laboratory Safety”, 4th Edition, CRC Press, 2000 Corporate Boulevard NW, Boca Raton, FL 33431 –– “Fire Protection Guide on Hazardous Materials”, National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 –– “Prudent Practices in the Laboratory: Handling and Disposal of Hazardous Chemicals”, 2nd Edition, 1995 –– “Biosafety in the Laboratory”, National Academy Press, 2101 Constitution Avenue, NW, Washington, DC 20418 –– “Learning By Accident”, Volumes 1-3, 1997-2000, The Laboratory Safety Institute, Natick, MA 01760 (All are available from LSI.)</p><p>176 Chemistry guide Internal assessment </p><p>35. Remove all electrical connections from inside chemical refrigerators and require magnetic closures. 36. Require grounded plugs on all electrical equipment and install ground fault interrupters (GFIs) where appropriate. 37. Label all chemicals to show the name of the material, the nature and degree of hazard, the appropriate precautions, and the name of the person responsible for the container. 38. Develop a program for dating stored chemicals and for recertifying or discarding them after predetermined maximum periods of storage. 39. Develop a system for the legal, safe and ecologically acceptable disposal of chemical wastes. 40. Provide secure, adequately spaced, well ventilated storage of chemicals.</p><p>Using assessment criteria for internal assessment For internal assessment, a number of assessment criteria have been identified. Each assessment criterion has level descriptors describing specific achievement levels, together with an appropriate range of marks. The level descriptors concentrate on positive achievement, although for the lower levels failure to achieve may be included in the description.</p><p>Teachers must judge the internally assessed work at SL and at HL against the criteria using the level descriptors.</p><p>• Assessment criteria are the same for both SL and HL. • The aim is to find, for each criterion, the descriptor that conveys most accurately the level attained by the student, using the best-fit model. A best-fit approach means that compensation should be made when a piece of work matches different aspects of a criterion at different levels. The mark awarded should be one that most fairly reflects the balance of achievement against the criterion. It is not necessary for every single aspect of a level descriptor to be met for that mark to be awarded. • When assessing a student’s work, teachers should read the level descriptors for each criterion until they reach a descriptor that most appropriately describes the level of the work being assessed. If a piece of work seems to fall between two descriptors, both descriptors should be read again and the one that more appropriately describes the student’s work should be chosen. • Where there are two or more marks available within a level, teachers should award the upper marks if the student’s work demonstrates the qualities described to a great extent; the work may be close to achieving marks in the level above. Teachers should award the lower marks if the student’s work demonstrates the qualities described to a lesser extent; the work may be close to achieving marks in the level below. • Only whole numbers should be recorded; partial marks (fractions and decimals) are not acceptable. • Teachers should not think in terms of a pass or fail boundary, but should concentrate on identifying the appropriate descriptor for each assessment criterion.</p><p>Chemistry guide 177 Internal assessment </p><p>• The highest level descriptors do not imply faultless performance but should be achievable by a student. Teachers should not hesitate to use the extremes if they are appropriate descriptions of the work being assessed. • A student who attains a high achievement level in relation to one criterion will not necessarily attain high achievement levels in relation to the other criteria. Similarly, a student who attains a low achievement level for one criterion will not necessarily attain low achievement levels for the other criteria. Teachers should not assume that the overall assessment of the students will produce any particular distribution of marks. • It is recommended that the assessment criteria be made available to students.</p><p>Practical work and internal assessment</p><p>General introduction The internal assessment requirements are the same for biology, chemistry and physics. The internal assessment, worth 20% of the final assessment, consists of one scientific investigation. The individual investigation should cover a topic that is commensurate with the level of the course of study. </p><p>Student work is internally assessed by the teacher and externally moderated by the IB. The performance in internal assessment at both SL and HL is marked against common assessment criteria, with a total mark out of 24.</p><p>Note: Any investigation that is to be used to assess students should be specifically designed to match the assessment criteria.</p><p>The internal assessment task will be one scientific investigation taking about 10 hours and the write- up should be about 6 to 12 pages long. Investigations exceeding this length will be penalized in the communication criterion as lacking in conciseness.</p><p>The practical investigation, with generic criteria, will allow a wide range of practical activities satisfying the varying needs of biology, chemistry and physics. The investigation addresses many of the learner profile attributes well. See section on “Approaches to the teaching of chemistry” for further links.</p><p>The task produced should be complex and commensurate with the level of the course. It should require a purposeful research question and the scientific rationale for it. The marked exemplar material in the teacher support materials will demonstrate that the assessment will be rigorous and of the same standard as the assessment in the previous courses.</p><p>Some of the possible tasks include:</p><p>• a hands-on laboratory investigation • using a spreadsheet for analysis and modelling • extracting data from a database and analysing it graphically • producing a hybrid of spreadsheet/database work with a traditional hands-on investigation • using a simulation provided it is interactive and open-ended. Some tasks may consist of relevant and appropriate qualitative work combined with quantitative work.</p><p>178 Chemistry guide Internal assessment </p><p>The tasks include the traditional hands-on practical investigations as in the previous course. The depth of treatment required for hands-on practical investigations is unchanged from the previous internal assessment and will be shown in detail in the teacher support materials. In addition, detailed assessment of specific aspects of hands-on practical work will be assessed in the written papers as detailed in the relevant topic(s) in the “Syllabus content” section of the guide.</p><p>The task will have the same assessment criteria for SL and HL. The five assessment criteria are personal engagement, exploration, analysis, evaluation and communication.</p><p>Internal assessment details</p><p>Internal assessment component Duration: 10 hours Weighting: 20% • Individual investigation • This investigation covers assessment objectives 1, 2, 3 and 4.</p><p>Internal assessment criteria The new assessment model uses five criteria to assess the final report of the individual investigation with the following raw marks and weightings assigned:</p><p>Personal Exploration Analysis Evaluation Communication Total engagement</p><p>2 (8%) 6 (25%) 6 (25%) 6 (25%) 4 (17%) 24 (100%)</p><p>Levels of performance are described using multiple indicators per level. In many cases the indicators occur together in a specific level, but not always. Also, not all indicators are always present. This means that a candidate can demonstrate performances that fit into different levels. To accommodate this, the IB assessment models use markbands and advise examiners and teachers to use a best-fit approach in deciding the appropriate mark for a particular criterion.</p><p>Teachers should read the guidance on using markbands shown above in the section called “Using assessment criteria for internal assessment” before starting to mark. It is also essential to be fully acquainted with the marking of the exemplars in the teacher support material. The precise meaning of the command terms used in the criteria can be found in the glossary of the subject guides.</p><p>Personal engagement This criterion assesses the extent to which the student engages with the exploration and makes it their own. Personal engagement may be recognized in different attributes and skills. These could include addressing personal interests or showing evidence of independent thinking, creativity or initiative in the designing, implementation or presentation of the investigation.</p><p>Chemistry guide 179 Internal assessment </p><p>Mark Descriptor</p><p>0 The student’s report does not reach a standard described by the descriptors below.</p><p>1 The evidence of personal engagement with the exploration is limited with little independent thinking, initiative or creativity. The justification given for choosing the research question and/or the topic under investigation does not demonstrate personal significance, interest or curiosity. There is little evidence of personal input and initiative in the designing, implementation or presentation of the investigation.</p><p>2 The evidence of personal engagement with the exploration is clear with significant independent thinking, initiative or creativity. The justification given for choosing the research question and/or the topic under investigation demonstrates personal significance, interest or curiosity. There is evidence of personal input and initiative in the designing, implementation or presentation of the investigation.</p><p>Exploration This criterion assesses the extent to which the student establishes the scientific context for the work, states a clear and focused research question and uses concepts and techniques appropriate to the Diploma Programme level. Where appropriate, this criterion also assesses awareness of safety, environmental, and ethical considerations.</p><p>Mark Descriptor</p><p>0 The student’s report does not reach a standard described by the descriptors below.</p><p>1–2 The topic of the investigation is identified and a research question of some relevance is stated but it is not focused. The background information provided for the investigation is superficial or of limited relevance and does not aid the understanding of the context of the investigation. The methodology of the investigation is only appropriate to address the research question to a very limited extent since it takes into consideration few of the significant factors that may influence the relevance, reliability and sufficiency of the collected data. The report shows evidence of limited awareness of the significant safety, ethical or environmental issues that are relevant to the methodology of the investigation*.</p><p>3–4 The topic of the investigation is identified and a relevant but not fully focused research question is described. The background information provided for the investigation is mainly appropriate and relevant and aids the understanding of the context of the investigation. The methodology of the investigation is mainly appropriate to address the research question but has limitations since it takes into consideration only some of the significant factors that may influence the relevance, reliability and sufficiency of the collected data. The report shows evidence of some awareness of the significant safety, ethical or environmental issues that are relevant to the methodology of the investigation.*</p><p>180 Chemistry guide Internal assessment </p><p>Mark Descriptor</p><p>5–6 The topic of the investigation is identified and a relevant and fully focused research question is clearly described. The background information provided for the investigation is entirely appropriate and relevant and enhances the understanding of the context of the investigation. The methodology of the investigation is highly appropriate to address the research question because it takes into consideration all, or nearly all, of the significant factors that may influence the relevance, reliability and sufficiency of the collected data. The report shows evidence of full awareness of the significant safety, ethical or environmental issues that are relevant to the methodology of the investigation.*</p><p>* This indicator should only be applied when appropriate to the investigation. See exemplars in TSM. Analysis This criterion assesses the extent to which the student’s report provides evidence that the student has selected, recorded, processed and interpreted the data in ways that are relevant to the research question and can support a conclusion.</p><p>Mark Descriptor</p><p>0 The student’s report does not reach a standard described by the descriptors below.</p><p>1–2 The report includes insufficient relevant raw data to support a valid conclusion to the research question. Some basic data processing is carried out but is either too inaccurate or too insufficient to lead to a valid conclusion. The report shows evidence of little consideration of the impact of measurement uncertainty on the analysis. The processed data is incorrectly or insufficiently interpreted so that the conclusion is invalid or very incomplete.</p><p>3–4 The report includes relevant but incomplete quantitative and qualitative raw data that could support a simple or partially valid conclusion to the research question. Appropriate and sufficient data processing is carried out that could lead to a broadly valid conclusion but there are significant inaccuracies and inconsistencies in the processing. The report shows evidence of some consideration of the impact of measurement uncertainty on the analysis. The processed data is interpreted so that a broadly valid but incomplete or limited conclusion to the research question can be deduced.</p><p>5–6 The report includes sufficient relevant quantitative and qualitative raw data that could support a detailed and valid conclusion to the research question. Appropriate and sufficient data processing is carried out with the accuracy required to enable a conclusion to the research question to be drawn that is fully consistent with the experimental data. The report shows evidence of full and appropriate consideration of the impact of measurement uncertainty on the analysis. The processed data is correctly interpreted so that a completely valid and detailed conclusion to the research question can be deduced.</p><p>Chemistry guide 181 Internal assessment </p><p>Evaluation This criterion assesses the extent to which the student’s report provides evidence of evaluation of the investigation and the results with regard to the research question and the accepted scientific context.</p><p>Mark Descriptor</p><p>0 The student’s report does not reach a standard described by the descriptors below.</p><p>1–2 A conclusion is outlined which is not relevant to the research question or is not supported by the data presented. The conclusion makes superficial comparison to the accepted scientific context. Strengths and weaknesses of the investigation, such as limitations of the data and sources of error, are outlined but are restricted to an account of the practical or procedural issues faced. The student has outlined very few realistic and relevant suggestions for the improvement and extension of the investigation.</p><p>3–4 A conclusion is described which is relevant to the research question and supported by the data presented. A conclusion is described which makes some relevant comparison to the accepted scientific context. Strengths and weaknesses of the investigation, such as limitations of the data and sources of error, are described and provide evidence of some awareness of the methodological issues* involved in establishing the conclusion. The student has described some realistic and relevant suggestions for the improvement and extension of the investigation.</p><p>5–6 A detailed conclusion is described and justified which is entirely relevant to the research question and fully supported by the data presented. A conclusion is correctly described and justified through relevant comparison to the accepted scientific context. Strengths and weaknesses of the investigation, such as limitations of the data and sources of error, are discussed and provide evidence of a clear understanding of the methodological issues* involved in establishing the conclusion. The student has discussed realistic and relevant suggestions for the improvement and extension of the investigation.</p><p>*See exemplars in TSM for clarification.</p><p>182 Chemistry guide Internal assessment </p><p>Communication This criterion assesses whether the investigation is presented and reported in a way that supports effective communication of the focus, process and outcomes.</p><p>Mark Descriptor</p><p>0 The student’s report does not reach a standard described by the descriptors below.</p><p>1–2 The presentation of the investigation is unclear, making it difficult to understand the focus, process and outcomes. The report is not well structured and is unclear: the necessary information on focus, process and outcomes is missing or is presented in an incoherent or disorganized way. The understanding of the focus, process and outcomes of the investigation is obscured by the presence of inappropriate or irrelevant information. There are many errors in the use of subject specific terminology and conventions*.</p><p>3–4 The presentation of the investigation is clear. Any errors do not hamper understanding of the focus, process and outcomes. The report is well structured and clear: the necessary information on focus, process and outcomes is present and presented in a coherent way. The report is relevant and concise thereby facilitating a ready understanding of the focus, process and outcomes of the investigation. The use of subject specific terminology and conventions is appropriate and correct. Any errors do not hamper understanding.</p><p>*For example, incorrect/missing labelling of graphs, tables, images; use of units, decimal places. For issues of referencing and citations refer to the “Academic honesty” section. </p><p>Rationale for practical work Although the requirements for IA are centred on the investigation, the different types of practical activities that a student may engage in serve other purposes, including:</p><p>• illustrating, teaching and reinforcing theoretical concepts • developing an appreciation of the essential hands-on nature of much scientific work • developing an appreciation of scientists’ use of secondary data from databases • developing an appreciation of scientists’ use of modelling • developing an appreciation of the benefits and limitations of scientific methodology.</p><p>Practical scheme of work The practical scheme of work (PSOW) is the practical course planned by the teacher and acts as a summary of all the investigative activities carried out by a student. Students at SL and HL in the same subject may carry out some of the same investigations.</p><p>Chemistry guide 183 Internal assessment </p><p>Syllabus coverage The range of practical work carried out should reflect the breadth and depth of the subject syllabus at each level, but it is not necessary to carry out an investigation for every syllabus topic. However, all students must participate in the group 4 project and the IA investigation.</p><p>Planning your practical scheme of work Teachers are free to formulate their own practical schemes of work by choosing practical activities according to the requirements outlined. Their choices should be based on:</p><p>• subjects, levels and options taught • the needs of their students • available resources • teaching styles. Each scheme must include some complex experiments that make greater conceptual demands on students. A scheme made up entirely of simple experiments, such as ticking boxes or exercises involving filling in tables, will not provide an adequate range of experience for students.</p><p>Teachers are encouraged to use the online curriculum centre (OCC) to share ideas about possible practical activities by joining in the discussion forums and adding resources in the subject home pages.</p><p>Flexibility The practical programme is flexible enough to allow a wide variety of practical activities to be carried out. These could include:</p><p>• short labs or projects extending over several weeks • computer simulations • using databases for secondary data • developing and using models • data-gathering exercises such as questionnaires, user trials and surveys • data-analysis exercises • fieldwork.</p><p>Practical work documentation Details of the practical scheme of work are recorded on Form 4/PSOW provided in the Handbook of procedures. A copy of the class 4/PSOW form must be included with any sample set sent for moderation.</p><p>Time allocation for practical work The recommended teaching times for all Diploma Programme courses are 150 hours at SL and 240 hours at HL. Students at SL are required to spend 40 hours, and students at HL 60 hours, on practical activities (excluding time spent writing up work). These times include 10 hours for the group 4 project and 10 hours for the internal assessment investigation. (Only 2–3 hours of investigative work can be carried out after the deadline for submitting work to the moderator and still be counted in the total number of hours for the practical scheme of work.)</p><p>184 Chemistry guide Assessment</p><p>The group 4 project</p><p>The group 4 project is an interdisciplinary activity in which all Diploma Programme science students must participate. The intention is that students from the different group 4 subjects analyse a common topic or problem. The exercise should be a collaborative experience where the emphasis is on the processes involved in, rather than the products of, such an activity.</p><p>In most cases students in a school would be involved in the investigation of the same topic. Where there are large numbers of students, it is possible to divide them into several smaller groups containing representatives from each of the science subjects. Each group may investigate the same topic or different topics—that is, there may be several group 4 projects in the same school.</p><p>Students studying environmental systems and societies are not required to undertake the group 4 project. </p><p>Summary of the group 4 project The group 4 project is a collaborative activity where students from different group 4 subjects work together on a scientific or technological topic, allowing for concepts and perceptions from across the disciplines to be shared in line with aim 10—that is, to “develop an understanding of the relationships between scientific disciplines and their influence on other areas of knowledge”. The project can be practically or theoretically based. Collaboration between schools in different regions is encouraged. </p><p>The group 4 project allows students to appreciate the environmental, social and ethical implications of science and technology. It may also allow them to understand the limitations of scientific study, for example, the shortage of appropriate data and/or the lack of resources. The emphasis is on interdisciplinary cooperation and the processes involved in scientific investigation, rather than the products of such investigation.</p><p>The choice of scientific or technological topic is open but the project should clearly address aims 7, 8 and 10 of the group 4 subject guides.</p><p>Ideally, the project should involve students collaborating with those from other group 4 subjects at all stages. To this end, it is not necessary for the topic chosen to have clearly identifiable separate subject components. However, for logistical reasons, some schools may prefer a separate subject “action” phase (see the following “Project stages” section).</p><p>Project stages The 10 hours allocated to the group 4 project, which are part of the teaching time set aside for developing the practical scheme of work, can be divided into three stages: planning, action and evaluation.</p><p>Planning This stage is crucial to the whole exercise and should last about two hours.</p><p>• The planning stage could consist of a single session, or two or three shorter ones. • This stage must involve all group 4 students meeting to “brainstorm” and discuss the central topic, sharing ideas and information.</p><p>Chemistry guide 185 The group 4 project </p><p>• The topic can be chosen by the students themselves or selected by the teachers. • Where large numbers of students are involved, it may be advisable to have more than one mixed subject group. After selecting a topic or issue, the activities to be carried out must be clearly defined before moving from the planning stage to the action and evaluation stages.</p><p>A possible strategy is that students define specific tasks for themselves, either individually or as members of groups, and investigate various aspects of the chosen topic. At this stage, if the project is to be experimentally based, apparatus should be specified so that there is no delay in carrying out the action stage. Contact with other schools, if a joint venture has been agreed, is an important consideration at this time.</p><p>Action This stage should last around six hours and may be carried out over one or two weeks in normal scheduled class time. Alternatively, a whole day could be set aside if, for example, the project involves fieldwork.</p><p>• Students should investigate the topic in mixed-subject groups or single subject groups. • There should be collaboration during the action stage; findings of investigations should be shared with other students within the mixed/single-subject group. During this stage, in any practically based activity, it is important to pay attention to safety, ethical and environmental considerations.</p><p>Note: Students studying two group 4 subjects are not required to do two separate action phases.</p><p>Evaluation The emphasis during this stage, for which two hours are probably necessary, is on students sharing their findings, both successes and failures, with other students. How this is achieved can be decided by the teachers, the students or jointly.</p><p>• One solution is to devote a morning, afternoon or evening to a symposium where all the students, as individuals or as groups, give brief presentations. • Alternatively, the presentation could be more informal and take the form of a science fair where students circulate around displays summarizing the activities of each group. The symposium or science fair could also be attended by parents, members of the school board and the press. This would be especially pertinent if some issue of local importance has been researched. Some of the findings might influence the way the school interacts with its environment or local community.</p><p>Addressing aims 7 and 8 Aim 7: “develop and apply 21st century communication skills in the study of science.”</p><p>Aim 7 may be partly addressed at the planning stage by using electronic communication within and between schools. It may be that technology (for example, data logging, spreadsheets, databases and so on) will be used in the action phase and certainly in the presentation/evaluation stage (for example, use of digital images, presentation software, websites, digital video and so on).</p><p>Aim 8: “become critically aware, as global citizens, of the ethical implications of using science and technology.”</p><p>186 Chemistry guide The group 4 project </p><p>Addressing the international dimension There are also possibilities in the choice of topic to illustrate the international nature of the scientific endeavour and the increasing cooperation required to tackle global issues involving science and technology. An alternative way to bring an international dimension to the project is to collaborate with a school in another region.</p><p>Types of project While addressing aims 7, 8 and 10 the project must be based on science or its applications. The project may have a hands-on practical action phase or one involving purely theoretical aspects. It could be undertaken in a wide range of ways:</p><p>• designing and carrying out a laboratory investigation or fieldwork. • carrying out a comparative study (experimental or otherwise) in collaboration with another school. • collating, manipulating and analysing data from other sources, such as scientific journals, environmental organizations, science and technology industries and government reports. • designing and using a model or simulation. • contributing to a long-term project organized by the school.</p><p>Logistical strategies The logistical organization of the group 4 project is often a challenge to schools. The following models illustrate possible ways in which the project may be implemented.</p><p>Models A, B and C apply within a single school, and model D relates to a project involving collaboration between schools.</p><p>Model A: mixed-subject groups and one topic Schools may adopt mixed-subject groups and choose one common topic. The number of groups will depend on the number of students. </p><p>Model B: mixed-subject groups adopting more than one topic Schools with large numbers of students may choose to do more than one topic.</p><p>Model C: single-subject groups For logistical reasons some schools may opt for single-subject groups, with one or more topics in the action phase. This model is less desirable as it does not show the mixed subject collaboration in which many scientists are involved.</p><p>Model D: collaboration with another school The collaborative model is open to any school. To this end, the IB provides an electronic collaboration board on the OCC where schools can post their project ideas and invite collaboration from other schools. This could range from merely sharing evaluations for a common topic to a full-scale collaborative venture at all stages.</p><p>Chemistry guide 187 The group 4 project </p><p>For schools with few Diploma Programme (course) students it is possible to work with non-Diploma Programme or non-group 4 students or undertake the project once every two years. However, these schools are encouraged to collaborate with another school. This strategy is also recommended for individual students who may not have participated in the project, for example, through illness or because they have transferred to a new school where the project has already taken place.</p><p>Timing The 10 hours that the IB recommends be allocated to the project may be spread over a number of weeks. The distribution of these hours needs to be taken into account when selecting the optimum time to carry out the project. However, it is possible for a group to dedicate a period of time exclusively to project work if all/most other schoolwork is suspended.</p><p>Year 1 In the first year, students’ experience and skills may be limited and it would be inadvisable to start the project too soon in the course. However, doing the project in the final part of the first year may have the advantage of reducing pressure on students later on. This strategy provides time for solving unexpected problems.</p><p>Year 1–Year 2 The planning stage could start, the topic could be decided upon, and provisional discussion in individual subjects could take place at the end of the first year. Students could then use the vacation time to think about how they are going to tackle the project and would be ready to start work early in the second year.</p><p>Year 2 Delaying the start of the project until some point in the second year, particularly if left too late, increases pressure on students in many ways: the schedule for finishing the work is much tighter than for the other options; the illness of any student or unexpected problems will present extra difficulties. Nevertheless, this choice does mean students know one another and their teachers by this time, have probably become accustomed to working in a team and will be more experienced in the relevant fields than in the first year.</p><p>Combined SL and HL Where circumstances dictate that the project is only carried out every two years, HL beginners and more experienced SL students can be combined.</p><p>Selecting a topic Students may choose the topic or propose possible topics and the teacher then decides which one is the most viable based on resources, staff availability and so on. Alternatively, the teacher selects the topic or proposes several topics from which students make a choice. </p><p>188 Chemistry guide The group 4 project </p><p>Student selection Students are likely to display more enthusiasm and feel a greater sense of ownership for a topic that they have chosen themselves. A possible strategy for student selection of a topic, which also includes part of the planning stage, is outlined here. At this point, subject teachers may provide advice on the viability of proposed topics.</p><p>• Identify possible topics by using a questionnaire or a survey of students. • Conduct an initial “brainstorming” session of potential topics or issues. • Discuss, briefly, two or three topics that seem interesting. • Select one topic by consensus. • Students make a list of potential investigations that could be carried out. All students then discuss issues such as possible overlap and collaborative investigations. A reflective statement written by each student on their involvement in the group 4 project must be included on the coversheet for each internal assessment investigation. See Handbook of procedures for more details.</p><p>Chemistry guide 189 Appendices</p><p>Glossary of command terms</p><p>Command terms for chemistry Students should be familiar with the following key terms and phrases used in examination questions, which are to be understood as described below. Although these terms will be used frequently in examination questions, other terms may be used to direct students to present an argument in a specific way.</p><p>These command terms indicate the depth of treatment required. </p><p>Assessment objective 1</p><p>Command term Definition</p><p>Classify Arrange or order by class or category.</p><p>Define Give the precise meaning of a word, phrase, concept or physical quantity.</p><p>Draw Represent by means of a labelled, accurate diagram or graph, using a pencil. A ruler (straight edge) should be used for straight lines. Diagrams should be drawn to scale. Graphs should have points correctly plotted (if appropriate) and joined in a straight line or smooth curve.</p><p>Label Add labels to a diagram.</p><p>List Give a sequence of brief answers with no explanation.</p><p>Measure Obtain a value for a quantity.</p><p>State Give a specific name, value or other brief answer without explanation or calculation.</p><p>Assessment objective 2</p><p>Command term Definition</p><p>Annotate Add brief notes to a diagram or graph.</p><p>Apply Use an idea, equation, principle, theory or law in relation to a given problem or issue.</p><p>Calculate Obtain a numerical answer showing the relevant stages in the working.</p><p>Describe Give a detailed account.</p><p>Distinguish Make clear the differences between two or more concepts or items.</p><p>Estimate Obtain an approximate value.</p><p>Formulate Express precisely and systematically the relevant concept(s) or argument(s).</p><p>190 Chemistry guide Glossary of command terms </p><p>Command term Definition</p><p>Identify Provide an answer from a number of possibilities.</p><p>Outline Give a brief account or summary.</p><p>Assessment objective 3</p><p>Command term Definition</p><p>Analyse Break down in order to bring out the essential elements or structure.</p><p>Comment Give a judgment based on a given statement or result of a calculation.</p><p>Compare Give an account of the similarities between two (or more) items or situations, referring to both (all) of them throughout.</p><p>Compare Give an account of similarities and differences between two (or more) items or and contrast situations, referring to both (all) of them throughout.</p><p>Construct Display information in a diagrammatic or logical form.</p><p>Deduce Reach a conclusion from the information given.</p><p>Demonstrate Make clear by reasoning or evidence, illustrating with examples or practical application.</p><p>Derive Manipulate a mathematical relationship to give a new equation or relationship.</p><p>Design Produce a plan, simulation or model.</p><p>Determine Obtain the only possible answer.</p><p>Discuss Offer a considered and balanced review that includes a range of arguments, factors or hypotheses. Opinions or conclusions should be presented clearly and supported by appropriate evidence.</p><p>Evaluate Make an appraisal by weighing up the strengths and limitations.</p><p>Examine Consider an argument or concept in a way that uncovers the assumptions and interrelationships of the issue.</p><p>Explain Give a detailed account including reasons or causes.</p><p>Explore Undertake a systematic process of discovery.</p><p>Interpret Use knowledge and understanding to recognize trends and draw conclusions from given information.</p><p>Justify Give valid reasons or evidence to support an answer or conclusion.</p><p>Predict Give an expected result.</p><p>Show Give the steps in a calculation or derivation.</p><p>Sketch Represent by means of a diagram or graph (labelled as appropriate). The sketch should give a general idea of the required shape or relationship, and should include relevant features.</p><p>Chemistry guide 191 Glossary of command terms </p><p>Command term Definition</p><p>Solve Obtain the answer(s) using algebraic and/or numerical and/or graphical methods.</p><p>Suggest Propose a solution, hypothesis or other possible answer.</p><p>192 Chemistry guide Appendices</p><p>Bibliography</p><p>This bibliography lists the principal works used to inform the curriculum review. It is not an exhaustive list and does not include all the literature available: judicious selection was made in order to better advise and guide teachers. This bibliography is not a list of recommended textbooks.</p><p>Rhoton, J. 2010. Science Education Leadership: Best Practices for the New Century. Arlington, Virginia, USA. National Science Teachers Association Press.</p><p>Masood, E. 2009. Science & Islam: A History. London, UK. Icon Books.</p><p>Roberts, B. 2009. Educating for Global Citizenship: A Practical Guide for Schools. Cardiff, UK. International Baccalaureate Organization.</p><p>Martin, J. 2006. The Meaning of the 21st Century: A vital blueprint for ensuring our future. London, UK. Eden Project Books.</p><p>Gerzon, M. 2010. Global Citizens: How our vision of the world is outdated, and what we can do about it. London, UK. Rider Books.</p><p>Haydon, G. 2006. Education, Philosophy & the Ethical Environment. Oxon/New York, USA. Routledge.</p><p>Anderson, LW et al. 2001. A Taxonomy for Learning, Teaching, and Assessing: A Revision of Bloom’s Taxonomy of Educational Objectives. New York, USA. Addison Wesley Longman, Inc.</p><p>Hattie, J. 2009. Visible learning: A synthesis of over 800 meta-analyses relating to achievement. Oxon/New York, USA. Routledge.</p><p>Petty, G. 2009. Evidence-based Teaching: A practical approach (2nd edition). Cheltenham, UK. Nelson Thornes Ltd.</p><p>Andain, I and Murphy, G. 2008. Creating Lifelong Learners: Challenges for Education in the 21st Century. Cardiff, UK. International Baccalaureate Organization.</p><p>Jewkes, J, Sawers, D and Stillerman, R. 1969. The Sources of Invention (2nd edition). New York, USA. W.W. Norton & Co.</p><p>Lawson, B. 2005. How Designers Think: The design process demystified (4th edition). Oxford, UK. Architectural Press.</p><p>Douglas, H. 2009. Science, Policy, and the Value-Free Ideal. Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania, USA. University of Pittsburgh Press.</p><p>Aikenhead, G and Michell, H. 2011. Bridging Cultures: Indigenous and Scientific Ways of Knowing Nature. Toronto, Canada. Pearson Canada.</p><p>Winston, M and Edelbach, R. 2012. Society, Ethics, and Technology (4th edition). Boston, Massachusetts, USA. Wadsworth CENGAGE Learning.</p><p>Brian Arthur, W. 2009. The Nature of Technology. London, UK. Penguin Books.</p><p>Headrick, D. 2009. Technology: A World History. Oxford, UK. Oxford University Press.</p><p>Popper, KR. 1980. The Logic of Scientific Discovery (4th revised edition). London, UK. Hutchinson.</p><p>Trefil, J. 2008. Why Science?. New York/Arlington, USA. NSTA Press & Teachers College Press.</p><p>Chemistry guide 193 Bibliography </p><p>Kuhn, TS. 1996. The Structure of Scientific Revolutions (3rd edition). Chicago, Illinois, USA. The University of Chicago Press.</p><p>Khine, MS, (ed). 2012. Advances in Nature of Science Research: Concepts and Methodologies. Bahrain. Springer.</p><p>Spier, F. 2010. Big History and the Future of Humanity. Chichester, UK. Wiley-Blackwell.</p><p>Stokes Brown, C. 2007. Big History: From the Big Bang to the Present. New York, USA. The New Press.</p><p>Swain, H, (ed). 2002. Big Questions in Sciences. London, UK. Vintage.</p><p>Roberts, RM. 1989. Serendipity: Accidental Discoveries in Science. Chichester, UK. Wiley Science Editions.</p><p>Ehrlich, R. 2001. Nine crazy ideas in science. Princeton, New Jersey, USA. Princeton University Press.</p><p>Lloyd, C. 2012. What on Earth Happened?: The Complete Story of the Planet, Life and People from the Big Bang to the Present Day. London, UK. Bloomsbury Publishing.</p><p>Trefil, J and Hazen, RM. 2010. Sciences: An integrated Approach (6th edition). Chichester, UK. Wiley.</p><p>ICASE. 2010. Innovation in Science & Technology Education: Research, Policy, Practice. Tartu, Estonia. ICASE/ UNESCO/University of Tartu.</p><p>American Association for the Advancement of Science. 1990. Science for all Americans online. Washington, USA. http://www.project2061.org/publications/sfaa/online/sfaatoc.htm.</p><p>The Geological Society of America. 2012. Nature of Science and the Scientific Method. Boulder, Colorado, USA. http://www.geosociety.org/educate/naturescience.pdf </p><p>Big History Project. 2011. Big History: An Introduction to Everything. http://www.bighistoryproject.com</p><p>Nuffield Foundation. 2012. How science works. London, UK. http://www.nuffieldfoundation.org/practical- physics/how-science-works.</p><p>University of California Museum of Paleontology. 2013. Understanding Science. Berkeley, California, USA. 1 February 2013. http://www.understandingscience.org.</p><p>Collins, S, Osborne, J, Ratcliffe, M, Millar, R, and Duschl, R. 2012, What ‘ideas-about-science’ should be taught in school science? A Delphi study of the ‘expert’ community. St. Louis, Missouri, USA. National Association for Research in Science Teaching (NARST).</p><p>TIMSS (The Trends in International Mathematics and Science Study). 1 February 2013. http://timssandpirls.bc.edu.</p><p>PISA (Programme for International Student Assessment). 1 February 2013. http://www.oecd.org/pisa.</p><p>ROSE (The Relevance of Science Education). 1 February 2013. http://roseproject.no/.</p><p>194 Chemistry guide</p> </div> </div> </div> </div> </div> </div> </div> <script src="https://cdnjs.cloudflare.com/ajax/libs/jquery/3.6.1/jquery.min.js" integrity="sha512-aVKKRRi/Q/YV+4mjoKBsE4x3H+BkegoM/em46NNlCqNTmUYADjBbeNefNxYV7giUp0VxICtqdrbqU7iVaeZNXA==" crossorigin="anonymous" referrerpolicy="no-referrer"></script> <script src="/js/details118.16.js"></script> <script> var sc_project = 11552861; var sc_invisible = 1; var sc_security = "b956b151"; </script> <script src="https://www.statcounter.com/counter/counter.js" async></script> <noscript><div class="statcounter"><a title="Web Analytics" href="http://statcounter.com/" target="_blank"><img class="statcounter" src="//c.statcounter.com/11552861/0/b956b151/1/" alt="Web Analytics"></a></div></noscript> </body> </html><script data-cfasync="false" src="/cdn-cgi/scripts/5c5dd728/cloudflare-static/email-decode.min.js"></script>